HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 and HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 service and support training
Table of contents
1 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 ................................................ 1 2 Tour the product ........................................................................................................................................... 3 Student performance objectives ........................................................................................................................... 4 Product introduction .............................................................................................................................................. 5 Product overview ................................................................................................................................ 5 New features — HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 and HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 ............................................................................................................................................ 5 New features — HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 ......................................................... 6 Product features ................................................................................................................................. 7 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 .................................................................................. 7 Speed .............................................................................................................. 7 Memory and storage ...................................................................................... 7 Print ................................................................................................................ 7 User interface ................................................................................................. 7 Connectivity .................................................................................................... 7 Resolution ....................................................................................................... 7 Security features ............................................................................................ 7 Mobile printing ................................................................................................ 8 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 .................................................................. 8 Speed .............................................................................................................. 8 Memory and storage ...................................................................................... 8 Print ................................................................................................................ 8 User interface ................................................................................................. 8 Connectivity .................................................................................................... 8 Resolution ....................................................................................................... 8 Security features ............................................................................................ 9 Mobile printing ................................................................................................ 9 Product comparison ............................................................................................................................ 9 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 .................................................................................. 9 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 ................................................................ 10 Paper handling .................................................................................................................................. 11
ENWW
iii
Input trays and feeders .................................................................................................. 11 Output bins and finishing accessories ............................................................................ 12 Supported paper sizes for trays ..................................................................................... 12 Supported paper sizes for the finishing accessories ..................................................... 15 Supported paper types for the finishing accessories .................................................... 18 Copy and scan features (HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 only) ................................. 20 Product views ...................................................................................................................................................... 21 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 .................................................................................................. 21 Product front view .......................................................................................................... 21 Product back view ........................................................................................................... 21 Interface ports and security lock .................................................................................... 21 Control panel view .......................................................................................................... 21 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 .................................................................................. 22 Product front view .......................................................................................................... 22 Product back view ........................................................................................................... 22 Interface ports and security lock .................................................................................... 23 Control panel view .......................................................................................................... 23 Stapler/Stacker (with or without hole punch) .................................................................................. 23 Booklet Maker (with or without hole punch) .................................................................................... 24 Supported print drivers and operating systems ................................................................................................. 25 Windows print drivers and supported operating systems ............................................................... 25 Mac OS print drivers and supported operating systems .................................................................. 26 Mobile Printing and HP ePrint Software ........................................................................................... 26 Additional print drivers and supported operating systems ............................................................. 27 Set up and configuration tools ............................................................................................................................ 28 Remote management .......................................................................................................................................... 29 Accessories and Supplies .................................................................................................................................... 30 Accessories ........................................................................................................................................ 30 Toner cartridge information ............................................................................................................. 30 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 ................................................................................ 30 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 ................................................................ 30 Imaging drum information ................................................................................................................ 31 Staples ............................................................................................................................................... 31 Supplies walkaround ........................................................................................................................................... 32 Warranty .............................................................................................................................................................. 33 3 Set up and configure .................................................................................................................................... 35 Student performance objectives ......................................................................................................................... 36 Install and set up the product ............................................................................................................................. 37 Install and set up the product overview ........................................................................................... 37 Installation and setup guides ........................................................................................................... 37
iv
ENWW
Prepare the site ................................................................................................................................. 37 Unpack the boxes .............................................................................................................................. 37 Load trays .......................................................................................................................................... 38 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 ................................................................................ 39 Load Tray 1 ................................................................................................... 39 Load Tray 2 ................................................................................................... 39 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 ................................................................ 39 Load Tray 1 ................................................................................................... 39 Load Tray 2 ................................................................................................... 40 Apply a keyboard overlay (M880) ..................................................................................................... 40 Install an output accessory ............................................................................................................... 41 Install the HP Jetdirect 2800w NFC & Wireless Direct Accessory .................................................... 42 Connect the print-engine cables ....................................................................................................... 43 Print a Configuration Page report ..................................................................................................... 43 Use Initial Setup to enable features and configure basic settings .................................................. 44 Initial setup overview ..................................................................................................... 44 Language Settings .......................................................................................................... 44 Date/Time Format .......................................................................................................... 44 Date/Time ....................................................................................................................... 45 Basic E-mail settings (HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 only) .................................... 45 Basic fax settings (HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 only) .......................................... 45 Retrieve from USB settings ............................................................................................ 46 Remove Initial Setup from the Home screen ................................................................. 46 Install product software ...................................................................................................................................... 47 Windows 8 ......................................................................................................................................... 47 Mac OS X ............................................................................................................................................ 47 4 Use and maintain ......................................................................................................................................... 49 Student performance objectives ......................................................................................................................... 50 Control panel walkaround ................................................................................................................................... 51 Control panel walkaround overview ................................................................................................. 51 HP Color LaserJet M855 control panel ............................................................................................. 51 HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 control panel .............................................................................. 52 Paper trays ........................................................................................................................................................... 50 Paper trays overview ........................................................................................................................ 54 Load the paper trays ......................................................................................................................... 54 Set the paper size and paper type .................................................................................................... 55 Print ..................................................................................................................................................................... 56 Print overview ................................................................................................................................... 56 Stapler/Stacker overview ................................................................................................................. 56 Select staple and hole-punch locations ........................................................................................... 58
ENWW
v
Booklet Maker overview ................................................................................................................... 58 Use the Booklet Maker ...................................................................................................................... 58 Easy-access USB printing .................................................................................................................. 60 Easy-access USB printing overview ............................................................................... 60 Enable easy-access USB printing from the control panel ............................................. 60 Enable easy-access USB printing using the EWS ........................................................... 61 Use easy-access USB printing ........................................................................................ 61 Quick Sets ............................................................................................................................................................ 63 Quick Sets overview .......................................................................................................................... 63 Create a Quick Set ............................................................................................................................. 63 Use a Quick Set .................................................................................................................................. 64 Copy, scan, and Digital Send ............................................................................................................................... 65 Copy, scan, and Digital Send overview ............................................................................................. 65 Scan Options ...................................................................................................................................... 65 Scan options overview .................................................................................................... 65 Original Sides .................................................................................................................. 66 Original Size .................................................................................................................... 66 Job Build .......................................................................................................................... 66 Optimize Text/Picture ..................................................................................................... 66 Image Adjustment .......................................................................................................... 67 Orientation ...................................................................................................................... 67 Automatic Content Orientation ...................................................................................... 67 Resolution ....................................................................................................................... 67 Image Preview ................................................................................................................ 67 Notification ..................................................................................................................... 68 Blank Page Suppression ................................................................................................. 69 Output Quality ................................................................................................................. 69 Color/Black ...................................................................................................................... 69 File types ......................................................................................................................... 69 OCR .................................................................................................................................. 70 Cropping Options ............................................................................................................ 71 Erase Edges ..................................................................................................................... 71 PDF Encryption ................................................................................................................ 71 Pages per Sheet .............................................................................................................. 71 Edge-to-Edge .................................................................................................................. 72 2-sided ID scan ................................................................................................................ 72 Book Mode ...................................................................................................................... 72 Output Bin ....................................................................................................................... 73 Staple/Collate ................................................................................................................. 74 Hole Punch ...................................................................................................................... 75 Booklet Format ............................................................................................................... 75
vi
ENWW
Booklet (Booklet maker only) ........................................................................................ 76 Configure and use Digital Send features .......................................................................................... 76 Configure and use Digital Send features overview ........................................................ 76 Save to SharePoint® (M880) ........................................................................................... 76 Save to SharePoint® overview ..................................................................... 76 Enable Save to SharePoint® ......................................................................... 77 Use Save to SharePoint® .............................................................................. 78 Embedded optical character recognition (OCR) ............................................................. 78 Embedded OCR overview ............................................................................. 78 Text (OCR) ..................................................................................................... 79 Unicode Text (OCR) ....................................................................................... 79 RTF (OCR) ...................................................................................................... 79 Searchable PDF (OCR) ................................................................................... 79 Searchable PDF/A (OCR) ............................................................................... 79 HTML (OCR) ................................................................................................... 79 CSV (OCR) ...................................................................................................... 79 Standard scan/send features ......................................................................................... 79 Set up standard scan/send features ............................................................ 80 Send a scanned document to one or more email addresses ....................... 81 Send a scanned document to a network folder ........................................... 81 Copy ................................................................................................................................. 82 Fax ................................................................................................................................... 83 Fax overview ................................................................................................. 83 Use the Fax Setup Wizard ............................................................................. 83 Mobile printing - HP ePrint, Apple AirPrint, and Google Cloud Print .................................................................. 85 Mobile printing overview ................................................................................................................... 85 HP ePrint overview ............................................................................................................................ 85 Apple AirPrint overview ..................................................................................................................... 86 Google Cloud Print overview ............................................................................................................. 86 Enable HP ePrint ................................................................................................................................ 86 Install HP ePrint Software for Windows ........................................................................................... 86 Register HP ePrint Software for Windows ........................................................................................ 87 Install HP ePrint Software for Mac OS .............................................................................................. 87 Use HP ePrint ..................................................................................................................................... 87 HP ePrint Software (Windows) ....................................................................................... 88 HP ePrint Software (Mac OS X) ....................................................................................... 88 HP ePrint via email .......................................................................................................... 88 HP ePrint mobile apps .................................................................................................... 89 Near Field Communication (NFC) and Direct Wireless printing .......................................................................... 90 NFC and Direct Wireless overview .................................................................................................... 90 NFC and Direct Wireless features ..................................................................................................... 90
ENWW
vii
Print using Touch to Print (NFC) ........................................................................................................ 90 Print from a Windows 8 mobile device ............................................................................................. 91 Print using HP wireless direct printing ............................................................................................. 91 HP wireless direct printing overview .............................................................................. 91 Print from Windows 8 tablets or PCs .............................................................................. 92 Print from Mac OS X 10.6, 10.7, or 10.8 ......................................................................... 92 Customize the Home screen ................................................................................................................................ 94 Customize the Home screen overview ............................................................................................. 94 Change the menus that appear on the Home screen ....................................................................... 94 Change the order that the menus appear on the Home screen ....................................................... 95 Change Display Settings ................................................................................................................... 95 Change control panel language and keyboard layouts .................................................................... 95 Security features ................................................................................................................................................. 96 Security features overview ............................................................................................................... 96 Manage security settings .................................................................................................................. 96 Security tab ..................................................................................................................... 96 Networking tab ............................................................................................................... 96 Access Control ................................................................................................................................... 97 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 97 Secure the HP Embedded Web Server ............................................................................ 97 Restrict access to features ............................................................................................. 97 Overview ....................................................................................................... 97 Lock the control panel menus ...................................................................... 98 Data and file security overview ........................................................................................................ 98 Encryption support: HP High-Performance Secure Hard Disks ..................................... 98 Protect stored data ......................................................................................................... 99 Lock the formatter cage .................................................................................................................... 99 Customer self-repair parts .................................................................................................................................. 50 CSR parts overview ......................................................................................................................... 100 Shared CSRs .................................................................................................................................... 100 HP Color LaserJet M855 CSRs ......................................................................................................... 100 HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 CSRs ......................................................................................... 101 CSR parts replacement ................................................................................................................... 101 CSR parts replacement overview ................................................................................. 101 Common CSR parts procedures .................................................................................... 101 Common CSR parts procedures overview .................................................. 101 Tray 1 rollers .............................................................................................. 102 Tray 2-X rollers .......................................................................................... 102 Fuser ........................................................................................................... 103 Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) ................................................................. 103 Secondary Transfer Roller ......................................................................... 103
viii
ENWW
Formatter ................................................................................................... 104 HP High-Performance Secure Hard Disk .................................................... 105 Memory DIMM ............................................................................................. 105 3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) tray assembly .............................. 106 Tray 3 and 4 (HCI) rollers ............................................................................ 106 HP Color LaserJet M855 CSR parts ............................................................................... 107 Solid-State Memory (SSM) ......................................................................... 107 Control Panel Assembly ............................................................................. 107 HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 CSR Parts ............................................................... 108 Control Panel Assembly ............................................................................. 108 Keyboard .................................................................................................... 110 Keyboard Overlay ....................................................................................... 112 Fax Card ...................................................................................................... 113 Document Feeder pickup and feed roller assembly .................................. 113 Document feeder separation pad .............................................................. 114 Document feeder separation pad spring ................................................... 114 White Backing ............................................................................................. 115 Background Selector for Backside Scanning ............................................. 115 Supplies ............................................................................................................................................................... 50 Supplies overview ........................................................................................................................... 117 Toner cartridge information ........................................................................................................... 117 HP Color LaserJet M855 ................................................................................................ 117 HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 ................................................................................ 117 Replace a toner cartridge ............................................................................................. 117 Imaging drums ................................................................................................................................ 118 Replace an imaging drum ............................................................................................. 118 Staple cartridge refill ...................................................................................................................... 118 200-Staple Cartridge Kit (2-pack) for Booklet Maker .................................................................... 118 Accessories ........................................................................................................................................................ 120 Accessories overview ...................................................................................................................... 120 Replace an output accessory .......................................................................................................... 120 Replace an input accessory ............................................................................................................ 121 Replace the HP Jetdirect 2800w NFC & Wireless Direct Accessory ............................................... 122 Maintenance and clearing jams ........................................................................................................................... 50 Maintenance and jam-clearing overview ....................................................................................... 123 Maintenance .................................................................................................................................... 123 Clean the scanner and white backing (M880) .............................................................. 123 Clean the document feeder pickup rollers and separation pad (M880) ...................... 123 Clearing jams ................................................................................................................................... 123 Clearing jams overview ................................................................................................. 123 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 .............................................................................. 124
ENWW
ix
Clear jams in Tray 1, the right door, and the fuser .................................... 124 Clear jams in Tray 2 .................................................................................... 124 Clear jams in the output bin ....................................................................... 125 Output-accessory bridge ........................................................................... 125 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 .............................................................. 126 Clear jams in Tray 1, the right door, and the fuser .................................... 126 Clear jams in Tray 2 .................................................................................... 126 Clear jams in the output bin ....................................................................... 127 Clear jams in the output-accessory bridge ................................................ 127 Clear jams in the document feeder ............................................................ 128 5 Support .....................................................................................................................................................133 Student performance objectives ....................................................................................................................... 134 Troubleshooting overview ................................................................................................................................ 135 Software ............................................................................................................................................................ 136 Software troubleshooting overview ............................................................................................... 136 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 136 Firmware ............................................................................................................................................................ 138 Firmware overview ......................................................................................................................... 138 Access the Pre-boot menu .............................................................................................................. 138 Theory of operation ........................................................................................................................................... 139 Theory of operation overview ........................................................................................................ 139 Service-level walkaround ............................................................................................................... 140 Document feeder and scanner assemblies (M880) ..................................................... 140 Document feeder assemblies (M880) .......................................................................... 141 Scanner assemblies ...................................................................................................... 143 Covers ........................................................................................................................... 144 Right door assembly ..................................................................................................... 148 Internal components .................................................................................................... 150 Internal components (1 of 6) ..................................................................... 150 Internal components (2 of 6) ..................................................................... 151 Internal components (3 of 6) ..................................................................... 153 Internal components (4 of 6) ..................................................................... 155 Internal assemblies (5 of 6) ....................................................................... 157 Internal components (6 of 6) ..................................................................... 159 1x500-sheet feeder ...................................................................................................... 161 1x500-sheet feeder covers ........................................................................ 161 1x500–sheet feeder components ............................................................. 163 3x500-sheet feeder ...................................................................................................... 164 3x500-sheet feeder covers ........................................................................ 164 3x500-sheet feeder components .............................................................. 166
x
ENWW
High capacity input (HCI) feeder ................................................................................... 167 Stapler stacker/booklet maker .................................................................................... 171 Stapler stacker covers ............................................................................... 171 Booklet maker covers ................................................................................ 173 Finisher main body (1 of 3) ........................................................................ 175 Finisher main body (2 of 3) ........................................................................ 176 Finisher main body (3 of 3) ........................................................................ 178 Stapler/stacker finisher main body ........................................................... 180 Booklet maker finisher main body ............................................................. 182 Booklet maker saddle assembly ................................................................ 183 Basic operation ............................................................................................................................... 186 Sequence of operation ................................................................................................. 187 Normal sequence of operation .................................................................. 187 Formatter-control system .............................................................................................................. 187 Formatter hardware ..................................................................................................... 188 Sleep mode ................................................................................................. 188 Input/output ............................................................................................... 189 CPU .............................................................................................................. 189 Memory ....................................................................................................... 189 Firmware .................................................................................................... 189 Nonvolatile memory .................................................................................. 189 PJL overview ............................................................................................... 189 PML ............................................................................................................. 190 Control panel ................................................................................................................ 190 Engine-control system ................................................................................................................... 190 DC controller ................................................................................................................. 191 Motors ......................................................................................................... 196 Fans ............................................................................................................ 197 Automatic damp paper detection .............................................................. 198 Low-voltage power supply ........................................................................................... 198 Over-current/over-voltage protection ...................................................... 200 Sleep mode operation ................................................................................ 201 High-voltage power supply .......................................................................................... 201 Fuser bias ................................................................................................... 203 Fuser-control circuit ..................................................................................................... 203 Fuser heater protection ............................................................................. 204 Fuser identification .................................................................................... 207 Fuser-life detection .................................................................................... 207 Laser/scanner system ..................................................................................................................... 207 Image-formation system ................................................................................................................ 209 Toner cartridge ............................................................................................................. 209
ENWW
xi
Imaging drum ................................................................................................................ 211 Developing roller engagement and disengagement ................................. 213 Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit ............................................................................ 214 Primary-transfer-roller engagement and disengagement ...................... 214 ITB unit detection ....................................................................................... 216 Secondary-transfer-roller unit .................................................................................... 217 Calibration ..................................................................................................................... 219 Color-misregistration contol ..................................................................... 219 Image stabilization control ........................................................................ 220 Color-sensor control (duplex models only) ................................................................. 221 Gray-axis correction ................................................................................... 222 Scanning/image capture system (M880 only) ............................................................................... 222 Scanner ......................................................................................................................... 222 Product boards ........................................................................................... 225 Scanner system block diagram .................................................................. 225 Scanner image-data path .......................................................................... 226 Scanner power topology ............................................................................ 227 Scanner power states ................................................................................. 228 Sensor topology ......................................................................................... 229 Boards I/Os ................................................................................................. 232 Scanner operation flow .............................................................................. 234 Document feeder system ............................................................................................. 238 Document feeder sensors .......................................................................... 239 Document feeder simplex operation ......................................................... 240 Document feeder duplex operation ........................................................... 242 Document feeder paper control and deskew ............................................ 244 Document feeder paper pick and separation ............................................ 245 Document feeder paper stopper & fins ..................................................... 246 Document feeder simplex selector ............................................................ 246 Document feeder white backing ................................................................ 247 Document feeder duplex selector ............................................................. 248 Document feeder hinge .............................................................................. 249 Pickup, feed, and delivery system .................................................................................................. 250 Photo sensors and switches ......................................................................................... 251 Motors and solenoids ................................................................................................... 253 Pickup and feed system ................................................................................................ 254 Cassette pickup .......................................................................................... 255 Multipurpose tray pickup ........................................................................... 261 Paper feed .................................................................................................. 263 Media width detection ................................................................................ 267 Fusing and delivery unit ............................................................................................... 267
xii
ENWW
Loop control ............................................................................................... 268 Fuser depressurize control ........................................................................ 270 Duplexing unit ............................................................................................................... 271 Duplexing reverse and feed control .......................................................... 273 Jam detection ............................................................................................................... 273 Input accessories ............................................................................................................................ 275 1x500-sheet paper feeder (M855 only) and 3x500-sheet paper feeder .................... 275 Paper feeder electrical components .......................................................... 277 Paper feeder pickup-and-feed operation .................................................. 280 Paper feeder jam detection ....................................................................... 281 3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) feeder ............................................................. 283 3x500-sheet paper-feeder cassette media-size detection and cassette-presence detection ..................................................................... 284 HCI electrical components ......................................................................... 285 HCI motor control ....................................................................................... 286 HCI pickup-and-feed operation ................................................................. 287 HCI jam detection ....................................................................................... 289 Intermediate paper transportation unit ...................................................................... 291 IPTU electrical components ....................................................................... 291 IPTU motor control ..................................................................................... 292 IPTU fan control .......................................................................................... 293 IPTU jam detection ..................................................................................... 293 Output accessories .......................................................................................................................... 294 Stapler/stacker and stapler/stacker with hole punch ................................................. 294 Stapler/stacker electrical components ..................................................... 297 Stapler/stacker motor control ................................................................... 299 Stapler/stacker feed-and-delivery operation ........................................... 301 Stapler/stacker jam detection ................................................................... 330 Booklet maker and booklet maker with hole punch .................................................... 334 Booklet maker power supply ..................................................................... 335 Booklet maker electrical components ....................................................... 337 Booklet maker motor control .................................................................... 339 Booklet maker feed-and-delivery operation ............................................ 340 Booklet maker jam detection ..................................................................... 380 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................... 380 Troubleshooting overview ......................................................................... 380 Prepare to run a test .................................................................................. 382 Diagnostic test example ............................................................................ 384 Stapler/stacker tests ................................................................................. 384 Booklet maker tests ................................................................................... 387 Hole punch tests ......................................................................................... 389
ENWW
xiii
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................................ 390 Troubleshooting overview .............................................................................................................. 390 Troubleshooting menu ................................................................................................................... 390 Troubleshooting menu overview ................................................................................. 390 Diagnostic Tests ........................................................................................................... 390 Disable Cartridge Check ............................................................................. 391 Paper Path Sensors test ............................................................................. 391 Paper Path Test .......................................................................................... 391 Manual Sensor Test .................................................................................... 392 Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test ..................................................................... 393 Component Test ......................................................................................... 393 Scanner Tests ............................................................................................. 394 Continuous Scan ......................................................................................... 395 Event Log ...................................................................................................................... 396 Paper Path Page ........................................................................................................... 396 Print Quality Pages ....................................................................................................... 396 6 Service ...................................................................................................................................................... 397 Student performance objectives ....................................................................................................................... 398 Required tools ................................................................................................................................................... 399 Parts removal overview .................................................................................................................................... 400 Covers and doors ............................................................................................................................................... 401 Main assemblies ................................................................................................................................................ 402 Input accessories ............................................................................................................................................... 406 Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU) ......................................................................................................... 408 Output accessories ............................................................................................................................................ 409 7 Library ...................................................................................................................................................... 415 Additional resources ......................................................................................................................................... 416
xiv
ENWW
HP Confidential
1
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880
September, 2013 Launch Course Minimum viewing requirements ●
System font set to small or normal
●
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 or Mozilla Firefox 3, Javascript enabled
●
Adobe Flash 10 or higher
●
Adobe Acrobat Reader 10 or higher
For additional information and accessibility features, see Help. Get ADOBE© FLASH© PLAYER Get ADOBE© READER © Copyright 2013 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Legal notice Course Description This course provides service and support information for the HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 and HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 products. Topics include features, architecture, and functionality of the product. Detailed information is also provided on removal and replacement procedures for Customer SelfRepair (CSR) parts. After completing this course, you should be able to set up, configure, and service the HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 and HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 products as well as provide technical sales support for both products. Audience
ENWW
●
Service engineers
●
Support engineers
●
Field service engineers
●
Solution architects
1
HP Confidential
Length Approximately three hours
2
Chapter 1 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880
ENWW
HP Confidential
2
ENWW
Tour the product
●
Student performance objectives
●
Product introduction
●
Product views
●
Supported print drivers and operating systems
●
Set up and configuration tools
●
Remote management
●
Accessories and Supplies
●
Supplies walkaround
●
Warranty
3
HP Confidential
Student performance objectives By the completion of this module, students should be able to:
4
●
Identify and describe key features and specifications of the HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 and HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 products.
●
Locate and identify major product components.
●
Describe the product bundles for both product lines.
●
Describe new features and technologies.
●
List the available accessories and supplies.
●
Explain the product warranty.
Chapter 2 Tour the product
ENWW
HP Confidential
Product introduction Product overview The HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 and HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 are color, A3/11x17 products suitable for the SMB and Enterprise markets, including Managed Print Services (MPS) customers. The HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 is a single-function peripheral (SFP). The HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 is a multi-function peripheral (MFP) with enhanced features including Save to SharePoint© and a retractable, physical keyboard. Both products share the same print-engine, most supplies, and many accessories. The major difference between the two products is that the HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 has a built-in scanner and document feeder. HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 The HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 replaces the HP Color LaserJet CP6015 product line. The print engine is also based off the HP Color LaserJet CP6015. HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 The HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 replaces the HP Color LaserJet CM6030 MFP and HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP. The print-engine is based on the HP Color LaserJet CM6030 MFP and HP Color LaserJet CM6040 MFP. The output accessories are based on the accessories from the HP Color LaserJet CP6015 and HP Color LaserJet CM6040/30 MFP products. Service personnel familiar with the previous products will recognize the internal components of the new products. The outer covers have been updated.
New features — HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 and HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 Both product have been upgraded significantly compared to their predecessors. A partial list of improvements for both the HP Color LaserJet M855 and HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 include:
ENWW
●
Increased print speed up to 45 pages per minute (ppm) on A4 and Letter size paper
●
Touchscreen control panel ◦
HP Color LaserJet M855: 4.3” Color touchscreen control panel
◦
HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880: 8” Color touchscreen control panel
●
Hardware Integration Pocket (HIP)
●
Auto On/Auto-Off
●
FutureSmart Firmware
●
Easy-access USB port
●
HP ePrint via email
Product introduction
5
HP Confidential
●
Apple AirPrint
●
HP Jetdirect 2800w Near Field Communication (NFC) accessory supports Touch to Print and Touch to Authenticate features (standard on M855x+ D7P73A and M880z+ D7P71A only, optional on other bundles)
New features — HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 The HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 has all the shared improvements listed in the previous section, plus the following: ●
New scanner and ADF: ◦
E-Duplex
◦
200-sheet ADF input capacity
◦
Improved multipick detection
◦
Selectable background
●
Department class finishing options including hole punch
●
Embedded OCR
●
Open Extensibility Platform (OXP)
●
Send to Sharepoint
●
Retractable physical keyboard: For convenient text entry The product is shipped with an English keyboard. Keyboard overlays are available for the following languages:
6
◦
Simplified Chinese
◦
Traditional Chinese
◦
Danish
◦
French
◦
French Swiss
◦
French Canadian
◦
German
◦
German Swiss
◦
Italian
◦
Japanese, Hiragana
◦
Japanese, Katakana
◦
Portuguese
◦
Russian
Chapter 2 Tour the product
ENWW
HP Confidential
◦
Spanish
◦
Spanish, Latin America
Product features HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 Speed ●
Prints 45 pages per minute (ppm) on Letter and 46ppm on A4 size paper
●
First page out of product in 11 seconds
Memory and storage ●
8 GB SSM (M855dn bundle only)
●
320GB Encrypted HDD Internal Hard Disk (M855xh and M855x+ bundles only)
●
Prints 45 pages per minute (ppm) on A4 and Letter size paper
●
Automatic duplex printing
Print
User interface ●
4.3” Color touchscreen control panel
●
Embedded Web Server (EWS)
●
HP FutureSmart firmware
Connectivity ●
Easy-access USB port for printing without a computer and upgrading the firmware
●
10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection with IPv4 and IPv6
●
Near Field Communication (NFC) accessory supports Touch to Print and Touch to Authenticate features (standard on M855x+ D7P73A only, optional on other bundles)
●
Hardware Integration Pocket (HIP)
Resolution ●
Prints up to 1200 x 1200 dpi (4800 ImageRet)
Security features
ENWW
●
Internet Protocol Security (IPsec) for network communications
●
Secure Install
●
Encrypted Hard Drive (on M855xh and M855x+ bundles only)
●
Password-controlled access to Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Product introduction
7
HP Confidential
Mobile printing ●
HP ePrint via email
●
HP ePrint software
●
HP ePrint app
●
HP ePrint Enterprise
●
HP ePrint Home & Biz
●
HP Printer Control app
●
Google Cloud Print
●
Apple AirPrint
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 Speed ●
Prints 45 pages per minute (ppm) on Letter and 46ppm on A4 size paper
●
Copies 45 pages ppm on Letter and 46ppm on A4 size paper
●
Scans 85 images per minute (ipm) mono and 63ipm color
●
First page out of product in 11 seconds
Memory and storage ●
320GB Encrypted HDD Internal Hard Disk
●
Prints 45 pages per minute (ppm) on A4 and Letter size paper
●
Automatic duplex printing
Print
User interface ●
8” Color touchscreen control panel
●
Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Connectivity ●
Easy-access USB port for printing and scanning without a computer and upgrading the firmware
●
10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection with IPv4 and IPv6
●
Near Field Communication (NFC) accessory supports Touch to Print and Touch to Authenticate features (standard on M880z+ D7P71A only, optional on other bundles)
●
Hardware Integration Pocket (HIP)
Resolution ●
8
Prints up to 1200 x 1200dpi (4800 ImageRet)
Chapter 2 Tour the product
ENWW
HP Confidential
Security features ●
Internet Protocol Security (IPsec) for network communications
●
Secure Install
●
Encrypted Hard Drive (on M855xh and M855x+ bundles only)
●
Password-controlled access to Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Mobile printing ●
HP ePrint via email
●
HP ePrint software
●
HP ePrint app
●
HP ePrint Enterprise
●
HP ePrint Home & Biz
●
HP Printer Control app
●
Google Cloud Print
●
Apple AirPrint
Product comparison HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 Model name/Model number
M855dn/A2W77A
M855xh/A2W78A
M855x+/A2W79A
M855x+/D7P73A
Tray 1 (100-sheet capacity)
√
√
√
√
Tray 2 (500-sheet capacity)
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Features
3x500-sheet paper feeder (Optional for the M855dn model. If this input accessory is installed, any of the optional finishing accessories can also be installed.)
√
3,500-sheet high-capacity input trays (Optional for the M855dn model. If this input accessory is installed, any of the optional finishing accessories can also be installed.) Automatic duplex printing
√
Optional 1x500-sheet feeder with cabinet. Available in Europe, the Middle East, and Africa. (If this input accessory is installed, any of the optional finishing accessories can also be installed.)
√
Optional stapler/stacker finishing accessory
ENWW
Product introduction
9
HP Confidential Model name/Model number
M855dn/A2W77A
M855xh/A2W78A
M855x+/A2W79A
M855x+/D7P73A
Optional stapler/stacker with 2/4 hole punch finishing accessory. Available in Europe, the Middle East, Africa, and Asia-Pacific Countries/ Regions Countries/Regions
√
√
√
Optional booklet maker finishing accessory. Available in Europe, the Middle East, Africa, and Asia-Pacific Countries/Regions
√
√
√
Optional booklet maker with 2/3 hole punch finishing accessory, Available in North America and Latin America
√
√
√
Optional booklet maker with 2/4 hole punch finishing accessory. Available in Europe, the Middle East, Africa, and Asia-Pacific Countries/ Regions
√
√
√
Features
10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection with IPv4 and IPv6
√
√
√
√
Easy-access USB port for printing without a computer and upgrading the firmware
√
√
√
√
HP Jetdirect 2800w NFC & Wireless Direct Accessory Optional HP Jetdirect 2800w NFC & Wireless Direct Accessory
√ √
HP High-Performance Secure Hard Disk Touchscreen control panel
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 Model name//Model number
M880z/A2W75A
M880z+/A2W76A
M880z+/D7P71A
Tray 1 (100-sheet capacity)
√
√
√
Tray 2 (500-sheet capacity)
√
√
√
3x500-sheet paper feeder
√ √
√
Features
3,500-sheet high-capacity input trays
10
Automatic duplex printing
√
√
Optional stapler/stacker finishing accessory
√
√
√
Optional stapler/stacker with 2/4 hole punch finishing accessory (Available in Europe, the Middle East, Africa, and Asia-Pacific Countries/Regions)
√
√
√
Optional booklet maker finishing accessory (Available in Europe, the Middle East, Africa, and Asia-Pacific Countries/Regions)
√
√
√
Chapter 2 Tour the product
ENWW
HP Confidential Model name//Model number
M880z/A2W75A
M880z+/A2W76A
M880z+/D7P71A
Optional booklet maker with 2/3 hole punch finishing accessory (Available in North America and Latin America)
√
√
√
Optional booklet maker with 2/4 hole punch finishing accessory (Available in Europe, the Middle East, Africa, and Asia-Pacific Countries/Regions)
√
√
√
10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection with IPv4 and IPv6
√
√
√
Easy-access USB port for printing and scanning without a computer and upgrading the firmware
√
√
√
Features
HP Jetdirect 2800w NFC & Wireless Direct Accessory
√
Optional HP Jetdirect 2800w NFC & Wireless Direct Accessory
√
√
HP High-Performance Secure Hard Disk
√
√
Touchscreen control panel
√
√
Retractable keyboard
√
√
Fax
√
√
√
Copy and Scan
√
√
√
Easy-access USB copying and scanning (no computer required)
√
√
√
200-page document feeder with electronic duplex copying and scanning and multi-feed detection
√
√
√
Paper handling The HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 and HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 accept the same input trays and output accessories. The input trays and finishing accessories included vary by product and bundle. Both products accept the same paper sizes and weights. Find complete specifications at the product-specific support sites or by searching the product model number on www.hp.com.
Input trays and feeders Built-in input trays All models and bundles include: ●
Tray 1: 100-sheet capacity multipurpose tray that folds down on the right side of the product.
●
Tray 2: 500-sheet capacity tray located at the bottom of the print engine, accessible from the front of the product.
Additional or optional input trays The additional input trays vary by product and bundle.
ENWW
Product introduction
11
HP Confidential
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 ●
M855dn: Only Tray 1 and Tray 2 for input
●
M855xh: Tray 1, Tray 2, and an additional 3x500-sheet feeder stand containing Tray 3, Tray 4, and Tray 5
●
M855x+: Tray 1, Tray 2, and a 3,500 HCI sheet feeder containing two trays, Tray 3 and Tray 4
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 ●
M880z: Tray 1, Tray 2, and an additional 3x500-sheet feeder stand containing Tray 3, Tray 4, Tray 5, and a cabinet for storage
●
M800z+: Tray 1, Tray 2, and a 3,500 HCI sheet feeder containing two trays, Tray 3 and Tray 4
NOTE: 3,500 HCI paper inputs only support Letter and A4 size paper.
Output bins and finishing accessories Both products and all bundles have a built-in output tray with a capacity of 500 sheets. In addition to the built-in output tray, both the HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 and HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 can be combined with a finishing accessory. Finishing accessories ●
Stapler/Stacker
●
Stapler/Stacker with 2/4 hole punch: available in Europe, the Middle East, Africa, and Asia-Pacific Countries/Regions
●
Booklet Maker/Finisher
●
Booklet Maker/Finisher with 2/3 hole punch: available in North America and Latin America
●
Booklet Maker/Finisher with 2/4 hole punch: available in Europe, the Middle East, Africa, and AsiaPacific Countries/Regions
Supported paper sizes for trays Tray 1
12
●
Letter: 279 x 216 mm (11 x 8.5 in)
●
Letter Rotated: 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in)
●
Legal: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
●
Executive: 267 x 184 mm (10.5 x 7.3 in)
●
Statement: 216 x 140 mm (8.5 x 5.5 in)
●
Oficio (8.5 x 13): 216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in)
●
11 x 17: 279 x 432 mm (11 x 17 in)
●
12 x 18: 305 x 457 mm (12 x 18 in)
●
3 x 5: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in)
Chapter 2 Tour the product
ENWW
HP Confidential
ENWW
●
4 x 6: 101 x 152 mm (4 x 6 in)
●
5 x 7: 127 x 178 mm (5 x 7 in)
●
5 x 8: 127 x 203 mm (5 x 8 in)
●
A3: 297 x 420 mm (11.7 x 16.5 in)
●
A4: 297 x 210 mm (11.7 x 8.3 in)
●
A4 Rotated: 210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7)
●
A5: 148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 in)
●
A6: 105 x 148 mm (4.2 x 5.8 in)
●
RA3: 305 x 430 mm (12 x 17 in)
●
RA4: 215 x 305 mm (8.5 x 12 in)
●
SRA3: 320 x 450 mm (12.6 x 17.7 in)
●
SRA4: 225 x 320 mm (8.9 x 12.6 in)
●
B4 (JIS): 257 x 364 mm (10.1 x 14.3 in)
●
B5 (JIS): 257 x 182 mm (10.1 x 7.2 in)
●
B6 (JIS): 128 x 182 mm (5.1 x 7.2 in)
●
Oficio (216 x 340): 215.9 x 340 mm (8.5 x 13.4 in)
●
8K 270 x 390 mm: 270 x 390 mm (10.6 x 15.4 in)
●
16K 195 x 270 mm: 270 x 195 mm (10.6 x 7.7 in)
●
8K 260 x 368 mm: 260 x 368 mm (10.2 x 14.5 in)
●
16K 184 x 260 mm: 260 x 184 mm (10.2 x 7.2 in)
●
8K 273 x 394 mm: 273 x 394 mm (10.8 x 16 in)
●
16K 197 x 273 mm: 273 x 197 mm (10.8 x 7.8 in)
●
D Postcard (JIS): 148 x 200 mm (5.8 x 7.9 in)
●
Envelope #9: 98 x 225 mm (3.9 x 8.9 in)
●
Envelope #10: 105 x 241 mm (4.1 x 9.5 in)
●
Envelope Monarch: 98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 in)
●
Envelope B5: 176 x 250 mm (6.9 x 9.8 in)
●
Envelope C5: 162 x 229 mm (6.4 x 9 in)
●
Envelope C6: 114 x 162 mm (4.5 x 6.4in)
●
Envelope DL: 110 x 220 mm (4.3 x 8.7 in)
●
Custom: 76 x 127 mm to 320 x 457 mm (3.0 x 5.0 in to 12.6 x 18.0 in)
Product introduction
13
HP Confidential
Tray 2 ●
Letter: 279 x 216 mm (11 x 8.5 in)
●
Letter Rotated: 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in)
●
Legal: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
●
Executive: 267 x 184 mm (10.5 x 7.3 in)
●
Oficio (8.5 x 13): 216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in)
●
11 x 17: 279 x 432 mm (11 x 17 in)
●
A3: 297 x 420 mm (11.7 x 16.5 in)
●
A4: 297 x 210 mm (11.7 x 8.3 in)
●
A4 Rotated: 210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7)
●
A5: 148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 in)
●
SRA4: 225 x 320 mm (8.9 x 12.6 in)
●
B4 (JIS): 257 x 364 mm (10.1 x 14.3 in)
●
B5 (JIS): 257 x 182 mm (10.1 x 7.2 in)
●
Oficio (216 x 340): 215.9 x 340 mm (8.5 x 13.4 in)
●
8K 270 x 390 mm: 270 x 390 mm (10.6 x 15.4 in)
●
16K 195 x 270 mm: 270 x 195 mm (10.6 x 7.7 in)
●
8K 260 x 368 mm: 260 x 368 mm (10.2 x 14.5 in)
●
16K 184 x 260 mm: 260 x 184 mm (10.2 x 7.2 in)
●
8K 273 x 394 mm: 273 x 394 mm (10.8 x 16 in)
●
16K 197 x 273 mm: 273 x 197 mm (10.8 x 7.8 in)
●
Custom: 148 x 210 mm to 297 x 432 mm (5.9 x 8.3 in to 11.6 x 17 in)
3x500-sheet trays
14
●
Letter: 279 x 216 mm (11 x 8.5 in)
●
Letter Rotated: 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in)
●
Legal: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
●
Executive: 267 x 184 mm (10.5 x 7.3 in)
●
Oficio (8.5 x 13): 216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in)
●
12 x 18: 305 x 457 mm (12 x 18 in)
●
A3: 297 x 420 mm (11.7 x 16.5 in)
●
A4: 297 x 210 mm (11.7 x 8.3 in)
Chapter 2 Tour the product
ENWW
HP Confidential
●
A4 Rotated: 210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7)
●
A5: 148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 in)
●
RA3: 305 x 430 mm (12 x 17 in)
●
RA4: 215 x 305 mm (8.5 x 12 in)
●
SRA3: 320 x 450 mm (12.6 x 17.7 in)
●
SRA4: 225 x 320 mm (8.9 x 12.6 in)
●
B4 (JIS): 257 x 364 mm (10.1 x 14.3 in)
●
B5 (JIS): 257 x 182 mm (10.1 x 7.2 in)
●
Oficio (216 x 340): 215.9 x 340 mm (8.5 x 13.4 in)
●
8K 270 x 390 mm: 270 x 390 mm (10.6 x 15.4 in)
●
16K 195 x 270 mm: 270 x 195 mm (10.6 x 7.7 in)
●
8K 260 x 368 mm: 260 x 368 mm (10.2 x 14.5 in)
●
16K 184 x 260 mm: 260 x 184 mm (10.2 x 7.2 in)
●
8K 273 x 394 mm: 273 x 394 mm (10.8 x 16 in)
●
16K 197 x 273 mm: 273 x 197 mm (10.8 x 7.8 in)
3,500 HCI ●
Letter: 279 x 216 mm (11 x 8.5 in)
●
A4: 297 x 210 mm (11.7 x 8.3 in)
Supported paper sizes for the finishing accessories Stacking (Portrait)
ENWW
●
Letter (Short-edge feed)
●
Legal
●
Executive (Short-edge feed)
●
Statement
●
Oficio (8.5 x 13)
●
11 x 17
●
12 x 18
●
4x6
●
5x7
●
5x8
●
A3
Product introduction
15
HP Confidential
●
A4 (Short-edge feed)
●
A5
●
A6
●
RA3
●
RA4
●
SRA3
●
SRA4
●
B4 (JIS)
●
B5 (JIS) (Short-edge feed)
●
B6 (JIS)
●
Oficio (216 x 340)
●
8K 270 x 390 mm
●
16K 195 x 270 mm (Short-edge feed)
●
8K 260 x 368 mm
●
16K 184 x 260 mm (Short-edge feed)
●
8K 273 x 394 mm
●
16K 197 x 273 mm (Short-edge feed)
●
D Postcard (JIS)
●
Envelope #9
●
Envelope #10
●
Envelope Monarch
●
Envelope B5
●
Envelope C5
●
Envelope C6
●
Envelope DL
●
Custom—Dimensions vary
Stacking (Landscape)
16
●
Letter
●
Legal
●
Executive
●
A4
Chapter 2 Tour the product
ENWW
HP Confidential
●
A5
●
RA4
●
SRA4
●
B5 (JIS)
●
16K 195 x 270 mm
●
16K 184 x 260 mm
●
16K 197 x 273 mm
●
D Postcard (JIS)
●
Custom—Dimensions vary
Staple (Corner) ●
Letter
●
Letter (Short-edge feed)
●
Legal
●
Oficio (8.5 x 13)
●
11 x 17
●
A3
●
A4
●
A4 (Short-edge feed)
●
B4 (JIS)
●
Oficio (216 x 340)
●
8K 270 x 390 mm
●
8K 273 x 394 mm
Staple (Saddle)
ENWW
●
Letter
●
Letter (Short-edge feed)
●
Legal
●
Oficio (8.5 x 13)
●
11 x 17
●
A3
●
A4
●
A4 (Short-edge feed)
Product introduction
17
HP Confidential
●
B4 (JIS)
●
Oficio (216 x 340)
●
8K 270 x 390 mm
Hole punch (2 holes) ●
Letter
●
Letter (Short-edge feed)
●
Legal
●
Oficio (8.5 x 13)
●
11 x 17
●
A3
●
A4
●
A4 (Short-edge feed)
●
Oficio (216 x 340)
Hole punch (3–4 holes) ●
Letter
●
11 x 17
●
A3
●
A4
Booklet (Fold and Stitch) ●
Letter (Short-edge feed)
●
Legal
●
Oficio (8.5 x 13)
●
11 x 17
●
A3
●
A4 (Short-edge feed)
●
Oficio (216 x 340)
Supported paper types for the finishing accessories NOTE: The number of sheets that can be stapled or folded into booklets varies with the thickness and size of the paper. The numbers in the following table indicate the number of sheets supported for each feature. Pages pass through the hole punch unit one sheet at a time.
18
Chapter 2 Tour the product
ENWW
HP Confidential Type
Stacking in bins 1 or 2
Staples, small sheets of paper
Staples, large sheets of paper
Hole punch
Booklets in bin 3 with one cover sheet
Booklets in bin 3 with no cover sheet
Plain
√
50
30
√
14
15
HP EcoSMART Lite
√
50
30
√
14
15
HP Matte 90g
√
44
22
√
9
10
Light 60-74g
√
50
30
√
14
15
Bond
√
50
30
√
9
10
Recycled
√
50
30
√
14
15
Intermediate 85-95g
√
50
30
√
5
6
HP Matte 120g
√
18
11
√
4
5
HP Soft Gloss 120g
√
8
8
√
4
5
HP Glossy 120g
√
8
8
√
4
5
Mid-Weight 96-110g
√
18
11
√
4
5
Heavy 111-130g
√
18
9
√
4
5
Mid-Weight Glossy 96-110g
√
8
8
√
4
5
Heavy Glossy 111-130g
√
8
8
√
4
5
HP Matte 150g
√
13
9
√
2
3
HP Glossy 150g
√
5
5
√
Extra Heavy 131-175g
√
12
16
√
2
3
Extra Heavy Glossy 131-175g
√
√
HP Matte 200g
√
√
HP Glossy 200g
√
√
Cardstock 176-220g
√
√
Card Glossy 176-220g
√
√
Color Transparency
√
Labels
√
Letterhead
√
14
15
Envelope
√
Heavy Envelope
√
ENWW
50
30
√
Product introduction
19
HP Confidential Type
Stacking in bins 1 or 2
Staples, small sheets of paper
Staples, large sheets of paper
Hole punch
Booklets in bin 3 with one cover sheet
Booklets in bin 3 with no cover sheet
Preprinted
√
50
30
√
14
15
Prepunched
√
50
30
Colored
√
50
30
√
14
15
Rough
√
50
30
√
9
10
Heavy Rough
√
18
11
√
5
6
Copy and scan features (HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 only) The HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 has a built-in flatbed scanner and automatic document feeder (ADF). The scanner and ADF are used for the copy, fax, scan, and digital-send features. Copy: The product can make black and white or color copies of single-page or multiple-page documents up to A3/11x17. Scan: The product can scan black and white or color documents up to A3/11x17 for the following features: ●
Fax
●
Send to SharePoint©
●
Save to Device Memory
●
Save to Network Folder
●
Save to USB
ADF features:
20
●
High capacity: Holds up to 200 sheets of paper to process large scan or copy jobs.
●
Large format: Accepts paper up to A3/11x17.
●
HP EveryPage: Ultrasonic sensor detects when multiple pages are picked up or a page has a note attached to it.
●
Single-pass duplex scanning: A second scan head that is built-in to the ADF scans the back side of the document, allowing for scan speed to match print-engine speed.
Chapter 2 Tour the product
ENWW
HP Confidential
Product views HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 Product front view 1.
Output bin
2.
Control panel
3.
Easy access USB
4.
HIP
5.
Right door (fuser access, jam clearing)
6.
Tray 1
7.
Tray 2
8.
On/Off button
9.
Front door
10. 3 x 500 sheet input trays 11. Intermediate paper transportation unit (IPTU)
Product back view 1.
Formatter (contains the interface ports)
2.
Power connection
3.
Model and serial number label
Interface ports and security lock 1.
Security cable slot
2.
Local area network (LAN) Ethernet (RJ-45) network port
3.
USB port for external devices (port might be covered)
4.
Hi-speed USB 2.0 port
5.
Foreign interface harness (for connecting third-party devices)
Control panel view
ENWW
1.
HP logo or Home button
2.
Stop button
3.
Sign In or Sign Out button
4.
Product status
5.
Language Selection button
Product views
21
HP Confidential
6.
Sleep button
7.
Network button
8.
Help button
9.
Scroll bar
10. Features 11. Home button and light 12. Refresh button
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 Product front view 1.
Document-feeder top cover (access for clearing jams)
2.
Document-feeder input tray
3.
Document-feeder output bin
4.
Control panel with color touchscreen display
5.
Keyboard (pull the keyboard straight out to use it)
6.
Right door (access to the fuser and for clearing jams)
7.
Tray 1
8.
Lower-right door (access for clearing jams)
9.
Tray 2
10. On/off button 11. Front door (access to the toner cartridges and imaging drums) 12. Output bin 13. Easy-access USB port 14. Handle for lifting the scanner assembly (to access the scanner glass) 15. Hardware integration pocket 16. 3,500 sheet high-capacity trays 17. Locking lever for 3,500 high-capacity tray 18. Intermediate paper transportation unit (IPTU)
Product back view
22
1.
Formatter (contains the interface ports)
2.
Power connection
3.
Model and serial number label
Chapter 2 Tour the product
ENWW
HP Confidential
Interface ports and security lock 1.
Security cable slot
2.
Local area network (LAN) Ethernet (RJ-45) network port
3.
USB port for external devices (port might be covered)
4.
Hi-speed USB 2.0 port
5.
Foreign interface harness (for connecting third-party devices)
6.
Fax port
Control panel view 1.
Home button
2.
Refresh button
3.
Sign In or Sign Out button
4.
HP logo or Home button
5.
Stop button
6.
Start button
7.
Product status
8.
Language Selection button
9.
Sleep button
10. Network button 11. Help button 12. Copies field 13. Scroll bar 14. Features 15. Keyboard 16. Easy-access USB port
Stapler/Stacker (with or without hole punch) The Stapler/Stacker accessory is also available without the hole punch, but the accessory with the hole punch is shown here.
ENWW
1.
Front door
2.
Staple location
3.
Chad collector
4.
Paper advance knob
Product views
23
HP Confidential
5.
Hole punch unit
6.
Top jam access cover
7.
Upper stepped cover door
8.
Output bins
9.
Cables
10. Connection interface
Booklet Maker (with or without hole punch) The Booklet Maker accessory is also available without the hole punch, but the accessory with the hole punch is shown here. 1.
Front door
2.
Staple location
3.
Chad collector
4.
Paper advance knob
5.
Hole punch unit
6.
Top jam access cover
7.
Upper stepped cover door
8.
Output bins
9.
Cables
10. Connection interface
24
Chapter 2 Tour the product
ENWW
HP Confidential
Supported print drivers and operating systems HP provides Windows and Mac OS drivers and optional software on the In-box CD. All print drivers, including the Universal Print Driver (UPD) and print drivers for other operating systems, are available on www.hp.com. See Supported drivers and operating systems in the course library for a table showing the available Windows and Mac OS drivers.
Windows print drivers and supported operating systems Discrete HP PCL6 driver The software installer included on the In-box CD installs the discrete (product-specific) HP PCL 6 driver and optional software on the following Windows operating systems: ●
Windows XP SP3 or greater (32-bit)
●
Windows Vista (32-bit and 64-bit)
●
Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit)
●
Windows 8 (32-bit and 64-bit)
●
Windows Server 2003 SP2 or greater (32-bit)
●
Windows Server 2008 (32-bit and 64-bit)
●
Windows Server 2008 R2 (64-bit)
●
Windows Server 2012 (64-bit)
The software installer on the In-box CD will not run on the 64-bit versions of Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 (SP2 or greater). The HP PCL 6 driver can be installed on systems running those operating systems, however. See the Set Up and Configure module of this course for more information. NOTE: Windows Vista Starter edition is not supported. HP Universal Print Driver (UPD) Customers must upgrade to version 5.7 or greater of the HP Universal Print Driver (UPD) to have full functionality. Earlier versions of the driver do not support the output accessories. The product supports the following versions of the HP Universal Print Driver (UPD): ●
HP UPD PCL 6
●
HP UPD PCL PS
●
HP UPD PCL 5 NOTE: HP UPD PCL 5 does not support Windows 8 or Windows Server 2012.
ENWW
Supported print drivers and operating systems
25
HP Confidential
Mac OS print drivers and supported operating systems The software installer included on the In-box CD installs the Macintosh print drivers and HP Utility on the following Mac OS versions: ●
Mac OS X 10.6 Snow Leopard
●
Mac OS X 10.7 Lion
●
Mac OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion
Many Macintosh computers do not have internal CD/DVD drives. Customers need to download the software from www.hp.com or www.apple.com. See the Set Up and Configure module of this course for more information.
Mobile Printing and HP ePrint Software Both products support the following Mobile Printing options: ●
HP ePrint via email
●
HP ePrint software
●
HP ePrint app
●
HP ePrint Service app
●
HP ePrint Enterprise
●
HP ePrint Home & Biz
●
HP Printer Control app
●
Apple AirPrint
●
Google Cloud Print
●
Touch to Print (Standard on the M855x+ D7P73A and M880z+ D7P71A models)
●
Direct Wireless printing (With HP Jetdirect 2800w NFC & Wireless Direct Accessory or HP Jetdirect ew2500 Wireless Print Server)
HP ePrint Software runs on the following Windows and Mac OS operating systems: ●
Windows XP SP2 or greater (32-bit) (up to HP ePrint Software 3)
●
Windows Vista (32-bit and 64-bit)
●
Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit)
●
Windows 8 (32-bit and 64-bit)
●
Mac OS X 10.6 Snow Leopard
●
Mac OS X 10.7 Lion
●
Mac OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion
Go to www.hp.com/go/eprintsoftware for more information and to download the HP ePrint Software.
26
Chapter 2 Tour the product
ENWW
HP Confidential
Additional print drivers and supported operating systems HP provides print drivers for HP-UX, UNIX, and Linux operating systems and SAP systems. Search for more information and download print drivers at www.hp.com or www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting.
ENWW
Supported print drivers and operating systems
27
HP Confidential
Set up and configuration tools The product includes set up and configuration tools to make it easy to enable and configure features and settings. The tools include: Initial Setup menu The products ship with the Initial Setup menu item enabled. As the name implies, the Initial Setup menu is used when setting up the product for the first time. The menu can be removed from the control panel after the product is set up. Initial Setup can be used to configure the following settings: ●
Language settings
●
Date and time
●
Date and time format
●
Retrieve from USB
●
Basic E-mail settings (HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880)
●
Basic Fax settings (HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880)
Setup Wizards Setup Wizards guide the user through the steps necessary to enable and configure the basic settings of certain features. Additional settings might need to be configured using the product control panel menus or the product EWS. Available Wizards include:
28
●
Security Wizard
●
E-mail Setup Wizard (HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880)
●
Fax Setup Wizard (HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880)
Chapter 2 Tour the product
ENWW
HP Confidential
Remote management Most product features can be enabled or configured using the control panel. Enterprise customers might need to manage products located in remote offices or need to manage a fleet of products. The remote management options for the HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 and HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 include: ●
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS): Included with the product, the EWS is a Web-based tool used to monitor the product, enable product features, and configure product settings. Additional information is included in other sections of this course.
●
HP Web Jetadmin: A free utility from HP that enables administrators to remotely manage individual products or a fleet of products on a network.
●
HP Digital Sending Software (DSS): DSS is a licensed product from HP that administrators can use to control the digital sending features of MFPs and route incoming and outgoing network traffic through a centralized server. Licenses must be purchased from HP.
●
HP Imaging and Printing Security Center (IPSC): Administrators can use HP IPSC to create and apply security policies to networked HP products. HP IPSC can assess products on the network and make sure that printing, imaging and digital-sending features conform to predefined security policies.
NOTE: More information about each of the remote-management options is at www.hp.com. Search Grow@hp for updated training resources for each of the products.
ENWW
Remote management
29
HP Confidential
Accessories and Supplies The following accessories and supplies are available. The lists do not include customer self-repair (CSR) parts. See the Use and Maintain module of this course for a list of CSR parts and kits.
Accessories Description
Part Number
1x500–sheet feeder (available in Europe, the Middle East, Africa, and Asia-Pacific Countries/Regions)
C2H56A
HP Color LaserJet M855 only. HP LaserJet 3x500 Sheet Feeder Stand
C1N63A
HP LaserJet 1x3500 Sheet Feeder
C1N64A
HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker
AZW80A
HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker with 2/4 hole punch (available in Europe, the Middle East, Africa, and Asia-Pacific Countries/Regions)
AZW82A
HP LaserJet Booklet Maker/Finisher (available in Europe, the Middle East, Africa, and Asia-Pacific Countries/Regions)
A2W83A
HP LaserJet Booklet Maker/Finisher with 2/3 hole punch (available in North America and Latin America)
A2W84A
HP LaserJet Booklet Maker/Finisher with 2/4 hole punch (available in Europe, the Middle East, Africa, and Asia-Pacific Countries/Regions)
CZ999A
HP Jetdirect ew2500 Wireless Print Server (a USB wireless print server that connects to the formatter)
J8026A
HP Jetdirect 2800w NFC & Wireless Direct Accessory (supports Touch to Print, Touch to Authenticate, and Direct Wireless Printing)
J8029A
Toner cartridge information HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 Description
Part Number
HP 826A Black LaserJet Toner Cartridge
CF310A
HP 826A Cyan LaserJet Toner Cartridge
CF311A
HP 826A Yellow LaserJet Toner Cartridge
CF312A
HP 826A Magenta LaserJet Toner Cartridge
CF313A
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 Description
30
Part Number
HP 827A Black LaserJet Toner Cartridge
CF300A
HP 827A Cyan LaserJet Toner Cartridge
CF301A
Chapter 2 Tour the product
ENWW
HP Confidential Description
Part Number
HP 827A Yellow LaserJet Toner Cartridge
CF302A
HP 827A Magenta LaserJet Toner Cartridge
CF303A
Imaging drum information Description
Part Number
HP 828A Black LaserJet Drum (Shared)
CF358A
HP 828A Cyan LaserJet Drum (Shared)
CF359A
HP 828A Yellow LaserJet Drum (Shared)
CF364A
HP 828A Magenta LaserJet Drum (Shared)
CF365A
Staples Description
Part Number
HP Stapler Cartridge Refill - for Stapler/Stacker
C8091A
HP 2-Pack 2000-Staple Cartridge - for Booklet Maker
CC383A
ENWW
Accessories and Supplies
31
HP Confidential
Supplies walkaround The animation shows the location of the major supplies on a HP Color LaserJet M855 and a Booklet maker output accessory. The supplies are located identically on a HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880.
32
1.
Show all
2.
Toner cartridges
3.
Imaging drums
4.
Fuser
5.
ITB
6.
T2 roller
7.
Staple cartridge, Stapler 1 (All output accessories)
8.
Staple cartridges, Stapler 2 (Booklet maker)
Chapter 2 Tour the product
ENWW
HP Confidential
Warranty The HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 and HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 are covered under a standard 1-year, on-site warranty. Standard CSR policies apply during the warranty period: ●
Mandatory CSR parts must be replaced by the customer. The customer can elect to have a certified service agent replace the part at an additional charge.
●
Optional CSR parts can be replaced by the customer or by certified service personnel. There is no additional charge if the customer requests to have the part replaced by a certified service agent.
The full description of the warranty is posted at the product-specific support Web sites, which are available to the public.
ENWW
Warranty
33
HP Confidential
34
Chapter 2 Tour the product
ENWW
HP Confidential
3
ENWW
Set up and configure
●
Student performance objectives
●
Install and set up the product
●
Install product software
35
HP Confidential
Student performance objectives By the completion of this module, students should be able to:
36
●
Understand how the products are packaged for shipping.
●
Know how to unload the print engine and output accessories.
●
Connect an output accessory to a print engine.
●
Set up the product hardware.
●
Print a Configuration Page to test the product.
●
Install the print driver on Windows and Mac OS computers.
●
Understand the methods for enabling and configuring product features.
●
Enable basic product features using the Initial Setup menu.
Chapter 3 Set up and configure
ENWW
HP Confidential
Install and set up the product Install and set up the product overview This section describes how to unpack, set up, and test the product hardware. When all the steps in this section are complete, the product will be operational, but not fully configured. Advanced features and settings can be enabled and configured using the instructions shown in the Use and Maintain module of this course.
Installation and setup guides The course library contains two types of installation guides: Hardware Installation Guide: A Hardware Installation Guide (HIG) is shipped with the product and most accessories. A HIG is designed to give a customer step-by-step instructions on unpacking and installing a hardware component using illustrations and a minimum amount of text. On-site Installation and Setup Guide: The On-site Installation and Setup Guide provides a Customer Engineer (CE) or other individual with the information necessary to install and setup the product for a customer site. The document is not available to the public. The On-site Installation and Setup Guide includes the following information: ●
Product introduction and images of the product models
●
List of customer responsibilities
●
Customer walkaround
●
Connect the product to a network
●
Install the software on a single PC
●
Links to additional product information
Prepare the site The product is approximately 2032 mm (80 in) wide by 1168 mm (46 in) deep when an output accessory is attached, the front input trays on the product are open, and Tray 1 and the access door are open on the right side of the product. HP recommends approximately 1 m (39 in) of additional clearance on both sides of the fully-assembled product and sufficient space behind and in front of the product for access and operation. Although the physical interface between the print engine and the output accessory has been improved compared to the previous product, it is important that the product sits on a level surface. If possible, install the product on a hard floor instead of a carpeted floor. Uneven surfaces might cause misalignment of the print engine and output accessory, resulting in paper jams. The output accessories draw power from the print engine. Only one power receptacle is required, even if an output accessory is attached.
Unpack the boxes The print engine and the output accessories are shipped on individual pallets. Moving the pallets requires a pallet jack or a forklift. The pallet has detachable ramps so that the product can be rolled off the pallet.
ENWW
Install and set up the product
37
HP Confidential
The documentation, In-box CD, and power cable are included in the box. In addition, the HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 ships with a fax cable and the retractable keyboard in the box. The HP Jetdirect 2800w NFC & Wireless Direct Accessory is included in the box on the M855x+ and M880z+ bundles. The NFC accessory is not pre-installed in the product and will need to be installed as part of the set up process. The customer will need to provide the appropriate network cable, depending on whether the product will be connected to a network or connected directly to a computer using a USB cable. Move the print engine to the final installation location before attaching an output accessory. Unload a HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855, HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880, or an output accessory 1.
Place the pallet in a flat level area with enough room to maneuver around all sides of the package with at least 1.52M (5 ft) of clear space in front of the pallet. Arrows on the sides of the package point to the front of the pallet. NOTE:
A pallet jack might be needed to move the product.
2.
Remove the outer plastic sheeting from the product, and then remove the two straps that attach the package to the pallet.
3.
Remove the cover from the top of the package, and then remove the cardboard packing material from the corners.
4.
Remove the box from the top of the product and set it aside. The box contains the unloading ramps, toner cartridge, power cable, fax cable, tray labels, In-box CD, User Guide, and other documentation.
5.
Remove the foam packing material.
6.
Remove the front flap from the lower packaging. A printed line along the package indicates the section to remove.
7.
Remove the thin plastic sheeting from the product.
8.
Attach and align the provided cardboard ramps to the product as shown on the side of the package and the in-box documentation. Flaps on the ramps align with the wheels of the base.
9.
Roll the product onto the ramps, and then carefully roll it down the ramps to the floor. Make certain that the rear wheels of the base align with the ramps. NOTE:
Two people are required for this step.
10. Remove the tape and protective packaging from the product and all trays. The On-site Support Install Guide and the Hardware Installation Guide show the location of all tape and protective packaging pieces. 11. Recycle the packaging if the product is at the installation location. Keep the packaging if the product will be shipped to another location.
Load trays The paper trays are standard paper trays. Make sure that all packing material has been removed before loading paper.
38
Chapter 3 Set up and configure
ENWW
HP Confidential
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 Load Tray 1 1.
Open Tray 1.
2.
Pull out the tray extension to support the paper.
3.
Load paper in the tray. TIP: To achieve the highest print-quality, HP recommends that you load the paper long-edge first.
4.
Make sure that the paper fits under the fill line on the paper guides.
5.
Adjust the side guides so that they lightly touch the paper stack, but do not bend it.
Load Tray 2 1.
Open the tray. NOTE: Do not open this tray while it is in use.
2.
Adjust the paper-length and paper-width guides by squeezing the adjustment latches and sliding the guides to the size of the paper being used.
3.
Load paper into the tray. Check the paper to verify the guides lightly touch the stack, but do not bend it. NOTE: To prevent jams, do not overfill the tray. Be sure that the top of the stack is below the tray full indicator. NOTE: If the tray is not adjusted correctly, an error message might appear during printing or the paper might jam.
4.
Close the tray.
5.
The control panel shows the tray’s paper type and size. If the configuration is not correct, follow the instructions on the control panel to change the type or size.
6.
For custom-size paper, you need to specify the X and Y dimensions for the paper when the prompt displays on the product control panel.
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 Load Tray 1 1.
Open Tray 1.
2.
Pull out the tray extension to support the paper.
3.
Load paper in the tray. TIP: To achieve the highest print-quality, HP recommends that you load the paper long-edge first.
ENWW
4.
Make sure that the paper fits under the fill line on the paper guides.
5.
Adjust the side guides so that they lightly touch the paper stack, but do not bend it.
Install and set up the product
39
HP Confidential
Load Tray 2 1.
Open the tray. NOTE:
Do not open this tray while it is in use.
2.
Adjust the paper-length and paper-width guides by squeezing the adjustment latches and sliding the guides to the size of the paper being used.
3.
Load paper into the tray. Check the paper to verify the guides lightly touch the stack, but do not bend it. NOTE: To prevent jams, do not overfill the tray. Be sure that the top of the stack is below the tray full indicator. NOTE: If the tray is not adjusted correctly, an error message might appear during printing or the paper might jam.
4.
Close the tray.
5.
The control panel shows the tray’s paper type and size. If the configuration is not correct, follow the instructions on the control panel to change the type or size.
6.
For custom-size paper, you need to specify the X and Y dimensions for the paper when the prompt displays on the product control panel.
Apply a keyboard overlay (M880) The HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 ships with an English keyboard. Keyboard overlays are available for the following languages:
40
●
Simplified Chinese
●
Traditional Chinese
●
Danish
●
French
●
French Swiss
●
French Canadian
●
German
●
German Swiss
●
Italian
●
Japanese, Hiragana
●
Japanese, Katakana
●
Portuguese
●
Russian
●
Spanish
●
Spanish, Latin America
Chapter 3 Set up and configure
ENWW
HP Confidential
1.
Turn off the product, and disconnect the power cable.
2.
Slide out the keyboard.
3.
Remove the overlay from the package.
4.
Place the overlay on a flat, clean surface with the paper backing facing up.
5.
Carefully peel off the largest piece of paper backing, making sure that none of the overlay decals are attached to the paper backing. It is best to pull the backing slowly across the overlay, not up. NOTE: Three pieces of paper backing will remain on the overlay. Do not touch the adhesive on the overlay.
6.
Pick up the overlay, turn it over, carefully align the decals with the keys using the keys at the upper corners guides, and then gently place the overlay on the keyboard. Do not press the overlays onto the keys yet.
7.
Carefully inspect the overlay to make sure it aligns with all of the keys. The top edge of the overlay should align with the blank keys at the top of the keyboard, the four keyboard-locking tabs should be visible through the four clear areas at the top of the overlay, and all of the characters should align with the keys. Adjust the overlay if necessary, and then gently touch the overlay to lightly adhere it to the keys.
8.
Support the keyboard tray, firmly push down on the left side of the transfer-sheet, and then work across the rest of the sheet to adhere the adhesive-backed overlays to the keyboard keys. CAUTION: The keyboard must be supported from below to avoid damage while pushing down on the transfer sheet.
9.
Grasp the overlay by the right-hand edge and slowly peel it back at a sharp angle, making sure that the decals are adhered to the keys. NOTE: Stop peeling back the transfer sheet if any of the adhesive-backed overlays fails to adhere to the keys. Support the underside of the keyboard and then firmly slide your hand along the top of the transfer sheet again. TIP: Keep the transfer sheet close to the keyboard as you pull it off to avoid accidently removing any of the adhesive-backed overlays.
10. Make sure that no overlays remain on the transfer sheet, then properly dispose of or recycle the transfer sheet. 11. Inspect the keyboard to make sure that the overlays are firmly in place. Press down on individual keys, if necessary. 12. Slide the keyboard back into place, reconnect the power cable, and then turn the product on. 13. Change the display and keyboard language, if necessary, using the Initial Setup menu, the Display Settings menu in the Administration menu, or the EWS.
Install an output accessory The steps for installing a Stapler/Stacker, Stapler/Stacker with a hole punch, Booklet Maker, and Booklet Maker with a hole punch are similar. The video below shows the steps for installing a Stapler/Stacker with a hole punch.
ENWW
Install and set up the product
41
HP Confidential
1.
Make certain that the product is turned off.
2.
Disconnect the power cord and any network, fax, or USB cables from the product.
3.
On the left side of the output bin, remove the two thumbscrews holding the output bin in place.
4.
Pull the output bin straight out to remove it.
5.
Remove and recycle all packing material from the finishing accessory, including the output bins and the area behind the front door.
6.
Locate the output-accessory bridge that shipped with the output accessory.
7.
Install the output-accessory bridge in the output bin location. Align the accessory with the product, and then push straight in to install it.
8.
Secure the output-accessory bridge with the two thumbscrews removed earlier when uninstalling the output bin.
9.
Roll the finishing accessory next to the left (output) side of the print engine.
10. Gently roll the accessory up to the print engine, making certain that the connectors align. 11. Check the alignment of the finishing accessory with the print engine. The gap between the two should be the same at the top and bottom of the devices. 12. Use the leveling adjusters on the lower-left corners of the finishing accessory to adjust the alignment between the output accessory and the product. Check and adjust the alignment for both the front and back of the product. Turn the leveling adjuster counter-clockwise (toward the front of the product) to raise the left side of the finishing accessory. This will decrease the gap at the top of the product and increase the gap at the bottom. Turn the adjuster in the opposite direction to lower the left side. 13. Connect the interface cable from the finishing accessory to the interface port on the product. 14. Reconnect the power cord and any network, fax, or USB cables to the back of the product. 15. Press the Power button to turn on the product.
Install the HP Jetdirect 2800w NFC & Wireless Direct Accessory The HP Jetdirect 2800w NFC & Wireless Direct Accessory enables “touch” printing from mobile devices to newer HP LaserJet printers and MFPs. The 2800w is included in the box on the M855x+ and M880z+ bundles. The customer or installer needs to install the 2800w in the product HIP.
42
1.
Turn off the product.
2.
Remove the HIP cover. The HIP is covered by a rectangular cover that is retained by clips along its long edges. Using a thin, flat-blade screwdriver along either short edge, gently pry the cover off.
3.
Locate the USB connector along one of the short edges of the HIP, and then identify the type of USB connection used.
4.
Select the appropriate cable from the two that are provided, and then plug the cable into the HIP connector.
Chapter 3 Set up and configure
ENWW
HP Confidential
5.
Attach the plastic power connector of the cable to the corresponding receptacle on the underside of the HP Jetdirect 2800w with the contacts facing down.
6.
Attach the metal ground connector of the cable to the grounding tab on the underside of the HP Jetdirect 2800w.
7.
Insert the HP Jetdirect 2800w into the HIP recess using the hook-shaped clips first.
8.
Gently push the HP Jetdirect 2800w onto the rounded clips so that it is held securely in place within the recess.
9.
Turn on the product.
10. The HP Jetdirect 2800w will light up to confirm the installation is correct. A wireless network icon will also appear on the control panel.
Connect the print-engine cables The power, network or USB, and fax (if applicable) cables can be connected to the print engine either before or after the output accessory is connected. Do not plug the power cable to the power receptacle yet if an output accessory is to be connected. Do not connect the USB cable to a computer until prompted to do so when installing the product software. Cable connections 1.
Power cable
2.
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 printing port (for direct-USB connection)
3.
Fax port (fax models only)
4.
Local Area Network (LAN) port (network-connected products only)
Print a Configuration Page report Print a Configuration Page report to complete the hardware setup. Printing a Configuration report does two important things: ●
Tests the basic functionality of the product. The control panel, paper feed system, print engine, and paper delivery system must all be functioning correctly to successfully print a Configuration Page report.
●
Provides a printed report that contains important information about the product, including firmware version, network address, host name, and installed accessories. This information is useful when configuring software and troubleshooting.
Verify that all of the previous installation steps have been completed, turn on the printer, and then print a Configuration Page report. Although the HP Color LaserJet M855 and HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 have different control panels, the steps for printing a Configuration Page report are the same:
ENWW
1.
From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Touch the Reports menu item.
3.
Touch the Configuration/Status Pages menu item.
Install and set up the product
43
HP Confidential
4.
Touch the Configuration Page item. A checkmark displays in the box next to the item.
5.
Touch the Print button to print the Configuration Page report.
Use Initial Setup to enable features and configure basic settings Initial setup overview The Inital Setup menu option displays on the Home screen when the product is installed. Use Initial Setup to enable or configure common features and settings. HP recommends removing the Initial Setup menu item from the Home screen when set up is complete. NOTE: Basic settings can also be managed in the control-panel menus for the individual features. Configure advanced settings using control panel menus, EWS, HP Web Jetadmin, or HP Digital Sending Software (DSS). Managing settings using the control panel menus and the EWS are covered later in this course. Use Initial Setup to manage: ●
Language settings
●
Date and time format
●
Date and time
●
Basic E-mail settings
●
Basic fax settings (fax bundles only)
●
Retrieve from USB settings
●
Remove Initial Setup from the Home screen
Language Settings 1.
Touch the Language Settings button.
2.
Touch the desired language from the Language column on the left. Touch the up or down arrows or touch, hold, and drag the scroll bar to view the entire list.
3.
The Keyboard Layout setting in the right-hand column changes to the default setting for the selected language. Select a different keyboard layout, if desired.
4.
Touch the Save button to save the changes or touch the Cancel button to leave the menu without saving the changes.
Date/Time Format
44
1.
Touch the Date/Time Format button.
2.
Select the desired date format from the left column.
3.
Select the desired time format from the right column, and then touch the Save button to save the changes or touch the Cancel button to leave the menu without saving the changes.
Chapter 3 Set up and configure
ENWW
HP Confidential
Date/Time 1.
Touch the Date/Time button to open the menu.
2.
Select the proper Time Zone from the column at the left side of the window. Touch the up or down arrows or touch, hold, and drag the scroll bar to view the entire list, if necessary.
3.
The time and date fields display in the format selected in the Date/Time Format option. Enter the proper values in the Date: and Time: areas. Verify that Adjust for Daylight Savings is set correctly, and then touch Save to save the changes.
Basic E-mail settings (HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 only) The E-mail Setup Wizard makes it easy to enter the basic information necessary to enable the E-mail function. The wizard does not configure advanced settings. Advanced features and settings can be managed using the Administration or E-mail menu on the product control panel or the EWS. Before enabling E-mail, make sure to have the following information available: ●
Whether the SMTP server is discoverable.
●
The network address of the SMTP server, if the server is not discoverable.
●
The network port used by the SMTP server (port 25 is the default setting).
●
SMTP authentication requirements, if necessary.
●
An e-mail address for the product.
1.
Touch the E-mail Setup Wizard button.
2.
Select Help me find SMTP to search the network for SMTP servers, and then touch Next. –or– Select I know my SMTP, enter the SMTP server Host Name or Network Address in the Hostname: field, enter the port number in the Port: field, and then touch Next.
3.
Touch Next if the SMTP server does not require authentication to send an email. –or– Select Server requires authentication if the selected SMTP server requires a user name and password. Enter the proper user name and password in the User Name: and Password: fields, and then touch Next.
4.
The product must have an email address. Enter an email address and an optional display address in the Default From E-mail Address: and Display Name: fields.
5.
Leave the Lock Default Address option unchecked to allow senders to temporarily change the From address. –or– Select the option to prevent users from changing the address, and then touch Next.
6.
The email settings display. Send a test email from the product by entering a valid email address in the Send a test e-mail to: field, and then touching the Send button.
7.
Touch Finish if the test email was successfully sent, or review the settings and make any necessary changes if the test was unsuccessful. Touch Cancel to quit the E-Mail Setup Wizard without saving the changes.
Basic fax settings (HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 only) The product has a Fax Setup Wizard in the Initial Setup menu. The Fax Setup Wizard operates very similarly to the E-mail Setup Wizard. The Fax Setup Wizard displays fields for all of the basic information necessary to enable the fax function.
ENWW
Install and set up the product
45
HP Confidential
The Fax Setup Wizard makes it easy to enter the basic information necessary to enable the Fax function. The wizard does not configure advanced settings. Advanced features and settings can be managed using the Administration or Fax menu on the product control panel or the EWS. To start the Fax Setup Wizard: 1.
Touch the Initial Setup button on the Home screen.
2.
Select the Fax Setup Wizard menu option.
Follow the steps displayed on the screen to enter: ●
Country/region
●
Date
●
Time
●
Company name
●
Fax number
●
Dialing prefix
NOTE: These settings and additional advanced settings can also be configured from the Fax tab in the EWS.
Retrieve from USB settings 1.
Touch the Retrieve from USB Settings button.
2.
Select the desired Retrieve from USB setting, and then touch the Save button to save the setting.
Remove Initial Setup from the Home screen HP recommends removing the Initial Setup menu from the Home screen when setup is complete. The following steps show how to remove the menu using the control panel. The Initial Setup menu can also be removed from the control panel by following the procedure shown in the Customize the Home screen topic in the Use and maintain module of this course.
46
1.
Touch the Initial Setup button on the Home screen to open the menu, if necessary.
2.
Touch the Home button in the upper-left corner of the control-panel touchscreen.
3.
A message displays and presents the option to keep or remove the Initial Setup menu from the Home screen.
4.
Leave the option selected and touch OK to keep the menu on the Home screen or uncheck the Show 'Initial Setup' on Home Screen menu option, and then touch OK to remove the button from the Home screen.
Chapter 3 Set up and configure
ENWW
HP Confidential
Install product software The In-box CD includes installers for Windows and Mac OS systems. The software installer installs the discrete (product-specific) HP PCL 6 print driver and optional software on the host system. The Windows version of the installer includes an option to enable HP ePrint for networked products. Macintosh users must enable HP ePrint using the Web Services tab in the EWS. HP ePrint is not available for USB-connected products. NOTE: It is important to leave the USB cable disconnected when installing the software on a Windows computer that will be directly connected to the product. The software installer will prompt the user to connect the USB cable at the proper time.
Windows 8 Directly connect the product to a computer using a USB cable Connect the product to a wired network
Mac OS X Directly connect the product to a computer using a USB cable Connect the product to a wired network
ENWW
Install product software
47
HP Confidential
48
Chapter 3 Set up and configure
ENWW
HP Confidential
4
ENWW
Use and maintain
●
Student performance objectives
●
Control panel walkaround
●
Paper trays
●
Print
●
Quick Sets
●
Copy, scan, and Digital Send
●
Mobile printing - HP ePrint, Apple AirPrint, and Google Cloud Print
●
Near Field Communication (NFC) and Direct Wireless printing
●
Customize the Home screen
●
Security features
●
Customer self-repair parts
●
Supplies
●
Accessories
●
Maintenance and clearing jams
49
HP Confidential
Student performance objectives By the completion of this module, students should be able to:
50
●
Identify and use the features of the control panel.
●
Understand the paper handling features and options.
●
Describe the product features including print tasks, mobile printing, easy-access USB printing, and scanning options.
●
Understand the paper handling features and options.
●
Describe the Customer Self-Repair (CSR) parts policy and replace CSR parts and supplies.
●
Identify maintenance and troubleshooting steps for print jams.
Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
Control panel walkaround Control panel walkaround overview Both products have a touchscreen display built into a control-panel assembly. The touchscreen is referred to as the control panel in the product documentation. The control panel on the HP Color LaserJet M855 displays a single column of menu items while the control panel on the HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 displays two columns of menu items. The control panel tilts so that it can be easily viewed. The touchscreen display is not replaceable. Replace the control-panel assembly if the display needs to be replaced.
HP Color LaserJet M855 control panel 1.
HP logo or Home button: On an screen other than the Home screen, the HP logo changes to the Home button. Touch the Home button to return to the Home screen.
2.
Stop button: Touch the Stop button to pause the current job. The Job Status screen opens, and then you can cancel or continue the job.
3.
Sign In or Sign Out button: Touch the Sign In button to access secured features. Touch the Sign Out button to sign out of the product if you have signed in for access to secured features. After you sign out, the product restores all options to the default settings.
4.
Product status: The status line provides information about the overall product status.
5.
Language Selection button: Touch the Language Selection button to select the language for the control-panel display.
6.
Sleep button: Touch the Sleep button to put the product into Sleep mode.
7.
Network button: Touch the Network button to find information about the network connection.
8.
Help button: Touch the Network button to find information about the network connection.
9.
Scroll bar: Touch the up or down arrows on the scroll bar to see the complete list of available features.
10. Features: Depending on the product configuration, the features that appear in this area can include any of the following items:
ENWW
●
Quick Sets
●
Retrieve from USB
●
Retrieve from Device Memory
●
Job Status
●
Supplies
●
Trays
●
Administration
●
Device Maintenance
Control panel walkaround
51
HP Confidential
11. Home button and light: Touch to return to the product Home screen at any time. 12. Refresh button: Touch the Refresh button to clear changes and restore the default settings.
HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 control panel 1.
Home button: Touch to return to the product Home screen at any time.
2.
Refresh button: Touch the Refresh button to clear changes and restore the default settings.
3.
Sign In or Sign Out button: Touch the Sign In button to access secured features. Touch the Sign Out button to sign out of the product if you have signed in for access to secured features. After you sign out, the product restores all options to the default settings.
4.
HP logo or Home button: On an screen other than the Home screen, the HP logo changes to the Home button. Touch the Home button to return to the Home screen.
5.
Stop button: Touch the Stop button to pause the current job. The Job Status screen opens, and then you can cancel or continue the job.
6.
Start button: Touch the Start button to start a copy job.
7.
Product status: The status line provides information about the overall product status.
8.
Language Selection button: Touch the Language Selection button to select the language for the control-panel display.
9.
Sleep button: Touch the Sleep button to put the product into Sleep mode.
10. Network button: Touch the Network button to find information about the network connection. 11. Help button: Touch the Network button to find information about the network connection. 12. Copies field: The Copies field indicates the number of copies that the product is set to make. 13. Scroll bar: Touch the up or down arrows on the scroll bar to see the complete list of available features. 14. Features: Depending on the product configuration, the features that appear in this area can include any of the following items: ●
Quick Sets
●
Retrieve from USB
●
Retrieve from Device Memory
●
Job Status
●
Supplies
●
Trays
●
Administration
●
Device Maintenance
15. Keyboard: This product includes a physical keyboard. The keys are mapped to your language in the same way the virtual keyboard on the product control panel is mapped. If you select a different
52
Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
keyboard layout for the virtual keyboard, the keys on the physical keyboard are remapped to match the new settings. 16. Easy-access USB port: Insert a USB flash drive for printing and scanning without a computer or to update the product firmware. NOTE: An administrator must enable this port before use.
ENWW
Control panel walkaround
53
HP Confidential
Paper trays Paper trays overview Built-in input trays All models and bundles include: ●
Tray 1: 100–sheet capacity multipurpose tray that folds down on the right side of the product.
●
Tray 2: 500–sheet capacity tray located at the bottom of the print engine, accessible from the front of the product.
Additional or optional input trays The additional input trays vary by product and bundle. HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 ●
M855dn: Only Tray 1 and Tray 2 for input
●
M855xh: Tray 1, Tray 2, and an additional 3x500-sheet feeder stand containing Tray 3, Tray 4, and Tray 5
●
M855x+: Tray 1, Tray 2, and a 3,500 HCI sheet feeder containing two trays, Tray 3 and Tray 4, which accept A4 and Letter-size paper only
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 ●
M880z: Tray 1, Tray 2, and an additional 3x500-sheet feeder stand containing Tray 3, Tray 4, Tray 5, and a cabinet for storage
●
M800z+: Tray 1, Tray 2, and a 3,500 HCI sheet feeder containing two trays, Tray 3 and Tray 4, which accept A4 and Letter-size paper only
NOTE: 3,500 HCI paper inputs only support Letter and A4 size paper.
Load the paper trays The paper trays are similar to paper trays in other HP LaserJet products. The procedures for loading the paper tray are the same as for most other HP LaserJet products. Important things to remember include:
54
●
Paper is loaded face-down in the trays. Load pre-printed paper face-down, unless printing duplex. If printing duplex, load paper face-up.
●
The Stapler/Stacker with hole punch places holes in the trailing edge of the paper. Paper must be loaded in landscape orientation to punch holes on the short sides of a printed sheet.
●
Trays in the 3x500-sheet feeder stand accept A3 and Letter-size paper only. Larger paper must be loaded in Tray 1 or Tray 2.
●
Tray 1 provides the straightest paper path. Load heavy or stiff paper in Tray 1.
●
Trays in the 3,500 HCI sheet feeder accept A4 and Letter-size paper only.
Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
The product user guide and support page have more information about the supported paper sizes and paper orientation. HP Color LaserJet M855 Tray 1 Tray 2 HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 Tray 1 Tray 2
Set the paper size and paper type While in the Ready state, the product automatically senses the position of the paper guides each time a tray is opened and closed. A prompt displays on the control panel asking the user to accept or modify the detected paper size and the assumed paper type. The paper size is determined by the position of the paper guides. The paper type is the last type selected by the user. If no paper type had been selected, the paper type is the default type: plain. NOTE: Opening and closing a paper tray will not wake the product from Sleep mode. The confirmation message is displayed when an action wakes the product. Manually wake the product when changing paper sizes or types in Sleep mode. Touch the Accept button to accept the detected settings or touch the Modify button to see lists of paper sizes and paper types to choose from. Select the appropriate settings, and then touch OK to proceed. The paper size and paper type can also be managed using the Trays menu on the control panel Home screen. Complete instructions are in the User Guide and the product Support Page at www.hp.com.
ENWW
Paper trays
55
HP Confidential
Print Print overview The products use typical print drivers for both Windows and Mac OS. Windows users can use either the discrete (product specific) print driver or the HP Universal Print Driver (UPD). The overall operation and functionality of the discrete driver and the UPD are very similar. Standard print tasks are selected from within the print driver similar to other HP LaserJet products. The options for the finishing accessories are selected within the Finishing tab and the Output tab of the Printing Preferences window. The finishing accessories are automatically configured in the print driver when installing the software. The settings can also be manually configured if necessary. If the expected options are not available, the incorrect version of the UPD might be installed, or the print driver settings might need to be manually configured. NOTE: The product requires version 5.7 of the PCL 6 UPD or later. Earlier versions of the UPD will not recognize the finishing accessories. The latest version of the UPD can be downloaded at www.hp.com/go/ upd.
Stapler/Stacker overview The Stapler/Stacker is available with or without a hole puncher. Countries/regions that use metric measurements receive a hole punch capable of punching either two or four holes in the paper. Countries/ regions that use imperial measurements receive a hole punch that can punch either two or three holes in the paper. All staple and hole-punch options are selected within the print driver. Staples can be placed along the edges or at an angle in the upper corners of a print job, depending on paper size and page orientation. Print jobs can be both stapled and punched. All versions of the Stapler/stacker operate in either Stacker Mode or Mailbox Mode. Stacker Mode delivers all print jobs to the upper output bin. Mailbox Mode allows the user to choose between delivering print jobs to the upper bin or the lower bin. NOTE: Early versions of the print driver refer to the lower output bin as the middle output bin. The following stapling options are available, depending on paper size and page orientation:
56
●
One staple left – places a single staple at a 45-degree angle in the upper-left corner of the page.
●
One staple right – places a single staple at a 45-degree angle in the upper-right corner of the page.
●
Two staples left – places two staples along the left edge of the printed sheet, parallel to the edge of the sheet.
●
Two staples right – places two staples along the right edge of the printed sheet, parallel to the edge of the sheet.
●
Two staples top – places two staples along the top edge of the printed sheet, parallel to the edge of the sheet.
●
Two Staples Left or Top – places two staples on the trailing edge of the print job, regardless of whether the paper is loaded short-edge-first or long-edge-first.
Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
All holes are punched along the edge of the sheet of paper. The following hole-punch options are available, depending on paper size and page orientation: ●
2-Hole Punch Left
●
2-Hole Punch Right
●
2-Hole Punch Top
●
2-Hole Punch Bottom
●
2-Hole Punch Left or Top
●
3-Hole Punch Left (or Four-Hole Punch Left)
●
3-Hole Punch Right (or Four-Hole Punch Right)
●
3-Hole Punch Top (or Four-Hole Punch Top)
●
3-Hole Punch Left or Top (or Four-Hole Punch Left or Top)
NOTE: All Left or Top options punch holes on the trailing edge of the paper, regardless of paper orientation. The Stapler/Stacker places staples or punches holes on the trailing edge of the paper as the paper exits the product. The HCI supports A4 and Letter-size paper, oriented to feed the long edge of the sheet into the product. This orientation allows staples and holes to be placed on either the left or right edge of a standard, portrait-oriented document. To place staples on the top of the document or punch holes in either the top or bottom edge of the document, the paper must be fed short-edge-first into the product. The product will automatically choose the proper input tray if paper is loaded in both long-end-first and short-end-first orientation in different trays. The print engine automatically adjusts the orientation of the page-image to always deliver output with the top of the page facing the back of the output bin when stapling or hole punching. To place staples or holes on the top of a portrait-oriented document the paper must be loaded short-edge first. The print job is delivered with the top of the page facing toward the back of the output bin. If holes are punched at the bottom of the document, the print job is delivered with the top of the page facing the back of the output bin. NOTE: Staples cannot be placed at the bottom edge or bottom corners of the page. The print driver does not allow selecting conflicting staple and punch combinations, in most cases. As an example, a print job cannot be stapled on the left edge or corner when holes are punched along the right edge. When a stapling option is selected from the drop-down menu, only valid hole-punch are available in the hole-punch list. The reverse is true if a hole-punch option is selected first. The product will print a job without stapling or punching if an invalid combination of options is selected. For example, A3/11x17 paper can only be stapled or punched on the short sides. Some versions of the print driver will allow users to select a staple or punch location on the long edge of the sheet. When these options are selected the print job will print without stapling or punching. The product can staple up to 50 sheets of paper. Print jobs greater than 50 sheets will print, but not be stapled. There is no limit to the number of pages that can be punched.
ENWW
Print
57
HP Confidential
Select staple and hole-punch locations Staple and hole-punch locations are set within the print driver. Click the Play button below to see an example of how to select the options. NOTE: See the Copy and scan features topic in this module for information about stapling and holepunching copies. 1.
Click the File menu, and then select the Print option from the menu.
2.
Verify that the proper printer is selected, and then click the Preferences or Properties button. The button has different names in different applications.
3.
Click the Output tab.
4.
Select an output bin, if desired. (Mailbox Mode only.)
5.
Select a Staple or Punch option. (Staple option shown here.) Notice that the locations of the staples are highlighted in the illustration in Printing Preferences window.
6.
Click the OK button.
7.
Select any desired options and settings from the Print dialog box.
8.
Click the OK button to print the job.
Booklet Maker overview The Booklet Maker creates a booklet of up to 60 pages by folding up 15 sheets of paper in half, and then stapling the pages together along the fold. Stapling along the fold is also referred to as saddle stitching. The print driver and product firmware automatically arrange the pages in the proper order before printing the pages. The Booklet Maker folds the paper perpendicular to the paper-feed direction. Only paper loaded short-edge first can be folded into a booklet. See the product support Web page for a complete list of supported paper sizes and types.
Use the Booklet Maker Select the Booklet Maker options in the print driver. The following conditions must be met to successfully print a saddle-stitched booklet. Many of the settings can be selected using the Booklet Printing shortcut in the discrete print driver. Customers can edit the shortcut in the discrete print driver or create a new printing shortcut in the UPD.
58
●
Print on both sides must be enabled.
●
A Booklet layout option must be selected.
●
Pages per sheet must be set to 2 Pages per sheet.
●
The Fold and Stitch (Max 15 sheets) staple option must be selected.
●
The appropriate paper size must be loaded in short-edge first orientation.
●
The print job must not exceed 60 pages, or 15 total sheets of paper.
Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
The Booklet Maker supports the following paper sizes in short-edge first orientation: ●
A4
●
A3
●
B4 (JIS)
●
Oficio (8.5 x 13)
●
Letter
●
Legal
●
11x17
NOTE: See the Copy and scan features topic in this module for information about making booklets while copying documents. 1.
Click File, and then click Print.
2.
Click Printer Properties, and then select the Printing Shortcuts tab.
3.
Select Booklet Printing from the Printing Shortcuts pane, and then review the print options to select the desired options. NOTE: The Paper Sizes field refers to the size of the original document. By default the product will scale the page to 50% of the original size to fit two pages on one sheet of paper.
4.
Click the Effects tab to change the paper size to print the booklet on, if desired. The product will automatically scale the printed page fit the paper size. Choose a paper size that is twice as large as the document to maintain the original size. Choose A3 paper to produce an A4-size booklet. Choose 11 x 17 paper to produce a Letter-size booklet.
5.
Click the Finishing tab, and then review the Document Options. Make sure that Print on both sides is selected and that the desired Booklet Layout and Pages per sheet values are defined. Pages per sheet should be set to 2 for a standard booklet.
6.
Click the Output tab, click on the Staple drop-down menu, and then select Fold And Stitch (Max 15 sheets).
7.
Review the Output Bin Options area to make sure that Bin is set to either Automatically Select or Lower Left Bin.
8.
Click OK to confirm the settings, and then click Print to print the booklet.
1.
Click File, and then click Print.
2.
Click Printer Properties.
3.
Click the Finishing tab, and then review the Document Options. Make sure that Print on both sides is selected and that the desired Booklet Layout and Pages per sheet values are defined. Pages per sheet should be set to 2 for a standard booklet.
ENWW
4.
Select the Output tab.
5.
Click on the Staple drop-down menu, and then select Fold And Stitch (Max 15 sheets).
Print
59
HP Confidential
6.
Review the Output Bin Options area to make sure that Bin is set to either Automatically Select or Lower Left Bin.
7.
Click the Effects tab to change the paper size to print the booklet on, if desired. The product will automatically scale the printed page fit the paper size. Choose a paper size that is twice as large as the document to maintain the original size. Choose A3 paper to produce an A4-size booklet. Choose 11 x 17 paper to produce a Letter-size booklet.
8.
Select the Printing Shortcuts tab.
9.
Click the Save As... button and save the shortcut with a new name, and then click OK.
10. Click OK to confirm the settings, and then click Print to print the booklet.
Easy-access USB printing Easy-access USB printing overview Easy-access USB printing allows users to print files directly from a USB flash drive. The following types of files can be printed using easy-access USB printing: ●
.pdf — Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF)
●
.prn — Text file that is created when using the print to file option from a printer driver.
●
.pcl — Text file in the HP Printer Control Language (PCL) format created when using the print to file option from a printer driver.
●
.ps — Text file in postscript format created when using the print to file option from a printer driver.
●
.cht — a chart file saved from an application.
NOTE: The product is shipped with easy-access USB printing disabled. The feature must be enabled using either the control panel or the EWS.
Enable easy-access USB printing from the control panel The following instructions show how to enable easy-access USB printing from the control panel. Click the Play button below to view the steps. NOTE: The steps to enable easy-access USB printing from the control panel are the same for the HP Color LaserJet M855 and the HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880, but the control panels are different. HP Color LaserJet M855 1.
From the Home screen on the control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Touch the General Settings button on the control panel.
3.
Touch the Down arrow on the control panel until the Enable Retrieve from USB button is visible, and then touch the button.
4.
Touch the Enabled radio button, and then touch the Save button.
5.
Touch the Home button.
HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880
60
Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
1.
From the Home screen on the control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Touch the General Settings button on the control panel.
3.
Touch the Down arrow on the control panel until the Enable Retrieve from USB button is visible, and then touch the button.
4.
Touch the Enabled radio button, and then touch the Save button.
5.
Touch the Home button.
Enable easy-access USB printing using the EWS The following instructions show how to enable easy-access USB printing from the product EWS. Click the Play button below to view the steps. NOTE: The steps to enable easy-access USB printing from the EWS are the same for the HP Color LaserJet M855 and the HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880, but the EWS on the M880 inlcudes additional tabs and options. HP Color LaserJet M855 1.
Open a Web-browser window and type in the product IP address or hostname in the address field. The EWS window displays.
2.
Click the Scan/Digital Send tab.
3.
Click the Save to USB Setup option in the left-hand column.
4.
Select the Enable Save to USB option.
5.
Scroll to the bottom of the Web-browser window, and then click the Apply button.
HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 1.
Open a Web-browser window and type in the product IP address or hostname in the address field. The EWS window displays.
2.
Click the Scan/Digital Send tab.
3.
Click the Save to USB Setup option in the left-hand column.
4.
Select the Enable Save to USB option.
5.
Scroll to the bottom of the Web-browser window, and then click the Apply button.
Use easy-access USB printing The following instructions show how to print using easy-access USB printing from the control panel. 1.
Insert the USB flash drive into the easy-access USB port located on the product control-panel assembly. NOTE: Remove the cover from the USB port if necessary.
ENWW
2.
The USB storage device detected screen opens. Press the OK button to access the USB device.
3.
Highlight the name of the document that you want to print.
Print
61
HP Confidential
4.
To adjust the number of copies, use the arrow keys or the numeric keypad to change the quantity.
5.
Press the OK button to print the document.
NOTE: The USB flash drive can be removed when the printing process is complete. The drive does not need to be dismounted through software as it does on a computer.
62
Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
Quick Sets Quick Sets overview A Quick Set is a series of job parameters or steps saved as a menu on the control panel. The menu can be saved to the product Home screen or within the Quick Sets menu. A Quick Set can be a series of settings for a type of job, or a complete workflow. For instance, a Quick Set can be created to set to scan both sides of all documents at 300 DPI, delete all blank pages, preview the scanned images, and then save the files to a specific folder on the network using pre-stored network credentials. By creating a Quick Set all of these settings can be set with the touch of a single button instead of having to configure each setting manually and individually. Quick Sets are created and configured using the EWS or HP Web Jetadmin, and work with the following features: ●
E-mail
●
Save to Network Folder
●
Save to USB
●
Fax
●
Save to SharePoint® (HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 only)
NOTE: Quick Sets are function-specific. A Quick Set created for Save to USB cannot be used for E-mail. See the Embedded Quick Sets Notable in the course library for more information about Quick Sets.
Create a Quick Set Quick Sets are created and configured using the EWS or HP Web Jetadmin. The examples in this course describe creating Quick Sets using the EWS. Click the Play button to see how to create a Quick Set. NOTE: Quick Sets can be created in the E-mail Setup, Save to Network Folder Setup, Save to SharePoint®, and Save to USB Setup menu options. The example shown is for creating a Save to USB Quick Set. The steps are similar for all Quick Sets types.
ENWW
1.
Open a Web browser, and then enter the product IP address in the address bar.
2.
When the HP Embedded Web Server opens, click the Scan/Digital Send tab. NOTE: Click the Fax tab to create a Fax Quick Set, or click the General tab to view and manage all Quick Sets.
3.
Select the Save to USB Setup option.
4.
In the Quick Sets area, click the Add button to launch the Quick Set Wizard.
5.
Enter a name for the Quick Set in the Quick Set Title field.
6.
Decide whether the Quick Set button should appear on the product Home screen or in the Quick Sets menu, and then make the appropriate choice from the Button Location drop-down menu.
7.
If desired, enter a description for the Quick Set in the Quick Set Description field. This description shows up on the Quick Set button on the control-panel display.
Quick Sets
63
HP Confidential
8.
Decide whether the Quick Set should start manually or as soon as the Quick Set is selected, select the appropriate option, and then click the Next button. NOTE: In most cases it is best to start the Quick Set manually. This lets the customer check and set options before starting the job.
9.
Set the destination to save the files. Files can be saved at the root level of the USB flash drive or in a predefined path. Use the form foldername/subfolder to define a path.
10. The Quick Set can be configured to send email messages or print a summary page if a job either completes successfully or fails. Select the desired choice from the Condition on Which to Notify dropdown menu, enter the notification method and email address to send notifications to, if necessary, and then click Next. NOTE:
Email must be configured on the product to use the email notification feature.
11. Select the desired default Scan Settings, and then click Next. 12. Select the desired settings from the File Settings window. Predefined file name prefixes and suffixes can be selected from the drop-down menus, and a default file name can be entered. Click the Update Preview button to preview the selected settings. Choose the default file format from the Default File Type drop-down menu. 13. Click the Next button to see a preview of the Quick Set button as it will appear on the control-panel display, and then click Finish to complete the setup.
Use a Quick Set Quick Sets can be saved to the Home screen or within the Quick Set menu. Quick Sets in the Quick Set Menu are color-coded. The color of the title banner matches the color of the function, and the button matches the icon of the function. The example below shows selecting a Save to USB Quick Set from the Quick Set menu. Note the color of the banner and the icon on the Quick Set.
64
1.
Place the originals to be scanned face-up in the ADF.
2.
Locate and touch the desired Quick Set button on the Home screen or in the Quick Set menu.
3.
Insert a USB flash drive into the easy-access USB port when prompted.
4.
Touch the Start button to save the job using the default settings.
5.
Touch the More Options arrow to view and configure job options. Options with a black triangle indicate settings that are changed from the product default settings. Select and change any desired settings, and then touch the Start button.
6.
If Image Preview is a requirement of the Quick Set, the thumbnails of the scans will display. Review the previews, make any desired changes, and then touch the Start button to continue.
Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
Copy, scan, and Digital Send Copy, scan, and Digital Send overview The HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 is part of the HP LaserJet flow series of MFPs. The flow series of MFPs include the following features in addition to the standard features found on typical HP LaserJet MFP products: ●
Save to SharePoint®: Scan and save documents directly to a Microsoft SharePoint site.
●
Optical Character Recognition: Scan and convert printed documents into digital text that can be edited on a computer.
●
HP EveryPage Multi-feed detection: Senses when multiple sheets are picked up and fed into the ADF. Also senses when a sheet has an attached piece of paper such as a sticky note.
●
Single-pass two-sided scanning: A second scan head built into the ADF lid scans the back side of the page at the same time the front side is scanned by the flatbed scanner.
●
Increased ADF capacity: The document feeder accepts up to 100 sheets of paper.
The HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 also includes the following copy, scan, and digital send features typical of other HP LaserJet MFPs: ●
Copy: Make single-sided or double-sided black and white copies of documents.
●
Save to USB: Scan and save black and white or color documents to a USB flash drive.
●
Save to Network Folder: Scan and save black and white or color documents to a shared network folder or ftp site.
●
Save to Device Memory: Scan black and white documents to the product memory for printing later. Jobs can be deleted after printing or stored for re-use.
●
E-Mail: Scan and send documents as attachments to an email message.
●
Fax: Transmit and receive fax documents using analog or digital phone lines, LAN fax, or Internet fax.
Print administrators can manage the product using HP Web Jetadmin and HP Digital Sending Software, if desired. See the courses for those two products for more information.
Scan Options Scan options overview Scanned images and documents can be saved in a variety of file formats. Image-processing, pageprocessing, and job-management options make scanning more convenient and improve scan quality. Some scan functions do not support all file formats and scan options. As an example, the Copy and Fax functions do not support different file formats, but do support most scanning options. View and set the scanning options by touching the More Options arrow in the E-mail, Fax, Copy, Save to USB, Save to Network Folder, Save to Device Memory, or Save to SharePoint® menus. If the desired option is not displayed on the control panel, touch the More Options arrow again to view the next page of options. The file format and scanning options can be set on a job-by-job basis by selecting the More Options arrow on the control panel while setting up a job. Administrators can set the default file format and options for each function using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) or HP Web Jetadmin.
ENWW
Copy, scan, and Digital Send
65
HP Confidential
Original Sides You can specify whether the original document is printed on one side or both sides. When you scan from the document feeder, the product can automatically scan both sides without further interaction. When you scan from the flatbed glass and you indicate the original is printed on both sides, the product prompts you to turn the page over after it scans the first side. To change the Original Sides settings: 1.
Touch the Original Sides button.
2.
Select either the 1-sided or 2-sided option. You can also touch the Orientation button to specify the orientation of the original document.
3.
Touch the OK button to save the changes.
Original Size You can specify the page size of the original document. The product creates the scanned image to match the same page size. To change the Original Size settings: 1.
Touch the Original Size button.
2.
Select one of the predefined page sizes, or select the Automatically detect option to instruct the product to use internal sensors to try to determine the page size, and then touch OK.
Job Build Use the Job Build feature to combine several sets of original documents into one scan job. Also use this feature to scan an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can accommodate at one time. To change the Job Build settings: 1.
Touch the Job Build button.
2.
Touch the Start button. After each page is scanned, or when the document feeder is empty, the control panel prompts you for more pages.
3.
If the job contains more pages, load the next page, and then touch the Scan button. The product temporarily saves all the scanned images. Touch the Finish button to complete the job.
Optimize Text/Picture The default setting for the scanner provides the best overall quality for scan jobs that contain both text and images. The settings can be changed to optimize the quality for text, printed images, or photographs. To change the Optimize Text/Picture settings:
66
1.
Touch the Optimize Text/Picture button.
2.
Select the predefined Text, Printed picture, or Photograph option or touch the Manually adjust button, and then adjust the slider in the Optimize For area, and then touch the OK button.
Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
Image Adjustment The overall darkness, contrast, sharpness, and amount of background cleanup can be adjusted using the Image Adjustment option. To change the Image Adjustment settings: 1.
Touch the Image Adjustment button.
2.
Touch the left or right arrows or touch, hold, and drag the slider of the Darkness, Contrast, Background Cleanup, or Sharpness option to increase or decrease the amount of each option, and then touch OK. Touch the Default button to return all options to their default setting.
Orientation The Orientation option allows a customer to manually set the orientation of the scan job. The setting applies to all pages in the scan job. To change the Orientation settings: 1.
Touch the Orientation button.
2.
Select the Portrait or Landscape option, and then touch the OK button.
NOTE: The Orientation setting assumes that the originals are loaded in the ADF so that they are fed in to the ADF with the short edge first. If the originals are loaded with the long edge first, the settings will be reversed.
Automatic Content Orientation Certain products can automatically rotate pages so that they are all right-side-up. For original documents that have at least 100 characters of text on the page, the product can detect which edge is the top of the page, and then orient the scanned images appropriately. If some of the pages in a scan job are upside down in relation to the other pages, the resulting scanned image has all pages right-side-up. If some of the pages have a landscape orientation, the product rotates the image so that the top of the page is at the top of the image. To enable automatic content orientation from the More Options menu: 1.
Touch the Content Orientation button.
2.
Select the Automatically detect option, and then touch OK to save the change.
Resolution You can specify the resolution of scanned images. Select a higher resolution to increase the clarity of the image. However, as you increase the resolution, the file size also increases. To change the Resolution settings: 1.
Touch the Resolution button.
2.
Select one of the Resolution options, and then touch OK.
Image Preview The product includes an image-preview feature so you can preview and make adjustments to scanned images before completing the job. Image preview is available for the following scan/send features:
ENWW
Copy, scan, and Digital Send
67
HP Confidential
●
E-mail
●
Save to Network Folder
●
Save to USB
●
Fax
●
Save to SharePoint®
Image Preview includes the following features: ●
Page-navigation control: Touch the arrow buttons to scroll forward or backward through the document, one page at a time. To display a specific page, touch the text box and enter the page number. NOTE: You can also use a finger-swiping motion to scroll through the pages. Swipe over the page images on this screen.
●
Zoom: Touch the Zoom button to enlarge the image displayed in the document-preview area. To move the image in the document-preview area, touch an area on the image, and then drag your finger on the screen. To return the image to the original size, touch the zoom button again.
●
View: Touch the View button to toggle between the default single-page view and a multi-page view. Additional features are available in the multi-page view.
●
The following options for manipulating the document pages are available in the multi-page view. Touch one of the page thumbnails in the document-preview area to enable the options. ◦
Append Pages: Touch this button to add more pages to the document. Touch the append pages button, and then place additional pages in the document feeder or on the scanner glass. Touch the Scan button to continue.
◦
Move pages: Touch the thumbnail of the page or pages that you want to move. To select a range of pages, touch the first and last pages in the range. Touch the move pages button. Page-insert buttons appear on the screen that indicate where you can move the pages. Touch one of the pageinsert buttons to move the pages.
◦
Rotate pages: Touch the page or pages that you want to rotate. To select a range of pages, touch the first and last pages in the range. Touch the Rotate pages button. The pages rotate clockwise 90 degrees each time you touch the button.
◦
Delete pages: Touch the page or pages that you want to delete. To select a range of pages, touch the first and last pages in the range. Touch the Delete pages button, and then touch the Delete button in the next screen to delete the pages.
Notification The product can be configured to provide notifications of the success or failure of scan jobs. The product can print the notification, or it can send the notification in an email. NOTE: Email must be configured on the product to use the email notification feature. To change the Notification settings:
68
1.
Touch the Notification button.
2.
Select the desired choice from the Condition on Which to Notify drop-down menu, enter the notification method and email address to send notifications to, if necessary, and then touch the OK button.
Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
Blank Page Suppression You can instruct the product to exclude blank pages in the original document from the scanned image. By default, the product includes all pages in scanned images. To change the Blank Page Suppression settings: 1.
Touch the Blank Page Suppression button.
2.
Select the Disabled or Enabled option, and then touch the OK button.
Output Quality You can specify the output quality of scanned images, which affects the file size of the resulting file. To change the Output Quality settings: 1.
Touch the Output Quality button.
2.
Select the predefined High (large file), Medium, or Low (Small file) option, and then touch OK.
Color/Black The scanner can create color, black, or grayscale images. The Color/Black option can be set to automatically detect what type of originals are being scanned, or can be set to scan in color or grayscale, regardless of the original type. NOTE: Color scanning is not supported in the Fax, Copy, or Save to Device Memory functions. To change the Color/Black settings: 1.
Touch the Color/Black button.
2.
Select the desired option, and then touch OK to save the setting.
File types The product can save scanned documents and images in a variety of file types. Certain products use optical character recognition (OCR) to convert scanned text into text which can be edited or searched on a computer. The OCR options are available in the Save to USB, Save to Network Folder, EMail, and Save to SharePoint® features. As pages are scanned, the scans are analyzed by the OCR engine and converted into text, and then saved into the selected file type. Touch the More Options arrow, and then touch the Document File Type button to display the available file types. Touch a file type to select it. If a file type has configurable options, the File Options button is enabled. Standard file types:
ENWW
●
PDF: This file type provides the best overall image and text quality. However, PDF files require a special software program for viewing.
●
JPEG: This file type is a good choice for most graphics. Most computers have a browser that can view .JPEG files. This file type produces one file per page.
●
TIFF: This is a standard file type that many graphics programs support. This file type produces one file per page. The type of file compression used can be configured for a TIFF.
Copy, scan, and Digital Send
69
HP Confidential
●
MTIFF: MTIFF stands for multi-page TIFF. This file type saves multiple scanned pages in a single file.
●
XPS: XPS (XML Paper Specification) creates an XAML (Extensible Application Markup Language) file that preserves the original formatting of the document and supports color graphics and embedded fonts.
●
PDF/A: PDF/A files are intended for long-term archiving, and cannot rely on any plug-ins to the PDF viewer or any external references that might not be available when the PDF is viewed from an archive. PDF/A files cannot include embedded video, audio, or external resources such as hyperlinks. PDF/A files cannot be encrypted.
OCR Optical character recognition (OCR) formats Certain products use optical character recognition (OCR) to convert scanned text into text which can be edited or searched on a computer. The OCR options are available in the Save to USB, Save to Network Folder, E-Mail, and Save to SharePoint® features. As pages are scanned, the scans are analyzed by the OCR engine, converted into text, and then saved as the selected file type. OCR file types: ●
Text (OCR): When this format is selected, all graphics are ignored. The text characters are analyzed, converted to text, and then saved in an unformatted, ASCII-encoded text file with the extension .txt.
●
Unicode Text (OCR): Saving the scan to a Unicode text file creates a text-only file with the extension .txt. The graphics are ignored. The characters are converted to text and saved as a Unicodeencoded .txt file for increased cross-platform compatibility. NOTE: The icons for Text and Unicode text files are identical. Open the file in an enhanced text editor such as Notepad ++ to view the encoding method.
●
RTF (OCR): Selecting RTF (OCR) results in a Rich Text Format file that contains both text and graphics. The color, type style, and typeface are preserved as much as possible. In the example below, the HP logo and the USB button are graphic elements, but all other elements are editable and searchable text. The bold and italic typefaces, as well as the color of the fonts have been retained.
●
Searchable PDF (OCR): Selecting Searchable PDF (OCR) creates a PDF image of the document with a hidden text layer. This preserves the exact look of the original file, but still allows for searching for text within the PDF. In the example, searching for the word scanned finds the word in the description panel of the Save to USB button. The Searchable PDF format preserves embedded video, audio, and hyperlinks in the PDF.
●
Searchable PDF/A (OCR): Like the Searchable PDF (OCR) format, the Searchable PDF/A (OCR) option creates an image of the original document with a hidden text layer that can searched. PDF/A files are intended for long-term archiving, and cannot rely on any plug-ins to the PDF viewer or any external references that might not be available when the PDF is viewed from an archive. PDF/A files cannot include embedded video, audio, or any external resources, such as hyperlinks. PDF/A files cannot be encrypted. NOTE: The icons for PDF and PDF/A files are identical. When viewing PDF/A in Adobe© Acrobat Reader© a banner at the top of the window appears with the message: You are viewing this document in PDF/A mode.
70
Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
●
HTML (OCR): Selecting the HTML (OCR) option creates a self-contained Web page of the scan. The result is a .zip file that contains a folder with the images and HTML code necessary to display the page. Extract the .zip file, and then double-click the filename.htm file to view the document in a Web browser.
●
CSV (OCR): Comma separated value (CSV) files are text files where each entry or line is separated by a comma character. CSV files can be used to import data into databases or spreadsheet programs such as Microsoft Excel.
Cropping Options The product can crop the scanned image so that it is the same size as the paper for the original document, or it can crop the image to the size of the detectable content in the original document. NOTE: This feature is not available in the Save to Device Memory, Fax, or Copy functions. To crop the image to match the paper size, scan from the document feeder or leave the scanner lid open when scanning from the flatbed glass. To change the Cropping Options settings: 1.
Touch the Cropping Options button.
2.
Select the Do not crop, Crop to paper, or Crop to content option, and then touch the OK button.
Erase Edges Use the Erase Edges feature to remove blemishes, such as dark borders, punched holes, or staple marks, by cleaning the edges of the scanned image. To change the Erase Edges settings: 1.
Touch the Erase Edges button.
2.
If necessary, change the unit of measure by selecting the Use inches box or the Use millimeters box.
3.
Touch the field for an edge of the image that you want to clean, and then enter the distance from the edge of the page to clean. Repeat this step for each edge that you want to clean, and then touch OK.
NOTE: The Erase Edges feature is not available in the Copy function.
PDF Encryption Enable PDF Encryption to securely-encrypt and assign a password to the PDF. The password must be entered to open the PDF.
Pages per Sheet The Pages per Sheet feature copies two to four pages onto one sheet of paper. NOTE: This feature is only available in the Save to Device Memory and Copy menus. To use the Pages per Sheet setting:
ENWW
1.
Touch the Pages per Sheet button.
2.
Select the Booklet on option.
Copy, scan, and Digital Send
71
HP Confidential
3.
Select One (1) Two (2), or Four (4) in the Pages per Sheet area, and then select the Page Order, using the thumbnail display as a reference.
4.
Select Borders on each page, if desired, and then and then touch the OK button.
Edge-to-Edge Use this feature to avoid shadows that can appear along the edges of copies when the original document is printed close to the edges. NOTE: This feature is only available in the Save to Device Memory, and Copy menus. To change the Edge-to-Edge setting: 1.
Touch the Edge-to-Edge button.
2.
Select the Normal (recommended) or Edge-to-Edge output option, and then touch the OK button to save the change.
2-sided ID scan Use the 2-sided ID Scan feature to scan both sides of an ID card or other two-sided document up to 140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 in) and place the images on a single page or file. The feature is available in Copy and Save to Device Memory features. To use 2-sided ID Scan: 1.
Touch either the Copy or Save to Device Memory button on the Home screen.
2.
Touch either the down arrow in the Copy menu or the More Options button in the Save to Device Memory menu until the 2-sided ID Scan feature displays on the screen.
3.
Touch 2-sided ID Scan and select ID Scan on.
4.
Place the ID card face-down on the left, rear corner of the scanner glass, with the top of the card along the left edge. The image on the control panel shows the correct orientation.
5.
Touch the OK button to enable the feature and return to the main Copy menu.
6.
Set other job settings, if desired. NOTE: Some menu options conflict with the 2-sided ID Scan feature. These features are unavailable after enabling 2-sided ID Scan.
7.
Touch the Start button to scan the first side of the card.
8.
Flip the card over and place it in the same location of the scanner glass when prompted.
9.
Touch the Scan button on this screen to scan the second side of the card.
10. The product prints both scanned images on the same side of one sheet of paper or saves the file to device memory, depending on the selected feature.
Book Mode Use the Book Mode feature to scan facing pages from a bound original document, such as a book, and save the pages as individual scanned images. The feature organizes the scanned images and arranges the pages in the correct order, as in the original document.
72
Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
The feature is available in Copy and Save to Device Memory features. To use Book Mode: 1.
Place the book on the scanner glass with the top edge of the book along the rear of the scanner glass. Align the spine with the book symbol along the rear edge of the scanner glass.
2.
Touch either the Copy or Save to Device Memory button on the Home screen.
3.
Touch either the down arrow in the Copy menu or the More Options button in the Save to Device Memory menu until the Book Mode feature displays on the screen.
4.
Touch Book Mode, select Book Mode on, and then touch the OK button to enable the feature and return to the feature menu.
5.
Set other job settings, if desired. NOTE: Some menu options conflict with the Book Mode feature. These features are unavailable after enabling Book Mode.
6.
Touch the Start button to scan the first side of the card.
7.
The Book Mode feature prompts for the pages to scan. Select one of these options, and then touch Start: ●
Scan both sides: Scans the left and right pages.
●
Skip left page: Scans only the left-hand page of the book. NOTE:
●
Skip right page: Scans only the left-hand page of the book. NOTE:
8.
When placed face-down on the glass, the right-hand page is on the left.
When placed face-down on the glass, the left-hand page is on the right.
The product begins scanning the pages. When it finishes the first scan, it prompts for the next page to scan. Continue scanning as described in the previous step. When all pages are scanned, touch the Finish button. The product prints the pages or saves them to device memory, depending on the selected feature.
Output Bin The Output Bin option is available in the Copy and Save to Device Memory features. The option allows users to select which output bin to send the copy job or print job to, and whether to deliver the pages face-up or face-down. This option is only available if an output accessory is installed. To use the Output Bin option:
ENWW
1.
Touch either the Copy or Save to Device Memory button on the Home screen.
2.
Touch either the down arrow in the Copy menu or the More Options button in the Save to Device Memory menu until the Output Bin option displays on the screen.
3.
Touch Output Bin, and then select one of the following options from the Output Bin area:
Copy, scan, and Digital Send
73
HP Confidential
4.
5.
●
Automatic: Delivers the output job to the default output bin.
●
Upper left bin: Delivers the output job to the top output bin.
●
Lower left bin (Stapler/stacker models) or Middle left bin (Booklet maker: Delivers the output job to the bottom output bin on Stapler/stacker models or the middle bin on the Booklet maker.
●
Lower booklet bin: Available on the Booklet maker only. Delivers the output job to the Booklet output bin.
Select one of the following options from the Paper path area: ●
Automatic: Selects the default paper path.
●
Face up (Straightest path): Delivers the output job with the pages face-up, in reverse order. Use this option for heavy or stiff paper.
●
Face down (Correct order): Delivers the output job with the pages face-down, in correct order. Use this option for most jobs.
Touch the Start button to copy the pages or save the scans to device memory, depending on the selected feature.
Jobs saved to device memory are retrieved with the saved settings.
Staple/Collate The Staple/Collate option is available in the Copy and Save to Device Memory features. The option allows users to select stapling and collating options for copy and scan jobs. The product firmware automatically rotates the print image, if necessary. This option is only available if an output accessory is installed. To use the Staple/Collate option: 1.
Touch either the Copy or Save to Device Memory button on the Home screen.
2.
Touch either the down arrow in the Copy menu or the More Options button in the Save to Device Memory menu until the Staple/Collate option displays on the screen.
3.
Touch Staple/Collate, and then select one of the following options from the Staples area:
4.
74
●
None: Processes the job without stapling the output stack.
●
Top left: Places a single staple in the upper-left corner of the output stack.
●
Top right: Places a single staple in the upper-right corner of the output stack.
●
Two left: Places two staples along the left edge of the output stack.
●
Two right: Places two staples along the right edge of the output stack.
●
Two top: Places two staples along the top edge of the output stack.
Touch the Orientation button, select either Portrait or Landscape from the available options, and then touch OK to confirm the selection.
Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
5.
The Collate checkbox is selected by default. Deselect the option, if desired.
6.
Touch the Start button to copy the pages or save the scans to device memory, depending on the selected feature.
Hole Punch The Hole Punch option is available in the Copy and Save to Device Memory features. The option allows users to select stapling and collating options for copy and scan jobs. This option is only available when a Stapler/Stacker with hole punch output accessory is installed. The product firmware automatically rotates the print image, if necessary. To use the Hole Punch option: 1.
Touch either the Copy or Save to Device Memory button on the Home screen.
2.
Touch either the down arrow in the Copy menu or the More Options button in the Save to Device Memory menu until the Hole Punch option displays on the screen.
3.
Touch Hole Punch, and then select one of the following options from the Hole Punch area: The Three-hole options below appear for products in countries/regions that use Imperial measurements. The Four-hole options below appear for products in countries/regions that use metric measurements. ●
None
●
Two left
●
Two right
●
Two top
●
Two bottom
●
Three left or Four left
●
Three right or Four right
NOTE: Only valid hole-punch options are available, based on the size and orientation of the outputpaper. Three or four holes cannot be punched on the short edge of smaller paper sizes such as A4 or Letter.
Booklet Format The Booklet Format feature allows users to copy two or more pages onto one sheet of paper. Doing so allows folding the sheets in the center to form a booklet. The product arranges the pages in the correct order. For example, if the original document has eight pages, the product prints pages 1 and 8 on the same sheet. The product does not fold the pages when using Booklet Format. NOTE: This feature is combined with the Booklet feature when a Booklet maker output accessory is installed. NOTE: This feature is only available in the Save to Device Memory and Copy menus. To use the Booklet Format setting:
ENWW
Copy, scan, and Digital Send
75
HP Confidential
1.
Touch the Booklet Format button.
2.
Select the Booklet on option.
3.
Select 1-Sided or 2-Sided in the Original Sides area, and then touch Borders on each page, if desired.
4.
Touch the Paper Selection button to choose the size of the output paper, and then touch OK. The product will enlarge or reduce the print image to fit the selected paper. Choose a paper twice the size of the original to print a folded copy that is the same size as the original page when the sheet is folded in half.
5.
Touch the OK button. The product scans the pages, and then processes the scans to place them in the proper order when the job is output and folded. It might take over a minute to process the job before printing begins.
Booklet (Booklet maker only) The Booklet option is available in the Copy and Save to Device Memory features. It is only available when a Booklet maker output accessory is installed. The Booklet Format features are included in this menu. To use the Booklet option: 1.
Touch the Booklet button.
2.
Select Booklet Format and follow the previous instruction to output unfolded sheets, or select Foldand-stitch to output folded and stapled booklets.
3.
Touch the Paper Selection button to choose the size of the output paper, and then touch OK. The product will enlarge or reduce the print image to fit the selected paper. Choose a paper twice the size of the original to print a folded copy that is the same size as the original page when the sheet is folded in half.
4.
Touch the OK button. The product scans the pages, and then processes the scans to place them in the proper order when the job is output and folded. It might take over a minute to process the job before printing begins.
The job is output to the booklet bin.
Configure and use Digital Send features Configure and use Digital Send features overview Many of the copy, scan, and Digital Send features remain unchanged. This section of the course covers relatively-new features, updated features, and tips. The features can be managed using the control panel, EWS, HP Web Jetadmin, or HP DSS software.
Save to SharePoint® (M880) Save to SharePoint® overview Save to SharePoint® is a feature on the HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880. The feature allows customers to scan documents directly to a Microsoft SharePoint site. It eliminates the need for a customer to scan the documents to a network folder, USB flash drive, or email message, and then manually upload the files to the SharePoint site.
76
Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
Save to SharePoint® must be used as part of a Quick Set. Save to SharePoint® supports all scanning options, including the ability to scan documents as images or use the OCR features to created text files or searchable PDFs. The feature is disabled by default. Enable Save to SharePoint® using the EWS. Quick Sets and scanning options are discussed elsewhere in this course. Additional information is in the User Guide and the course library. Enable Save to SharePoint® Save to SharePoint® is disabled by default. Follow these steps to enable the feature: 1.
Launch the HP Embedded Web Server by opening a Web browser window and typing the product IP address in the address field, and then pressing Enter.
2.
Click on the Scan/Digital Send tab, and then select the Save to SharePoint® menu in the left column.
3.
Select Enable Save to SharePoint®, and then click the Apply button.
4.
Click the Add button in the Quick Sets section to launch the Quick Set Wizard.
5.
Enter a name for the Quick Set in the Quick Set Title field.
6.
Decide whether the Quick Set button should appear on the product Home screen or in the Quick Sets menu, and then make the appropriate choice from the Button Location: drop-down menu.
7.
If desired, enter a description for the Quick Set in the Quick Set Description: field. This description shows up on the Quick Set button on the control-panel display.
8.
Decide whether the Quick Set should start manually or as soon as the Quick Set is selected, select the appropriate option, and then click the Next button. NOTE: In most cases it is best to start the Quick Set manually. This lets the customer check and set options before starting the job.
9.
Click the Add button to add the path to the SharePoint folder. The target path can be copied from a browser address field and them pasted into the SharePoint Path: field, if desired. Click the Generate Short URL button to create a shortened URL to display on the control panel.
10. Select Overwrite existing files, if desired. If unchecked, a new file with the same name as an existing file will be given a time/date stamp. 11. Select an option from the Authentication Settings drop-down menu. The user can be required to sign in to the SharePoint site with their own credentials, or the credentials can be stored within the Quick Set. Note: For security purposes, credentials entered in the Quick Set Wizard are not displayed. 12. If entering credentials, click the Verify Access button to make certain that the path and other information are correct, and then click OK to return to the SharePoint® Destination Settings window. 13. If desired, enter an additional SharePoint path. Click the Next button to continue. 14. The Quick Set can be configured to send email messages or print a summary page if a job either completes successfully or fails. Select the desired choice from the Condition on Which to Notify dropdown menu, enter the notification method and email address to send notifications to, if necessary, and then click Next. Note: email must be configured on the product to use the email notification feature. 15. Select the desired options from the Scan Settings window, and then click Next.
ENWW
Copy, scan, and Digital Send
77
HP Confidential
16. Select the desired settings from the File Settings window. Predefined file name prefixes and suffixes can be selected from the drop-down menus, and a default file name can be entered. Click the Update Preview button to preview the selected settings. Choose the default file format from the Default File Type drop-down. Note: The Default File Types menu includes the OCR file formats. 17. Click the Next button to see a preview of the Quick Set button as it will appear on the control-panel display, and then click Finish to complete the setup. Use Save to SharePoint® The product can scan and save a file directly to a Microsoft SharePoint site. 1.
Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and adjust the paper guides to fit the size of the document.
2.
From the Home screen on the product control panel, touch the Save to SharePoint® button. Note: It might be necessary to sign in to the product to use this feature.
3.
Select one of the items in the Quick Sets list.
4.
Touch the File Name: text field to open a keyboard, and then type the name for the file using either onscreen keyboard or the physical keyboard. Touch the OK button.
5.
If necessary, touch the File Type drop-down menu to select a different output file format.
6.
Touch the More Options button to view and configure settings for the document. NOTE: Users can preview the image at any time by touching the Preview button in the upper-right corner of the screen. For more information about this feature, touch the Help button on the preview screen.
7.
Touch the Start button to save the file.
Embedded optical character recognition (OCR) Embedded OCR overview The OCR options are available in the Save to USB, Save to Device Memory, Save to Network Folder, E-Mail, and Save to SharePoint® features. As pages are scanned, the scans are analyzed by the OCR engine and converted into text, and then saved into the selected file format. Select one of the OCR file formats in the Document File Type menu option when setting up a scan job. The available file format options are listed below. Click on a link for a description of the file format and an example of the output resulting from scanning the sample page shown.
78
●
Text (OCR)
●
Unicode Text (OCR)
●
RTF (OCR)
●
Searchable PDF (OCR)
●
Searchable PDF/A (OCR)
●
HTML (OCR)
●
CSV (OCR)
Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
Text (OCR) When this format is selected, all graphics are ignored. The text characters are analyzed, converted to text, and then saved in an unformatted, ASCII-encoded text file with the extension .txt. Unicode Text (OCR) Saving the scan to a Unicode text file creates a text-only file with the extension .txt. The graphics are ignored. The characters are converted to text and saved as a Unicode-encoded .txt file for increased cross-platform compatibility. NOTE: The icons for Text and Unicode text files are identical. Open the file in an enhanced text editor such as Notepad ++ to view the encoding method. RTF (OCR) Selecting RTF (OCR) results in a Rich Text Format file that contains both text and graphics. The color, type style, and typeface are preserved as much as possible. In the example below, the HP logo and the USB button are graphic elements, but all other elements are editable and searchable text. The bold and italic typefaces, as well as the color of the fonts have been retained. Searchable PDF (OCR) Selecting Searchable PDF (OCR) creates a PDF image of the document with a hidden text layer. This preserves the exact look of the original file, but still allows for searching for text within the PDF. In the example, searching for the word scanned finds the word in the description panel of the Save to USB button. The Searchable PDF format preserves embedded video, audio, and hyperlinks in the PDF. Searchable PDF/A (OCR) Like the Searchable PDF format, the Searchable PDF/A file creates an image of the original document with a hidden text layer. PDF/A files are intended for long-term archiving, and cannot rely on any plug-ins to the PDF viewer or any external references that might not be available when the PDF is viewed from an archive. PDF/A files cannot include embedded video, audio, or any external resources, such as hyperlinks. PDF/A files cannot be encrypted. NOTE: The icons for PDF and PDF/A files are identical. When viewing PDF/A in Adobe© Acrobat Reader© a banner at the top of the window appears with the message: You are viewing this document in PDF/A mode. HTML (OCR) Selecting the HTML (OCR) option creates a self-contained Web page of the scan. The result is a .zip file that contains a folder with the images and HTML code necessary to display the page. Extract the .zip file, and then double-click the filename.htm file to view the document in a Web browser. CSV (OCR) Comma separated value (CSV) files are text files where each entry or line is separated by a comma character. CSV files can be used to import data into databases or spreadsheet programs such as Microsoft Excel.
Standard scan/send features The product also offers the following standard scan and send features:
ENWW
●
Scan and save files to a folder on your network
●
Scan and save files to the product memory
Copy, scan, and Digital Send
79
HP Confidential
●
Scan and save files to a USB flash drive
●
Scan and send documents to one or more email addresses
NOTE: The scanner scans to device memory in black or grayscale, but can scan to USB in either black and white or color modes. The default color mode is Auto-detect. The scan and send functions are disabled by default. The features must be set up in the EWS before the option appears in the control-panel display. See the User Guide or course library for detailed information on the following topics: ●
Change default scan/send settings from the product control panel
●
Send a scanned document to a network folder
●
Send a scanned document to a folder in the product memory
●
Send a scanned document to a USB flash drive
●
Send a scanned document to one or more email addresses
●
Use the address book to send email
●
Scan a photo
Set up standard scan/send features Some scan and send features are not available on the product control panel until they are activated in the EWS. NOTE: To find detailed information about using the HP Embedded Web Server, click the Help link in the upper-right corner of each HP Embedded Web Server page. 1.
Open a Web browser window, and then enter the product IP address in the address line.
2.
When the HP Embedded Web Server opens, click the Scan/Digital Send tab.
3.
Enable or edit the E-mail feature. a.
Click the E-mail Setup link.
b.
Select the Enable Send to E-mail check box to enable the feature.
c.
Select the outgoing mail server to use, or click the Add button to add a different server to the list. Follow the on-screen prompts, clicking the Next button after each step. Test the configuration by entering an email address in the Send a test email to: field, and then clicking the Test button. NOTE: Users can often find the name of the mail server by opening the default email program and checking the outgoing mail configuration settings.
4.
80
d.
In the Address Message area, configure the default setting for the From address.
e.
Configuring the other settings is optional.
f.
Click the Apply button at the bottom of the page.
Enable the Save to Network Folder feature.
Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
5.
a.
Click the Save to Network Folder Setup link.
b.
Select the Enable Save to Network Folder check box to enable the feature.
c.
Make any desired changes to the Quick Sets, Notification Settings, Folder Settings, Scan Settings, or Files Settings options, then click the Apply button at the bottom of the page.
Enable the Save to USB feature. a.
Click the Save to USB Setup link.
b.
Select the Enable Save to USB check box.
c.
Click the Apply button at the bottom of the page.
Send a scanned document to one or more email addresses The product can be configured to scan and send documents to one or more email addresses. Click the Play button to see a demonstration. 1.
Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and adjust the paper guides to fit the size of the document.
2.
From the Home screen on the product control panel, touch the E-mail button. NOTE: If prompted, enter a valid user name and password.
3.
Touch the To: field to open a keypad. NOTE: User name and other default information may appear in the From: field when signed into the product. This might make it impossible to alter the form.
4.
To send to multiple addresses, separate the addresses with a semicolon, or touch the Enter button on the touchscreen keypad after you type each address.
5.
Complete the CC:, Subject:, and File Name: fields by touching the field and using the touchscreen keypad to enter information. Touch the OK button when complete.
6.
To change the settings for the document touch the More Options button.
7.
To send a two-sided document, select the Original Sides menu and select the 2-sided option. Touch the OK button.
8.
Touch the Start button to begin sending. NOTE: Users might be prompted to add the email addresses to the address book.
9.
To set up another email job, touch the OK button on the Status screen. Touch the Home button to exit. NOTE: Touch the Retain settings for next job button if the next email job uses the same options as the current job.
Send a scanned document to a network folder The product can scan a file and save it in a folder on the network. NOTE: Users might be required to sign in to the product to use this feature.
ENWW
Copy, scan, and Digital Send
81
HP Confidential
The system administrator can use the EWS to configure pre-defined Quick Sets folders. Users can also provide the path to another network folder. 1.
Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and adjust the paper guides to fit the size of the document.
2.
From the Home screen on the product control panel, touch the Save to Network Folder button. NOTE:
If prompted, enter a valid user name and password.
3.
To use one of the preset job settings, select one of the items in the Quick Sets list.
4.
Touch the File Name: field, type a name for the file, and then touch the OK button. Use this format for the path: \\path\path.
5.
If necessary, touch the File Type: drop-down menu to select a different output file format.
6.
Touch the + button below the Folder Path field, type the path to the network folder in the Network Folder Path: field, and then touch the OK button. Use this format for the path: \\path\path.
7.
To configure settings for the document, touch the More Options button.
8.
Touch the Start button to scan and send the file to the network drive.
9.
Touch the OK button, then either set up a new job or touch the Home button to exit.
Copy The product can make single-sided or double-sided copies using either the flatbed glass or the ADF. Copy quality can be manually adjusted or automatically optimized for text or pictures. Multiple sets of originals can be combined into a single copy job using the Job Build feature. NOTE: The ADF lid hinges extend to allow for making copies of books or other originals up to approximately 1.5 inches (40 mm) thick using the flatbed glass. Users can alter and save the default settings for copy jobs. Information about the default settings and instructions for saving and restoring the default settings can be found in the User Guide. Detailed information about the following tasks and procedures can be found in the User Guide and the product support Web page:
82
●
Make a single copy
●
Make multiple copies
●
Copy a multiple-page original
●
Collate a copy job
●
Copy on both sides (duplex)
●
Reduce or enlarge a copy image
●
Optimize copy quality for text or pictures
●
Adjust the copy lightness/darkness
●
Set the paper size and type for copying on special paper
●
Use Job Build mode
Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
●
Copy a book
●
Copy a photo
Fax Fax overview The HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 models have built-in fax capabilities. The products supports analog, LAN, and Internet fax modes. The following settings must be configured in order to use the fax feature. If these settings are not configured, the fax icon is unavailable in the control panel. These settings include: ●
Country/region
●
Date/Time
●
Company Name
●
Fax Number
This information is used in the fax header, which prints on all outgoing faxes. Configure these settings using the Fax Setup Wizard. NOTE: When first installed, the fax accessory might read some of these settings from the product; therefore, a value might already be set. The settings can be configured using the Fax Setup Wizard, EWS, HP DSS software, or the Administration menu on the control panel. NOTE: In the U.S. and many other countries/regions, setting the date, time, country/region, phone number, and company name is a legal requirement for fax. See the product support site or User Guide for more information about this feature. Use the Fax Setup Wizard The Fax Setup Wizard guides users through a step-by-step procedure to configure fax settings that are required to use the fax feature. If the settings are not configured, the fax feature is disabled. The first time the product is turned on with a fax accessory installed, access the Fax Setup Wizard by following these steps: 1.
From the Home screen on the product control panel, touch the Initial Setup button.
2.
Touch the Fax Setup Wizard button.
3.
Follow the steps in the Fax Setup Wizard to configure the required settings.
4.
When the Fax Setup Wizard finishes, the option to hide the Initial Setup button appears on the Home screen.
Access the Fax Setup Wizard after initial setup through the control panel by following these steps:
ENWW
1.
From the Home screen on the product control panel, touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus: ●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
Copy, scan, and Digital Send
83
HP Confidential
3.
●
Fax Send Setup
●
Fax Setup Wizard
Follow the steps in the Fax Setup Wizard to configure the required settings.
NOTE: The settings configured using the Fax Setup Wizard on the control panel override any settings made in the HP Embedded Web Server. NOTE: If the Fax Settings menu does not appear in the menu listing, LAN or Internet fax might be enabled. When LAN or Internet fax is enabled, the analog fax accessory is disabled and the Fax Settings menu does not display. Only one fax feature, either LAN fax, analog fax, or Internet fax, can be enabled at a time. Use the EWS or DSS to disable LAN or Internet fax.
84
Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
Mobile printing - HP ePrint, Apple AirPrint, and Google Cloud Print Mobile printing overview Mobile printing enables customers to print from: ●
Computers on the same wireless network as the printer.
●
Mobile devices such as smart phones or tablets on the same wireless network as the printer.
●
Internet-connected computers or mobile devices to Internet-connected printers, regardless of the network domains that the sending device and the printer are on.
The product supports mobile printing through HP ePrint, Apple AirPrint, and Google Cloud Print. While all three services allow mobile users to print to select HP printers and MFPs, there are some distinct differences between the services. ●
HP ePrint overview
●
Apple AirPrint overview
●
Google Cloud Print overview
●
Enable HP ePrint
●
Install HP ePrint Software for Windows
●
Register HP ePrint Software for Windows
●
Install HP ePrint Software for Mac OS
●
Use HP ePrint
HP ePrint overview HP ePrint is a free, cloud-based service from HP that enables printing from any device that is connected to the Web, such as a phone, tablet, or computer, to any HP ePrint Web-connected product. Print jobs are sent from the device through the Internet to www.hpconnected.com, and then forwarded to the ePrint-enabled product. Use HPConnected.com to define user access to Internet-connected products, view print job status, manage print jobs, and access product settings such as duplex printing. Web services must be enabled on the product, and the product must be registered with HP Connected to use HP ePrint. An email address is assigned to the product when it is registered with HP Connected. The assigned email address can be customized. The domain for the email address must remain @hpeprint.com. HP ePrint solutions include:
ENWW
●
HP ePrint Software: HP ePrint Software for Windows adds HP ePrint to the list of available printers in the print dialog box in any application. HP ePrint Software for Macintosh is a PDF-based workflow utility.
●
HP ePrint via email: Any device that can send email can send a print job to an HP ePrinter. The email messages and certain types of email attachments print when an email message is sent to the email address of the HP ePrint-enabled product.
Mobile printing - HP ePrint, Apple AirPrint, and Google Cloud Print
85
HP Confidential
●
●
HP ePrint mobile apps: HP provides the following free applications for mobile devices such as phones and tablets: ◦
HP ePrint: For Apple iOS, Google Android, and Research In Motion BlackBerry OS devices.
◦
HP ePrint Home & Biz: Nokia Symbian OS devices.
HP Connected Web site: Check product status, add and remove printers, manage HP ePrint settings, and view print-job history from any Web browser. HP Connected replaces the HP ePrintCenter Web site.
Individuals and Small to Medium Business (SMB) customers can set up individual printers easily using the EWS and the HP Connected Web site. Enterprise customers can work with the HP Managed Print Services (MPS) group or HP Sales to purchase and implement the HP ePrint Enterprise solution. HP ePrint Enterprise is a solution for customers who desire to manage HP ePrint within their own IT infrastructure. Go to www.hp.com/eprint for information about HP ePrint and the mobile printing options offered by HP.
Apple AirPrint overview AirPrint is a wireless printing solution from Apple for iPod Touch, iPhone, and iPad devices running iOS 4.2 or above and Macintosh computers running Mac OS X 10.7 or above. AirPrint allows iOS apps that support printing and all Mac OS apps to print wirelessly to HP ePrint-capable products that support AirPrint. The iOS device and the product must be on the same 802.11 wireless (Wi-Fi) network to use AirPrint. NOTE: Additional information about Apple AirPrint is available at www.apple.com.
Google Cloud Print overview Google Cloud Print is a cloud-based service from Google Inc. that enables Web-connected devices, including phones, tablets, and computers, to print to a Cloud Print printer that is connected to the Internet. The sender must be logged into a Google account, and the HP ePrint-assigned email address of the printer must be registered with Google Cloud Print. NOTE: Additional information about Google Cloud Print is available at www.google.com/cloudprint.
Enable HP ePrint HP ePrint requires that Web Services be enabled on the product, and that the product be registered on the HP Connected Web site. NOTE: HP Connected replaced HP ePrintCenter. HP Connected includes the current services and features of HP ePrintCenter, as well as additional services and features. New features will also be added to HP Connected as HP expands the types of Mobile Printing services available. Existing HP ePrintCenter customers are prompted to create a new HP Connected account when enabling HP ePrint on a new product. The HP Connected account must be registered to a different email address than the one used for HP ePrintCenter. All existing HP ePrintCenter printers and settings are automatically migrated to the new HP Connected account. The HP ePrintCenter account is disabled when the migration of printers is complete. Go to www.hp.com/go/LaserjetMobilePrinting for updated information.
Install HP ePrint Software for Windows The HP ePrint Software installer is similar to other print driver installers.
86
Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
Install HP ePrint Software 1.
Download the software installer for Windows from www.hp.com/go/eprintsoftware.
2.
Double-click the installer. An installation wizard displays. Follow the prompts to install the software.
Register HP ePrint Software for Windows HP ePrint Software must be registered to print to a remote HP ePrinter through HPConnected.com. Registration is not required to print directly to an HP ePrinter on the same local area network (LAN) as the computer. The HP ePrint Software Registration window displays the first time a print job is sent to an HP ePrinter or by clicking the Preferences button in the HP ePrint print-dialog box. Register HP ePrint Software 1.
Click the HP ePrint Registration button to register the software.
2.
Enter an email address when prompted, and then click Next >. A Personal Identification Number (PIN) will be sent from
[email protected] to the email address entered.
3.
Enter the PIN code in the PIN: field, and then click Next >.
4.
The PIN is registered with the HP ePrint service.
5.
A Registration Successful window displays. Click OK to finish registering the software.
Install HP ePrint Software for Mac OS The steps for installing HP ePrint Software for Mac OS X are similar to installing other Mac OS applications. The latest version of the installer is at www.hp.com/go/eprintsoftware. NOTE: It is important to select the PDF Workflow Item option in the Installation Type window of the installer. The PDF Workflow Item is required, but is not selected by default. It can be installed separately, if desired.
Use HP ePrint HP ePrint must be enabled during the print driver installation or from the product EWS. Once the product is registered with HP Connected, jobs can be printed using HP ePrint Software, an email client, or one of the HP ePrint apps on a mobile device.
ENWW
●
HP ePrint Software (Windows)
●
HP ePrint Software (Mac OS X)
●
HP ePrint via email
●
HP ePrint mobile apps
Mobile printing - HP ePrint, Apple AirPrint, and Google Cloud Print
87
HP Confidential
HP ePrint Software (Windows) 1.
From an application, click File, click Print, and then select HP ePrint from the installed printers.
2.
Click the Print button to open HP ePrint Software user interface. A list of wireless, network, and ePrint printers displays. NOTE: A signal-strength indicator appears above nearby wireless printers, and an image of a network connection appears below network printers. An image of a cloud appears above remote HP ePrinters.
3.
Select the desired printer, and then click Print to send the print job.
4.
The software attempts to validate the printer, and then displays a message that the print job was sent successfully or that the printer could not be validated.
HP ePrint Software (Mac OS X) The ePrint Software for Mac supports Web-connected print paths to an HP ePrint-enabled product registered to HP Connected. The following steps assume you have already registered HP ePrint Software for the Mac system. 1.
From an application, click File, and then click Print.
2.
Click the PDF button, at the lower-left area of the print dialog box, and then select HP ePrint from the drop-down menu. NOTE:
3.
It does not matter which printer is selected in the Printer field.
The list of HP ePrint-enabled products available for printing displays under Account Printers. Select the desired printer from the list. Use the + and - icons to add or remove products. NOTE: If the search results do not return your HP Connected registered products, confirm that the email address used for HP ePrint Software registration is on the Allowed Senders list defined for the HP Connected. If the setting is Everyone, you must manually type the product email address into the CloudPrint service e-mail field.
NOTE: Go to www.hp.com/go/eprintsoftware or search
[email protected] for additional information.
HP ePrint via email HP Connected assigns an email address to your printer during the registration process. To print, send an email containing your document to the email address of the printer. Doing so opens the HP ePrint service and prints the email and any supported attachments. HP ePrint prints the body of the email message and up to 10 attachments to a single email. The email message can be up to 5 MB, and there is a 5 MB limit to each attachment. The HP ePrint service automatically prints he following type of email attachments:
88
●
Microsoft Word
●
Microsoft PowerPoint
●
Microsoft Excel
●
Text files (.txt)
Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
●
PDF
●
HTML
●
Images (bmp, jpg, png, gif, tiff)
NOTE: HP ePrint via email provides convenience printing. Documents printed with HP ePrint via email might appear different from the original. Style, formatting, and text flow might differ slightly from the original document. HP strongly recommends that Excel documents be previewed before printing. View and manage print jobs sent to the product using the Job History feature on the HP Connected Web site. Go to www.hpconnected.com for more details, including supported email clients, updated drivers, documentation, and support.
HP ePrint mobile apps HP provides free applications for mobile devices such as phones and tablets: ●
HP ePrint — For Apple iOS, Google Android, and Research In Motion BlackBerry OS devices.
●
HP ePrint Home & Biz app — For Nokia Symbian OS devices.
NOTE: Features and capabilities might differ between the different operating systems. To install and use the HP ePrint mobile app:
ENWW
1.
Download and install the application on your mobile device from the iTunes App store, Google Play, BlackBerry App World, or Ovi Market.
2.
Tap the HP ePrint icon to start the app.
3.
Tap Photos to print a photo; tap Cloud to print a saved document from Dropbox, Evernote, or Google Drive repository; tap Web to print a Web page, or tap Email to print an email message.
4.
Select a file.
5.
Tap Print Preview to preview the file or tap Print to print the file.
Mobile printing - HP ePrint, Apple AirPrint, and Google Cloud Print
89
HP Confidential
Near Field Communication (NFC) and Direct Wireless printing NFC and Direct Wireless overview The HP Color LaserJet M855 bundle and all configurations of the HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 ship with the HP Jetdirect 2800w NFC & Wireless Direct Accessory. The accessory is an option for the HP Color LaserJet M855 bundle. The accessory can be installed on select HP LaserJet products. This section contains basic information about enabling the basic features of the accessory, using the Touch to Print feature, and using Direct Wireless printing. See www.hp.com/go/jd2800wSupport for updated information, including a list of supported HP products.
NFC and Direct Wireless features The HP Jetdirect 2800w NFC & Wireless Direct Accessory provides the products with near field communication (NFC) capabilities, which enables an easy one-to-one HP wireless direct print connection using a simple device-to-device touch. Mobile device users can quickly connect to the printer and print documents and images from a mobile device, such as a smartphone or tablet, just by touching it to the NFC accessory. The mobile device must support NFC. The HP Jetdirect 2800w also provides HP wireless direct printing so users can print from a wireless mobile device directly to an HP wireless direct-enabled printer without requiring a connection to a network or the Internet. Use HP wireless direct to print from the following devices: ●
iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch using Apple AirPrint or the HP ePrint App.
●
Google Android mobile devices using the HP ePrint App or Android embedded print solution. Android embedded print is available in Android v4.1 (Jelly Bean).
●
Symbian mobile devices using the HP ePrint Home & Biz App.
●
Windows and Mac OS devices using HP ePrint Software.
Print using Touch to Print (NFC) The following sections cover the basics of using the Touch to Print features with a HP ElitePad 900 running Windows 8. The process is similar for other NFC-enabled devices. HP updates the Touch to Print features on a regular basis. Go to www.hp.com/go/jd2800wSupport for updated information and videos showing how to print from other devices. The product must have NFC printing and HP Wireless Direct printing enabled. Confirm that NFC printing and HP wireless direct printing are enabled on the product before proceeding. Print or view a configuration page report from the control panel. If a page titled Wireless is included, NFC and HP wireless direct printing are enabled. The mobile device or computer must have HP ePrint Software v4.5 of greater. Download the latest version at www.hp.com/go/eprintsoftware.
90
Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
NOTE: Currently, the HP ElitePad 900 is the only supported Windows 8 mobile device. ARM-based tablets using Windows RT are not supported.
Print from a Windows 8 mobile device 1.
From the device's application, select the File menu, and then select Print.
2.
Select HP ePrint from the list of available printers.
3.
Closely align or touch together the NFC icons of the mobile device and the HP Jetdirect 2800w NFC & Wireless Direct Accessory for at least one full second. The mobile device might make a connection sound or display a pop-up symbol. Once a connection is established, the HP ePrint Software displays the printer’s service set identifier (SSID). The SSID is the HP wireless direct printer's name.
4.
The mobile device can be moved away from the NFC accessory after a connection is established. Touch the Settings button to define basic print options such as the number of copies, pages per sheet, and whether to print on both sides (duplex).
5.
Touch Print on the device.
If the Windows application does not have a Print option: 1.
With the Windows application open, swipe to the right from the edge of the screen.
2.
Touch Devices, then touch HP ePrint from the list of available printers.
3.
Change basic print settings, if desired.
4.
Touch Print on the mobile device.
5.
Touch the Your printer requires attention message and follow the instructions to print.
Print using HP wireless direct printing HP wireless direct printing overview HP updates the wireless direct print features on a regular basis. Go to www.hp.com/go/jd2800wSupport for updated information and complete documentation. The product must have NFC printing and HP Wireless Direct printing enabled. Confirm that NFC printing and HP wireless direct printing are enabled on the product before proceeding. Print or view a configuration page report from the control panel. If a page titled Wireless is included, NFC and HP wireless direct printing are enabled. From a mobile device or a computer, verify that wireless capability is enabled (the Wi-Fi radio is on). This control is typically found in the Settings menu. Then connect to the HP wireless direct printer as you would connect to other wireless networks.
ENWW
Near Field Communication (NFC) and Direct Wireless printing
91
HP Confidential
NOTE: Disconnect from existing wireless connections (WLAN or Internet). Windows 8 devices only need to have Wi-Fi enabled. They do not need to be connected to the HP wireless direct printer. When using an Apple iOS device, such as iPhone® or iPad®, that uses iOS 5 or greater to connect to the HP wireless direct printer, the spinning connection status icon does not stop. This is normal and indicates that the HP wireless direct connection does not provide Internet access. Since HP wireless direct is only a connection between the mobile device and the printer, the mobile device cannot access the Internet through the printer.
Print from Windows 8 tablets or PCs Verify that the latest version of HP ePrint Software is installed on the tablet or PC. Go to www.hp.com/go/ eprintsoftware to download the latest version and documentation. 1.
From the device's application, select the File menu, and then select Print.
2.
Select HP ePrint from the list of available printers.
3.
Closely align or touch together the NFC icons of the mobile device and the HP Jetdirect 2800w NFC & Wireless Direct Accessory for at least one full second. The mobile device might make a connection sound or display a pop-up symbol. Once a connection is established, the HP ePrint Software displays the printer’s service set identifier (SSID). The SSID is the HP wireless direct printer's name.
4.
The mobile device can be moved away from the NFC accessory after a connection is established. Touch the Settings button to define basic print options such as the number of copies, pages per sheet, and whether to print on both sides (duplex).
5.
Touch Print on the device.
If the Windows application does not have a Print option: 1.
With the Windows application open, swipe to the right from the edge of the screen.
2.
Touch Devices, then touch HP ePrint from the list of available printers.
3.
Change basic print settings, if desired.
4.
Touch Print on the mobile device.
5.
Touch the Your printer requires attention message and follow the instructions to print.
Print from Mac OS X 10.6, 10.7, or 10.8 Verify that the latest version of HP ePrint Software is installed on the tablet or PC. Go to www.hp.com/go/ eprintsoftware to download the latest version and documentation. 1.
Select the product SSID from the list of available networks in either the Wi-Fi Status icon or the Network System Settings panel.
2.
Open the document to be printed, and then select the File menu.
3.
Select Print from the drop-down menu.
4.
Select the printer from the Printer list. NOTE:
92
If installing the printer for the first time, select the printer name from the Nearby Printers list.
Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
5.
Verify PDF is selected in the PDF pop-up menu in the Print box. HP ePrint Software automatically searches for printers on the local network, including HP wireless direct-enabled printers. These are identified by their SSID/HP wireless direct printer name.
6.
Click Print. NOTE: The print queue is paused after the document prints. To print another document, follow steps 3 through 5. A window opens stating that the print queue is paused. Click the Resume button in the window to add the new print job and restart the print queue.
ENWW
Near Field Communication (NFC) and Direct Wireless printing
93
HP Confidential
Customize the Home screen Customize the Home screen overview Use the EWS to customize the following control-panel Home Screen options: ●
Displayed menu options
●
The order in which the menu options are displayed
●
The connection information that is displayed
●
Language selection and languages displayed
●
Keyboard layouts
The ability to customize the control-panel display can be restricted only to administrators by assigning an administrator password. To customize the control-panel display: 1.
Launch the product EWS by opening a Web-browser window and typing the IP address of the product into the address field. NOTE: It might be necessary to sign in as an administrator if an administrator password has been assigned.
2.
Click the General tab.
3.
Select the Control Panel Customization option, and then follow the instructions listed on the following pages.
4.
Remember to click the Apply button at the bottom of the EWS window when complete.
●
Change the menus that appear on the Home screen
●
Change the order that the menus appear on the Home screen
●
Change Display Settings
●
Change control panel language and keyboard layouts
Change the menus that appear on the Home screen The Home screen section of the menu shows the menus that are visible on the Home screen. The Available Applications (Not showing on Home screen) section shows the menus that are available, but are not displayed on the Home screen. An administrator might choose to hide certain functions to keep costs down or to adhere to a company policy. 1.
Click and hold the cursor over a menu to be hidden.
2.
Drag the menu to the Available Applications (Not showing on Home screen) section, and then release the mouse button.
Reverse the procedure to view a hidden menu. NOTE: The Quick Sets menu must be displayed on the Home screen to use Quick Sets.
94
Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
Change the order that the menus appear on the Home screen An administrator might want to change the order of the menus to put frequently-used menus in a more convenient location on the control-panel display. 1.
Click and hold the cursor over a menu to be moved.
2.
Drag the menu to the desired location, and then release the mouse button.
Change Display Settings The date and time appear on many control-panel screens. Information such as fax number, IP address, and HP ePrint address, as well as instructions on how to connect to the product display in the How to Connect menu by default. Control what information displays by selecting or deselecting the options in the Display Settings area.
Change control panel language and keyboard layouts A customer might decide to allow users to change the display language or keyboard layout of the control panel. It might be convenient to limit the number of languages available.
ENWW
1.
Select the radio button next to the desired default language from the Language column.
2.
Select the desired keyboard layout from the Keyboard Layout drop-down menu.
3.
Enable or disable the Allow users to choose another language for their session option, as desired.
4.
Enable or disable the Show alternate keyboard button on keyboard screens option, and then select the languages to be displayed. If the feature is enabled, select the desired keyboard layouts.
Customize the Home screen
95
HP Confidential
Security features Security features overview The product supports security standards and recommended protocols that help keep the product secure, protect critical information on the network, and monitor and maintain the product. Certain features can be enabled, disabled, or restricted by the product administrator. As an example, permissions might be set so that all users can make copies, but only users who enter a pre-assigned access code can send a fax. Access to the administration functions can also be restricted. Data and job information can be encrypted, stored and securely erased. The formatter cage can also be secured. For in-depth information about HP's secure imaging and printing solutions, visit http://h20195.www2.hp.com/V2/GetPDF.aspx/4AA4-2459ENW.pdf.
Manage security settings While some security features can be enabled or disabled through the control panel, making the changes using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) is the preferred method because the EWS has a more complete set of controls. Access to the EWS can be restricted so only administrators have access to the security features and other product-configuration tools. The EWS works when the product is connected to an IP-based network. The EWS does not support IPX-based product connections. Internet access is not required to open and use the EWS. When the product is connected to the network, the HP Embedded Web Server is automatically available. Type the product IP address or Bonjour name (if Bonjour is enabled) in the address/URL field of a Web browser to open the EWS. The security settings are included on the Security and Network tabs. NOTE: If an administrator account has been set up, the Security and Network tabs are not available unless you are logged in as the administrator.
Security tab 1.
General Security — Set passwords, restrict access to the EWS, and manage USB settings.
2.
Access Control — Manage users, groups, and control access to certain product features.
3.
Protect Stored Data — Manage HDD encryption settings, job storage, and job deletion settings.
4.
Certificate Management — Install, delete, and validate security certificates.
5.
Self Test — Run tests to verify security settings, check data security, and check code integrity.
Networking tab
96
1.
Settings — Review the status of network security settings and configure security settings using the HP Jetdirect Security Configuration Wizard.
2.
Authorization — Manage the administrator password, network security certificates, and set up the network Access Control List (ACL).
Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
3.
Management Protocols — Set up encrypted communications, configure SNMP settings, and manage other network protocols and services.
4.
802.1X Authentication — Enable and configure 802.1X authentication protocols.
5.
IPsec/Firewall — Enable secure IP network communications.
6.
Announcement Agent — Enable remote configuration using a Configuration Server such as HP Imaging & Printing Security Center.
Access Control Overview The product ships with full access to the configuration settings through the EWS and the control panel. An administrator account can be set up to restrict access to both the EWS and the control panel. Set up access controls to prevent users from changing product configuration settings, accessing secure jobs, or using certain features of the product, such as scanning or faxing. Assign a system password to restrict access to the EWS and control panel configuration only to people who know the account login and password. Restrict access to certain product features by implementing access controls.
Secure the HP Embedded Web Server Assign an administrator password for access to the product and the HP Embedded Web Server so that unauthorized users cannot change the product settings. The password assigned to the administrator account is also the Device Administrator Access Code at the device. 1.
Open the HP Embedded Web Server by entering the product IP address into the address line of a Web browser.
2.
Click the Security tab.
3.
Open the General Security menu.
4.
In the Username field, enter the name to associate with the password.
5.
Enter the password in the New Password field, and then enter it again in the Verify Password field. NOTE: If you are changing an existing password, you must first enter the existing password in the Old Password field.
6.
Click the Apply button. Make note of the password and store it in a safe place.
Restrict access to features Overview Some features on the product control panel can be secured so that unauthorized people cannot use them. When a feature is secured, the product prompts you to sign in before you can use it. You can also sign in without waiting for a prompt by touching the Sign In button on the Home screen. Permissions can be set for groups of users, individual users, and guest users. Access codes are assigned to groups and users. Guest users are not required to enter access codes. For example, an access code can be
ENWW
Security features
97
HP Confidential
assigned to a group of users to allow them to use the “Save to USB” feature. A guest user would not have access to that feature. Lock the control panel menus 1.
Open the HP Embedded Web Server by entering the product IP address into the address line of a Web browser.
2.
Click the Security tab.
3.
Open the Access Control menu.
4.
In the Sign In and Permission Policies area, select which types of users have permission for each of the features.
5.
Click the Apply button.
Data and file security overview There are several methods for protecting data stored on the hard disk and sent to or from the product. Data on the HP High-Performance Hard Disk (Encrypted HDD or HDD) can be encrypted so that information on the hard disk cannot be accessed if the drive is removed from the product. The product also supports two levels of securely erasing saved jobs and temporary files created as a result of processing jobs. Data sent to and from the product can also be encrypted. Control access to the product and protect stored jobs by requiring that an access code be entered prior to saving or retrieving the job from the product. NOTE: Additional information can be found in the access control and print tasks sections of this course.
Encryption support: HP High-Performance Secure Hard Disks The hard disk provides hardware-based encryption to securely store sensitive data without impacting product performance. This hard disk uses the latest Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) and has versatile time-saving features and robust functionality. Bundles primarily targeted to the government of the United States of America come equipped with HDDs that comply with the Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) 140 cryptographic standards. NOTE: The consumer version and FIPS 140 version of the HDDs are not interchangeable. Use the Security menu in the HP Embedded Web Server to configure the disk. With an encrypted drive, the data on the drive is not accessible if removed from the device. For more information about the encrypted hard disk, see the HP High-Performance Secure Hard Disk Setup Guide.
98
1.
Go to www.hp.com/support.
2.
Enter Secure Hard Disk into the search field, and then press Enter.
3.
Click the HP High-Performance Secure Hard Disk Drive link.
4.
Click the Manuals link.
Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
Protect stored data The product can be configured by an administrator to allow jobs to be stored on the HDD or solid state memory (SSM) installed in the product. Access to the Retrieve from Device Memory feature can be restricted to specific users or groups. For additional security a print job can be sent to the product as a private job or an encrypted job. A PIN or password must be entered at the control panel in order to print private or encrypted jobs. For more information about saving and printing stored jobs, see the print tasks section of this course, the course library, or the User Guide.
Lock the formatter cage The formatter cage has a slot to attach a locking security cable. Locking the formatter cage prevents someone from removing valuable components from the formatter. NOTE: A locking cable such as the HP Keyed Cable Lock or any lock compatible with a security slot is required.
ENWW
Security features
99
HP Confidential
Customer self-repair parts CSR parts overview The following parts customer self-repair (CSR) parts are available for the product. NOTE: The lists includes CSR parts, supplies, accessories, and maintenance kits. Supplies, accessories, and maintenance kits are also covered later in this course. There are instructions for replacing each CSR part following the identification sections. The replacement of toner cartridges and imaging drums is covered later in this module. CSR parts and supplies are designated as Mandatory or Optional. ●
Parts listed as Mandatory self-replacement are to be installed by customers, unless the customer is willing to pay HP service personnel to perform the repair. For these parts, on-site or return-to-depot support is not provided under the HP product warranty.
●
Parts listed as Optional self-replacement can be installed by HP service personnel at the request of the customer for no additional charge during the product warranty period.
Shared CSRs The part information in this table applies to both the HP Color LaserJet M855 and HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880. Description
Self-replacement options
Part number
Fuser Kit 110V
Mandatory
C1N54A
Fuser Kit 220V
Mandatory
C1N58A
Transfer & Roller Kit
Mandatory
D7H14A
Secondary Transfer Roller Kit
Mandatory
D7H14-67902
ITB Service Kit
Mandatory
A2W77-67904
Tray 2-X Roller Kit
Mandatory
A2W77-67905
Tray 1 Roller Kit
Optional
A2W77-67906
HDD Drive Kit
Optional
A2W75-67905
1GB DIMM Memory Kit
Mandatory
A2W77-67912
HP Color LaserJet M855 CSRs The part information in this table applies only to the HP Color LaserJet M855. Description
Self-replacement options
Part number
Control Panel Assembly Kit
Mandatory
CZ245-67901
Formatter Assembly Kit
Optional
A2W77-67902
Formatter Assembly Kit (China and India)
Optional
A2W77-67903
SSM Drive Kit
Mandatory
A2W77-67909
100 Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential Description
Self-replacement options
Part number
HDD Drive Kit
Optional
A2W75-67905
FIPS HDD 500GB
Optional
S2W79-67901
HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 CSRs The part information in this table applies only to the HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880. Description
Self-replacement options
Part number
Control Panel Assembly Kit
Mandatory
CF367-67910
Formatter Assembly Kit
Optional
A2W75-67903
Formatter Assembly Kit (China and India)
Optional
A2W75-67902
Fax Card Replacement Kit
Mandatory
A2W77-67910
ADF Roller Maintenance Kit
Mandatory
C1P70-67901
Document-feeder Separation Pad Spring Kit
Optional
5851-5855
Backside Background Selector Kit
Mandatory
5851-5861
White backing - A3 Kit
Mandatory
5851-5864
CSR parts replacement CSR parts replacement overview This section contains procedures to replace customer self-repair parts available for the HP Color LaserJet M855 and HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880. If the replacement procedure for a part is not in this section, complete removal and replacement instructions are available for reference in the product Service Manual. The list of CSR parts, installation guides, and the videos shown in this section are available to customers on the product support page and www.hp.com/support.
Common CSR parts procedures Common CSR parts procedures overview The CSR parts listed in this section are replaced using identical procedures for both products. Click the Next Topic arrow or click a listing in the Contents menu to see the steps for replacing the following parts:
ENWW
●
Tray 1 rollers
●
Tray 2-X rollers
●
Fuser
●
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB)
●
Transfer roller
●
Formatter
Customer self-repair parts 101
HP Confidential
●
HP High-Performance Secure Hard Disk
●
Memory DIMM
Tray 1 rollers The Tray 1 pickup rollers are a mandatory CSR part. CAUTION: Do not touch the surface of the replacement rollers. Skin oils deposited on the rollers might cause paper pickup problems. 1.
Open the right door.
2.
Release two hinge pins, and then remove the paper-feed cover.
3.
Release one tab, slide the multipurpose upper feed guide to the right to release it, and then lift it away from the door to remove it.
4.
Remove one plastic clip.
5.
Remove the upper roller by sliding it to the right.
6.
Pinch and hold the tab at the end of the lower roller to release it, and then slide the roller to the right to release it from the metal shaft. Slide the roller down to remove it.
7.
Recycle the old rollers and remove the new rollers from the package.
8.
Install the lower roller by reversing the steps used to remove the old roller. Slide the roller up, and then to the left onto the metal shaft until it clicks into place.
9.
Slide the upper roller onto the metal shaft, and then install the plastic clip to hold it in place.
10. Position the tabs on the multipurpose upper feed guide in the slots in the right door, and then slide it to the left to secure it to the door. One tab will click into place when the guide is seated properly. 11. Close the right door. Tray 2-X rollers The Tray 2 pickup rollers are mandatory CSR parts. CAUTION: Do not touch the surface of the replacement rollers. Skin oils deposited on the rollers might cause paper pickup problems. 1.
Remove Tray 2.
2.
Locate the rollers inside the tray cavity.
3.
Pinch the tab on the end of the knurled roller roller, and then remove the roller. Repeat the process for the upper smooth roller and then the lower smooth roller, in that order.
4.
Recycle the old rollers and remove the new rollers from their package.
5.
Slide a smooth roller onto the lower-right shaft. Make certain the roller clicks into place. Repeat the process for the roller on the upper shaft.
6.
Slide the knurled roller onto the upper-left shaft. Make certain the roller clicks into place.
7.
Reinstall the tray.
102 Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
Fuser The fuser is a mandatory CSR part. WARNING! The fuser might be hot. 1.
Turn off the product.
2.
Disconnect the power cable.
3.
Open the right door.
4.
Rotate the two blue fuser handles toward the center of the fuser.
5.
Grasp the handles and slide the fuser toward the right door to remove it.
6.
Recycle the old fuser.
7.
Remove the replacement fuser from its packaging.
8.
Lift the replacement fuser by the blue handles, and then insert it into the product.
9.
Rotate the blue fuser handles away from the center of the fuser and into a closed position.
10. Close the right door. 11. Reconnect the power cable. 12. Turn on the product. Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) 1.
Turn off the product.
2.
Open the right door.
3.
Lift the green handle on the transfer assembly, and then open the panel.
4.
Raise the ITB levers.
5.
Remove the ITB.
6.
Recycle the old ITB.
7.
Remove the replacement ITB from its packaging.
8.
Insert the new ITB into the product, and then lower the ITB levers.
9.
Close the transfer assembly panel.
10. Close the right door. 11. Turn on the product. Secondary Transfer Roller
ENWW
1.
Turn off the product.
2.
Open the right door.
3.
Lift the green handle on the transfer assembly, and then open the panel.
Customer self-repair parts 103
HP Confidential
4.
Remove the transfer roller.
5.
Recycle the old transfer roller.
6.
Remove the new transfer roller from its packaging.
7.
Slide the new transfer roller into the product until it snaps into place.
8.
Close the transfer assembly panel.
9.
Close the right door.
10. Turn on the product. Formatter The formatter is a mandatory CSR part. The hard disk drive (HDD), solid-state memory (SSM), DIMM, and fax card must be removed from the defective formatter and reinstalled in the replacement formatter. Follow the steps for removing and replacing the HDD, SSM, DIMM or fax card if replacing one of those components. 1.
Turn off the product.
2.
Disconnect the power cable.
3.
Disconnect all cables and accessories attached to the formatter.
4.
Loosen the two thumbscrews on the formatter and pull the formatter out of the product.
5.
Lay the formatter down on a flat, clean surface. CAUTION: The formatter and components are electrostatic-sensitive devices (ESD). Perform the following steps on a ESD workstation, use an ESD strap, or touch the metal chassis of the product to discharge any static electricity.
6.
Remove the following parts from the formatter. The parts will be reinstalled on the replacement formatter. ●
Hard disk drive (HDD) or solid-state memory (SSM), depending on the product configuration.
●
DIMM.
●
Fax card (if installed).
See the videos for the components for detailed instructions. 7.
Recycle the defective formatter, and then unpack the replacement formatter.
8.
Reinstall the components removed earlier onto the replacement formatter.
9.
Reinstall the formatter in the product. Align the guides on the top and bottom of the formatter with the rails on the product and slide the formatter in until it is fully seated.
10. Finger-tighten the two thumbscrews. 11. Reattach any cables and accessories that were removed from the formatter. 12. Reconnect the power cable, and then turn on the product.
104 Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
HP High-Performance Secure Hard Disk The HP High-Performance Secure Hard Disk drive (HDD) is an optional CSR part because product firmware must be reinstalled when replacing the HDD. CAUTION: Make sure to have a copy of the current firmware on a USB flash drive before proceeding. The firmware must be installed when a new hard drive is installed. The formatter and components on it are electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD). Perform the following steps in an ESD-protected workstation or take other precautions to avoid discharging static electricity. 1.
Turn off the product, and disconnect the power cable.
2.
Disconnect all cables and accessories attached to the formatter.
3.
Loosen the two thumbscrews on the formatter and pull the formatter out of the product.
4.
Lay the formatter down on a flat, clean surface.
5.
Disconnect two connectors from the HDD to the formatter. CAUTION: Be careful. The PCA terminal end of the black connector (callout 2) can be easily damaged and separated from the PCA if you pull too hard when disconnecting the connector. You might want to use a small flat blade screw driver to separate the wire harness connector end from the PCA terminal end to avoid dislodging it from the PCA.
6.
Release two tabs, and then slide the HDD out and away from the plastic mounting bracket to remove it.
7.
Recycle the old hard drive. Follow the disposal instructions provided with the replacement documentation.
8.
Unpack the replacement HP High-Performance Secure Hard Disk.
9.
Install the replacement hard drive by sliding it into the plastic mounting bracket on the formatter.
10. Close the two release tabs, and connect the two connectors from the HDD to the formatter. 11. Reinstall the formatter into the product. Align the formatter with the guides at the top and bottom of the formatter cage and push the formatter into the slot until it is fully seated. 12. Tighten the thumbscrews to secure the formatter. 13. Reconnect all cables that were connected to the formatter. 14. Reconnect the power cable, and the turn on the product. 15. Reinstall the product firmware. Memory DIMM The memory DIMM is a mandatory CSR part. NOTE: The HP Color LaserJet M855 and the HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 use DIMMs of different capacities, but the procedures for replacing the DIMMs are identical.
ENWW
1.
Turn off the product.
2.
Disconnect the power cable.
3.
Disconnect all cables attached to the formatter.
Customer self-repair parts 105
HP Confidential
4.
Unscrew the two formatter thumbscrews, grasp them, and then pull the formatter out of the product.
5.
Place the formatter assembly on a flat surface with the PCA and components facing up.
6.
Locate the DIMM, and then release the two clips on either side by gently pulling them away from each other.
7.
Rotate the DIMM upward, and then remove it.
8.
Recycle the old DIMM and remove the new DIMM from the packaging.
9.
With the chips on the DIMM facing up, insert the DIMM into the holder, pins first, and then press the DIMM down until it clicks into place.
10. Insert the formatter into the product, and then gently push it until it is fully seated. 11. Tighten the thumbscrews. 12. Reconnect all cables to the formatter. 13. Reconnect the power cord, and then turn on the product. 3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) tray assembly The process for replacing the left and right trays is identical, except that the components are on opposite sides. Only the right tray assembly is shown. 1.
Open the right tray, and remove any paper in the tray, if necessary.
2.
Lower the tray release lever, located in the lower right-rear corner of the tray. Lower the tray, if necessary.
3.
Pull the tray out of the HCI. Support the rear of the tray while removing it.
4.
Recycle the old tray.
5.
Remove the new tray from the packaging, and remove any packing material, if necessary.
6.
Align the rails of the tray with the guides in the HCI, and insert the tray into the product.
7.
Close the tray. The tray release lever will raise to the locked position when the tray is fully closed.
Tray 3 and 4 (HCI) rollers The Tray 3 and 4 pickup rollers are mandatory CSR parts. NOTE: Only the smooth pickup rollers get replaced. The knurled separation roller does not get replaced. CAUTION: Do not touch the surface of the replacement rollers. Skin oils deposited on the rollers might cause paper pickup problems. 1.
Remove Tray 3 or Tray 4.
2.
Locate the rollers inside the tray cavity.
3.
Pinch the tab on the end of the upper smooth roller, and then remove the roller. Repeat the process for the lower smooth roller.
4.
Recycle the old rollers and remove the new rollers from their package.
106 Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
5.
Slide a smooth roller onto the lower shaft. Make certain the roller clicks into place. Repeat the process for the roller on the upper shaft.
6.
Reinstall the tray.
HP Color LaserJet M855 CSR parts Solid-State Memory (SSM) The solid-state memory (SSM) is used in place of a hard drive on certain bundles of the HP Color LaserJet M855. The SSM is an optional CSR part because product firmware must be reinstalled when the SSM is replaced. CAUTION: Make sure to have a copy of the current firmware on a USB flash drive before proceeding. The firmware must be installed when a new hard drive is installed. The formatter and components on it are electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD). Perform the following steps in an ESD-protected workstation or take other precautions to avoid discharging static electricity. 1.
Turn off the product, and disconnect the power cable.
2.
Disconnect all cables and accessories attached to the formatter.
3.
Loosen the two thumbscrews on the formatter and pull the formatter out of the product.
4.
Lay the formatter down on a flat, clean surface.
5.
Disconnect two connectors. CAUTION: Be careful. The PCA terminal end of the black connector can be easily damaged and separated from the PCA if you pull too hard when disconnecting the connector. You might want to use a small flat blade screw driver to separate the wire harness connector end from the PCA terminal end to avoid dislodging it from the PCA.
6.
Release two tabs, and then slide the SSM out and away from the plastic mounting bracket to remove it.
7.
Recycle the old SSM. Follow the disposal instructions provided with the replacement documentation.
8.
Unpack the replacement SSM.
9.
Align the connectors, and then slide the replacement SSM into the plastic mounting bracket.
10. Close two tabs to secure the replacement SSM, and then connect two connectors. 11. Reinstall the formatter into the product. Align the formatter with the guides at the top and bottom of the formatter cage and push the formatter into the slot until it is fully seated. 12. Tighten the thumbscrews to secure the formatter. 13. Reconnect all cables that were connected to the formatter. 14. Reconnect the power cable, and then turn on the product. 15. Reinstall the product firmware. Control Panel Assembly The control-panel assembly is a mandatory CSR part.
ENWW
Customer self-repair parts 107
HP Confidential
There are no individually-replaceable parts on the control-panel assembly. Replace the entire control-panel assembly if the touchscreen or any other component fails. Make sure to remove any peripherals in the HIP and reinstall them in the replacement control-panel assembly. 1.
Turn off the product.
2.
Tilt the control panel display up to reveal the access cover.
3.
Release the tab on the cover and remove the cover.
4.
Release the locking latch by sliding the lever counter-clockwise.
5.
Rotate the back of the control panel assembly up and away from the product.
6.
Lift the control-panel assembly up and off of the product to gain access to the cable connections underneath. Do not pull on the cables.
7.
Use a screwdriver to remove the screw and remove the ground wire, then disconnect the two USB cables and the control panel connector.
8.
Remove the control-panel assembly.
9.
Recycle the defective control-panel assembly, and unpack the replacement assembly.
10. Reconnect the two USB cables. Make sure to check the label on the control-panel assembly to connect the cables to the proper connectors. 11. Connect the control-panel cable into place, and then attach the ground wire. 12. Place the front edge of the control-panel assembly into the product, and then fit the control-panel assembly into place. Make sure that no cables are in the way. 13. Lock the control-panel assembly into place by sliding the latch clockwise. The latch should engage easily. 14. Place the back edge of the cover in the slots, and then press down on the front edge until it clicks into place. If it does not click into place easily, remove the cover and make certain that the latch is in the fully-engaged position. 15. Turn on the product.
HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 CSR Parts Control Panel Assembly 1.
Turn off the product.
2.
Disconnect the power cord.
3.
Disconnect the cables attached to the formatter.
4.
Tilt the control panel display forward all the way to reveal the access cover.
5.
Release the tab, and then remove the access cover.
6.
Slide the keyboard halfway out of the product.
7.
Disconnect the two connectors.
108 Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
8.
Remove the knurled screw. TIP: Use the edge of a coin to loosen the screw. CAUTION: Be careful when removing the screw. Make sure that the screw does not fall through the slot in the back of the control panel.
9.
Open the hinged latch to release the keyboard cable, and then disconnect the flat cable. CAUTION:
Do not dislodge the latch from the connector when opening the latch.
10. Slide the control panel toward to the right. NOTE: It might be necessary to tap on the base of the control-panel assembly with the palm of your hand. 11. Pull the control panel away from the product to remove it. 12. Lay the control-panel assembly face-up on a flat surface, and then tilt the screen down. 13. Slide the keyboard tray all of the way out of the control panel until it stops. 14. Turn the control panel face down. 15. Release and hold the two tabs while sliding the keyboard tray away from the control panel to remove it. NOTE: Set this part aside. It will be installed on the replacement control panel. 16. Recycle the defective control-panel assembly, and remove the new assembly from the package. 17. Place the replacement control panel face-down and note the location of the keyboard-filler cover 18. Slide the cover away from the control panel to remove it. 19. Recycle the cover. 20. Bring the keyboard tray removed from the previous control panel to the replacement control panel. 21. Turn the keyboard tray upside down, and then position the flat cable inside the tray cavity. Align the edges of the tray with the slots in the replacement control panel. 22. Slide the keyboard tray all the way into the control panel. 23. Turn the control panel face-up. 24. Tilt the screen up. 25. Release one tab, and then remove the access cover from the replacement control-panel assembly. 26. Open the hinged latch, and then position the flat cable in the connector CAUTION:
Be careful. Do not dislodge the latch from the connector when opening it.
27. Carefully close the latch to lock the flat cable. CAUTION:
ENWW
Be careful. Do not dislodge the latch from the connector when closing it.
Customer self-repair parts 109
HP Confidential
28. Pull slightly on the flat cable to verify that it is securely fastened in the connector. CAUTION: Be careful. Do not use your full force to pull on the flat cable. A slight pull on the flat cable is sufficient to verify that it is securely fastened. 29. Position the control panel at the front of the product. Insert the cables through the opening at the back of the control panel. 30. Insert the sheet metal tabs on the control panel assembly into the slots on the product chassis. 31. Firmly slide the control panel to the left until it is fully seated. NOTE: hand.
It might be necessary to tap on the base of the control-panel assembly with the palm of your
32. Slide the keyboard about halfway out of the product. 33. Connect the two cables. CAUTION: To avoid damaging the black USB cable, make sure that the USB symbol on the connector at the end of the cable is facing up before installing it in the control panel. 34. Install the screw. TIP: Use the edge of a coin to tighten the screw. 35. Replace the access cover. 36. Re-attach any cables and accessories that were removed from the formatter. 37. Reconnect the power cable, and then turn on the product. 38. Check to make sure that the keyboard functions correctly. If it does not, turn off the product, and then make sure that the flat cable is installed correctly in the connector. Keyboard 1.
Turn off the product.
2.
Disconnect the power cord.
3.
Disconnect the cables attached to the formatter.
4.
Tilt the control panel display forward all the way to reveal the access cover.
5.
Release the tab, and then remove the access cover.
6.
Slide the keyboard halfway out of the control-panel assembly.
7.
Disconnect the two cables.
8.
Remove the knurled screw. TIP: Use the edge of a coin to loosen the screw.
9.
Open the hinged latch to release the keyboard cable, and then disconnect the flat cable.
110 Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
10. Slide the control panel to the right. NOTE: It might be necessary to tap on the base of the control-panel assembly with the palm of your hand. 11. Pull the control panel away from the product to remove it. 12. Lay the control-panel assembly face-down on a flat surface, and then tilt the screen down. 13. Slide the keyboard tray all of the way out of the control panel until it stops. 14. Turn the control panel face down. 15. Release and hold the two tabs while sliding the keyboard tray away from the control panel to remove it. NOTE: Set this part aside. It will be installed on the replacement control panel. 16. Recycle the defective keyboard, and remove the replacement keyboard from the package. 17. Turn the replacement keyboard tray upside down, and then position the flat cable inside the tray cavity. Align the edges of the tray with the slots in the control panel. 18. Slide the keyboard tray all the way into the control panel. 19. Turn the control panel face-up. 20. Tilt the screen up. 21. Open the hinged latch, and then position the flat cable in the connector CAUTION:
Be careful. Do not dislodge the latch from the connector when opening it.
22. Carefully close the latch to lock the flat cable. CAUTION:
Be careful. Do not dislodge the latch from the connector when closing it.
23. Pull slightly on the flat cable to verify that it is securely fastened in the connector. CAUTION: Be careful. Do not use your full force to pull on the flat cable. A slight pull on the flat cable is sufficient to verify that it is securely fastened. 24. Position the control panel at the front of the product. Insert the cables through the opening at the back of the control panel. 25. Insert the sheet metal tabs on the control panel assembly into the slots on the product chassis. 26. Firmly slide the control panel to the left until it is fully seated. NOTE: It might be necessary to tap on the base of the control-panel assembly with the palm of your hand. 27. Slide the keyboard about halfway out of the product. 28. Connect the two cables. CAUTION: To avoid damaging the black USB cable, make sure that the USB symbol ( ) on the connector at the end of the cable is facing up before installing it in the control panel.
ENWW
Customer self-repair parts 111
HP Confidential
29. Install the screw. TIP: Use the edge of a coin to tighten the screw. 30. Replace the access cover. 31. Re-attach any cables and accessories that were removed from the formatter. 32. Reconnect the power cable, and then turn on the product. 33. Check to make sure that the keyboard functions correctly. If it does not, turn off the product, and then make sure that the flat cable is installed correctly in the connector. Keyboard Overlay The HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 comes with either a US English or UK English keyboard, depending on which country/region the product is shipped to. Keyboard overlays convert the keyboard to different languages and layouts. The overlays consist of decals that are applied to the top of the existing keys on the keyboard. A keyboard overlay can be applied during initial setup or when a keyboard is replaced. 1.
Turn off the product, and disconnect the power cable.
2.
Slide out the keyboard.
3.
Remove the overlay from the package.
4.
Place the overlay on a flat, clean surface with the paper backing facing up.
5.
Carefully peel off the largest piece of paper backing, making sure that none of the overlay decals are attached to the paper backing. It is best to pull the backing slowly across the overlay, not up. NOTE: Three pieces of paper backing will remain on the overlay. Do not touch the adhesive on the overlay.
6.
Pick up the overlay, turn it over, carefully align the decals with the keys using the keys at the upper corners guides, and then gently place the overlay on the keyboard. Do not press the overlays onto the keys yet.
7.
Carefully inspect the overlay to make sure it aligns with all of the keys. The top edge of the overlay should align with the blank keys at the top of the keyboard, the four keyboard-locking tabs should be visible through the four clear areas at the top of the overlay, and all of the characters should align with the keys. Adjust the overlay if necessary, and then gently touch the overlay to lightly adhere it to the keys.
8.
Support the keyboard tray, firmly push down on the left side of the transfer-sheet, and then work across the rest of the sheet to adhere the adhesive-backed overlays to the keyboard keys. CAUTION: The keyboard must be supported from below to avoid damage while pushing down on the transfer sheet.
9.
Grasp the overlay by the right-hand edge and slowly peel it back at a sharp angle, making sure that the decals are adhered to the keys. NOTE: Stop peeling back the transfer sheet if any of the adhesive-backed overlays fails to adhere to the keys. Support the underside of the keyboard and then firmly slide your hand along the top of the transfer sheet again.
112 Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
TIP: Keep the transfer sheet close to the keyboard as you pull it off to avoid accidently removing any of the adhesive-backed overlays. 10. Make sure that no overlays remain on the transfer sheet, then properly dispose of or recycle the transfer sheet. 11. Inspect the keyboard to make sure that the overlays are firmly in place. Press down on individual keys, if necessary. 12. Slide the keyboard back into place, and then reconnect the power cable. 13. Turn the product on. Remember to change the display and keyboard language, if necessary. Fax Card CAUTION: The formatter and components on it are electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD). Perform the following steps in an ESD-protected workstation or take other precautions to avoid discharging static electricity. 1.
Turn off the product, and disconnect the power cable.
2.
Disconnect all cables and accessories attached to the formatter.
3.
Loosen the two thumbscrews on the formatter and pull the formatter out of the product.
4.
Lay the formatter down on a flat, clean surface.
5.
Rotate the connector end (away from the phone port) of the fax card up and away from the formatter to release it.
6.
Carefully remove the fax card from the formatter bracket.
7.
Recycle the old fax card. Follow the disposal instructions provided with the replacement documentation.
8.
Unpack the replacement fax card.
9.
Position the fax card in place, aligning the connectors.
10. Rotate the connector end of the fax card down toward the formatter to connect it. Gently press on the fax card to seat it. 11. Reinstall the formatter into the product. Align the formatter with the guides at the top and bottom of the formatter cage and push the formatter into the slot until it is fully seated. 12. Tighten the thumbscrews to secure the formatter. 13. Reconnect all cables that were connected to the formatter. 14. Reconnect the power cable, and then turn on the product. Document Feeder pickup and feed roller assembly
ENWW
1.
Open the document-feeder door and locate the pickup-and-feed-roller assembly.
2.
Locate the access-cover-release tab to the left of the roller assembly.
3.
Press down on the tab to release the access cover, and then open the access cover.
4.
Grasp the document-feeder roller, slide it to the left, and then lift it up and out of the product.
Customer self-repair parts 113
HP Confidential
5.
Recycle the document-feeder roller, and then remove the replacement roller from the packaging. CAUTION: Do not touch the roller surface of the new roller. Skin oils on the rollers might cause paper pickup problems.
6.
Install the replacement roller. The roller assembly is keyed. Position the hex-shaped fitting on the shaft toward the rear of the product.
7.
Close the access cover. There will be two audible clicks. Make certain that the cover is fully closed. TIP: When the roller is reinstalled, the access door must be fully closed. When you close the door, you should hear two audible clicks. If, after replacing the roller document feeder, a document feeder jam message appears on the control panel display, make sure that the access door is fully closed.
8.
Close the document-feeder cover. Gently press down on it until it clicks.
Document feeder separation pad 1.
Open the document-feeder door.
2.
Locate the access cover, release one tab, and then gently pull open the access cover. The separation pad is spring-loaded and partially releases when the access cover is opened.
3.
Grasp the sides of the separation pad, and then lift the separation pad up and away from the product. CAUTION:
4.
The spring is not captive. Securely reinstall the spring if it becomes dislodged.
Recycle the separation pad, and then remove the replacement separation pad from the packaging. CAUTION: Do not touch the pad surface of the new separation. Skin oils on the pad might cause paper pickup problems.
5.
Grasp the replacement separation pad by the larger pins, with the smaller pins facing the access door.
6.
Pull the access door open, and then align the pins on the separation pad with the mounting slots.
7.
Carefully press down on the separation pad to compress the spring.
8.
Continue to press down on the separation pad, and then release the access cover.
9.
Verify that the separation pad is correctly installed and that the access door is fully closed.
10. Close the document-feeder cover. Gently press down on it until it clicks. Document feeder separation pad spring 1.
Open the document-feeder door.
2.
Locate the access cover, and then gently pull open the access cover. The separation pad is springloaded and partially releases when the access cover is opened.
3.
Grasp the sides of the separation pad, and then lift the separation pad up and away from the product.
4.
Remove the defective spring.
5.
Recycle the defective spring, and then remove the replacement spring from the packaging.
114 Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
6.
Install the replacement spring on the pedestal behind the separation pad access door. NOTE: Push the spring down to make sure that it is fully seated on the pedestal.
7.
Grasp the separation pad by the larger pins, with the smaller pins facing the access door.
8.
Pull the access door open, and then align the pins on the separation pad with the mounting slots.
9.
Carefully press down on the separation pad to compress the spring, and then release the access cover. CAUTION:
Make sure spring does not get bent when reinstalling the separation pad.
10. Verify that the separation pad is correctly installed, and that the access door is fully closed. 11. Close the document-feeder cover. Gently press down on it until it clicks. White Backing 1.
Open the document feeder.
2.
Carefully remove the white backing from the underside of the document feeder.
3.
Inspect the underside of the document feeder and remove any rubber stoppers that might still be attached to the document feeder.
4.
Recycle the white backing, and then remove the replacement white backing from the packaging.
5.
Position the replacement white backing on the scanner glass. Make sure that the arrow on the replacement is positioned in the upper-left corner of the scanner glass.
6.
Carefully remove the protective backing from the rubber stoppers. CAUTION:
Do not touch the exposed adhesive.
7.
Check to make sure the white backing is still aligned properly.
8.
Completely close the document feeder.
9.
Firmly push down on the four corners of the document feeder to adhere the white backing to the document feeder.
10. Carefully open the document feeder. 11. Firmly press on the white backing to make sure that the rubber stoppers are completely adhered to the document feeder. 12. Close the document feeder. Background Selector for Backside Scanning
ENWW
1.
Open the document-feeder cover.
2.
Raise the document-feeder input tray. The tray will stay in the upright position.
3.
Locate the two tabs on the ends of the background selector.
4.
Press the two tabs toward each other and pull the background selector out of the document feeder.
Customer self-repair parts 115
HP Confidential
5.
Recycle the background selector, and remove the replacement selector from the packaging. CAUTION: Do not touch the surface of the roller. Skin oils deposited on the roller might cause print quality problems.
6.
Place the replacement background selector on the document-feeder output tray with the rollers facing up.
7.
Slide the background selector into the document feeder until it clicks into place.
8.
Lower the document-feeder input tray.
9.
Close the document-feeder cover. Gently press down on it until it clicks.
116 Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
Supplies Supplies overview The products use different toner cartridges, but share common imaging drums. The procedures for replacing supplies are identical for both products.
Toner cartridge information HP Color LaserJet M855 Description
Self-replacement options
Part Number
HP 826A Black LaserJet Toner Cartridge
Mandatory
CF310A
HP 826A Cyan LaserJet Toner Cartridge
Mandatory
CF311A
HP 826A Yellow LaserJet Toner Cartridge
Mandatory
CF312A
HP 826A Magenta LaserJet Toner Cartridge
Mandatory
CF313A
Description
Self-replacement options
Part Number
HP 827A Black LaserJet Toner Cartridge
Mandatory
CF300A
HP 827A Cyan LaserJet Toner Cartridge
Mandatory
CF301A
HP 827A Yellow LaserJet Toner Cartridge
Mandatory
CF302A
HP 827A Magenta LaserJet Toner Cartridge
Mandatory
CF303A
HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880
Replace a toner cartridge The product uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each color: black (K), cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y). The product also has four imaging drums that are separate from the toner cartridges. The toner cartridges are above the imaging drums. The toner cartridges and imaging drums are inside the front door. A toner cartridge and its associated imaging drum are replaced independently of each other. The procedure for replacing a cartridge is the same for each color.
ENWW
1.
Open the front door.
2.
Grasp the handle of the used toner cartridge and pull out to remove it.
3.
Remove the new toner cartridge from its protective bag.
4.
Hold both sides of the toner cartridge and shake it up and down 5-6 times.
5.
Align the toner cartridge with its slot, and then insert the toner cartridge into the product.
6.
Close the front door.
Supplies 117
HP Confidential
Imaging drums The HP Color LaserJet M855 and HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 use the same imaging drums. Description
Self-replacement options
Part Number
HP 828A Black LaserJet Drum (Shared)
Mandatory
CF358A
HP 828A Cyan LaserJet Drum (Shared)
Mandatory
CF359A
HP 828A Yellow LaserJet Drum (Shared)
Mandatory
CF364A
HP 828A Magenta LaserJet Drum (Shared)
Mandatory
CF365A
Replace an imaging drum The product uses four colors and has a different imaging drum for each color: black (K), cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y). The imaging drums are located below the toner cartridges, inside the front door. A toner cartridge and its associated imaging drum are replaced independently of each other. The procedure for replacing an imaging drum is the same for each color. 1.
Open the front door.
2.
Grasp the handle of the used imaging drum and pull out to remove it. Grasp the blue handle on the top of the imaging drum to support it.
3.
Remove the new imaging drum from its protective bag.
4.
Align the imaging drum with its slot, and then insert the imaging drum into the product. The protective cover on the bottom of the drum automatically slides off as the imaging drum is inserted. Recycle this cover with the used imaging drum.
5.
Close the front door.
Staple cartridge refill 1.
Open the front door of the output accessory.
2.
Locate the existing staple cartridge. It is toward the top of the device.
3.
Grasp the colored handle of the installed cartridge, lift up, and then pull the cartridge out.
4.
Recycle the expired staple cartridge, and remove the new cartridge from the packaging.
5.
Grasp the replacement staple cartridge by the handle, insert it into the cartridge bay. and then press down on the handle until the staple cartridge clicks into place.
6.
Close the front door. NOTE: A Staple cartridge 1 very low message displays on the control panel if the staple cartridge is not seated correctly.
200-Staple Cartridge Kit (2-pack) for Booklet Maker
118 Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
1.
Open the booklet maker front door.
2.
Locate the saddle-stapler assembly. The stapler assembly has a colored handle, and is located about halfway down in the center of the booklet maker.
3.
Grasp the handle and pull the stapler assembly straight out until it stops.
4.
Locate the staple-cartridge carrier on the left side of the stapler. Pull the handle straight out, and then rotate the carrier clockwise until it locks into place, parallel to the floor.
5.
Grasp the existing staple cartridge by the tabs at the rear of the cartridge and pull straight up to remove the cartridge. Repeat for the second cartridge. NOTE: Replace both cartridges at the same time.
6.
Recycle the empty staple cartridges, and remove the two new cartridges from the packaging.
7.
Remove and recycle the staple retainer from the new cartridges.
8.
Hold the new cartridge by the two tabs, and, with the tabs to the right side, insert the cartridge straight down into the carrier until it snaps into place. Repeat the process for the second cartridge.
9.
Pull the staple-cartridge carrier straight out to release the spring-loaded catch, and then rotate the carrier down until it locks into place.
10. Push the saddle-stapler assembly in until it stops. 11. Close the front door. NOTE: A Staple cartridge 2 and 3 very low message displays if one or more of the staple cartridges is not fully seated. A Lower stapler out of position message displays if the stapler is not correctly inserted.
ENWW
Supplies 119
HP Confidential
Accessories Accessories overview The following accessories are available for the products, depending on country/region. This section also includes procedures for replacing accessories. Description
Part Number
1x500–sheet feeder (available in Europe, the Middle East, Africa, and Asia-Pacific Countries/Regions, HP Color LaserJet M855 only)
C2H56A
HP LaserJet 3x500 Sheet Feeder Stand
C1N63A
HP LaserJet 1x3500 Sheet Feeder
C1N64A
HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker
AZW80A
HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker with 2/4 hole punch (available in Europe, the Middle East, Africa, and Asia-Pacific Countries/Regions)
AZW82A
HP LaserJet Booklet Maker/Finisher (available in Europe, the Middle East, Africa, and Asia-Pacific Countries/Regions)
A2W83A
HP LaserJet Booklet Maker/Finisher with 2/3 hole punch (available in North America and Latin America)
A2W84A
HP LaserJet Booklet Maker/Finisher with 2/4 hole punch (available in Europe, the Middle East, Africa, and Asia-Pacific Countries/Regions)
CZ999A
HP Jetdirect ew2500 Wireless Print Server (a USB wireless print server that connects to the formatter)
J8026A
HP Jetdirect 2800w NFC & Wireless Direct Accessory (supports Touch to Print, Touch to Authenticate, and Direct Wireless Printing)
J8029A
Replace an output accessory NOTE: The Stapler/stacker with hole punch is shown. The process is the same for all output accessories. 1.
Turn off the product.
2.
Disconnect the interface cable from the output accessory to the interface port on the product.
3.
Press the button to release the output accessory, and then slide it away from the product.
4.
See the return shipping or recycling information that is included in the replacement accessory box.
5.
Unpack the replacement output accessory. Remove and recycle all packing material from the output accessory, including the output bins and the area behind the front door.
6.
Roll the finishing accessory next to the left (output) side of the print engine.
7.
Gently roll the accessory up to the print engine, making certain that the connectors align.
8.
Check the alignment of the finishing accessory with the print engine. The gap between the two should be the same at the top and bottom of the devices.
120 Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
9.
Use the leveling adjusters on the lower-left corners of the finishing accessory to adjust the alignment between the output accessory and the product. Check and adjust the alignment for both the front and back of the product. Turn the leveling adjuster counter-clockwise (toward the front of the product) to raise the left side of the finishing accessory. This will decrease the gap at the top of the product and increase the gap at the bottom. Turn the adjuster in the opposite direction to lower the left side.
10. Connect the interface cable from the output accessory to the interface port on the product. 11. Turn on the product.
Replace an input accessory The steps to replace an input accessory are the same for all the input accessories for both products. The 3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) feeder is shown here. CAUTION: The print engine is very heavy and must be picked to remove or install the HCI. HP recommends that four people lift the print engine. 1.
Unpack the new HCI and remove all tape and packing material from the outside of the product.
2.
Open all doors and paper trays, and remove all tape and packing material from inside the HCI.
3.
Turn off the product.
4.
Disconnect the power cable.
5.
Disconnect all cables attached to the formatter.
6.
Remove the output accessory, if installed. Disconnect the interface cable from the back of the product. Press the button to release the output accessory, and then slide it away from the product.
7.
Open the paper tray, slide the locking lever to the left to unlock the HCI from the product, and then close the paper tray.
8.
Position the replacement HCI in front of the product with enough clear area for four people around it.
9.
With a total of four people using the handles on the lower edge of the product, lift the product straight up and away from the HCI, and place the product on the new HCI. Make sure that the four pins on the HCI align with the holes on the bottom of the product.
10. Return or recycle the defective HCI. See the return shipping or recycling information that is included in the replacement accessory box. 11. Open the paper trays, then slide the locking lever to the right to lock the HCI on the product. 12. Adjust the paper guides to either A4 or Letter using the adjustment levers at the front of each tray, load paper into the trays, and then close the paper trays. 13. With the product in the proper installation location, reconnect the output accessory, if applicable. 14. Gently roll the accessory up to the print engine, making certain that the connectors align. 15. Connect the interface cable from the finishing accessory to the interface port on the product.
ENWW
Accessories 121
HP Confidential
16. Reconnect the power cable and all cables that were connected to the formatter. 17. Turn on the product.
Replace the HP Jetdirect 2800w NFC & Wireless Direct Accessory 1.
Turn off the product.
2.
Remove the defective 2800w accessory. Use a thin, flat-blade screwdriver along one of the short edges to gently pry off the accessory.
3.
Lift up the accessory and disconnect the cable from the USB connector in the HIP recess.
4.
Unpack the replacement HP Jetdirect 2800w, and recycle the original accessory.
5.
Attach the plastic power connector of the cable into the corresponding receptacle on the underside of the HP Jetdirect 2800w with the contacts facing down.
6.
Attach the metal ground connector of the cable to the grounding tab on the underside of the HP Jetdirect 2800w.
7.
Insert the HP Jetdirect 2800w into the HIP recess using the hook-shaped clips first.
8.
Gently push the HP Jetdirect 2800W onto the rounded clips so that it is held securely in place within the recess.
9.
Turn on the product.
10. The HP Jetdirect 2800W will light up to confirm the installation is correct. A wireless network icon will also appear on the control panel.
122 Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
Maintenance and clearing jams Maintenance and jam-clearing overview This section covers some maintenance and jam-clearing procedures that customers can perform. Additional procedures are in the product User Guides.
Maintenance Clean the scanner and white backing (M880) Specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and white plastic backing over time, which can affect copy and scan quality. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner. 1.
Turn off the product.
2.
Disconnect the power cable.
3.
Open the scanner lid.
4.
Clean the scanner glass, the document feeder strips, and the white plastic backing with a soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner. CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride on any part of the product; these can damage the product. Do not place liquids directly on the glass or platen. They might seep and damage the product.
5.
Dry the glass and white plastic parts with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.
6.
Close the scanner lid.
7.
Connect the power cable, and then turn on the product.
Clean the document feeder pickup rollers and separation pad (M880) Clean the document feeder pickup rollers and separation pad if the document feeder does not correctly pick up pages. 1.
Lift the document-feeder latch.
2.
Open the document-feeder cover.
3.
Remove any visible lint or dust from each of the feed rollers and the separation pad using compressed air or a clean lint-free cloth moistened with warm water. NOTE: Lift up the roller assembly so you can clean the second roller.
4.
Close the document-feeder cover.
Clearing jams Clearing jams overview This section covers clearing jammed paper from the locations in the product where paper is most likely to jam in the paper path.
ENWW
Maintenance and clearing jams 123
HP Confidential
Auto-navigation for clearing jams The auto-navigation feature assists you in clearing jams by providing step-by-step instructions on the control panel. When you complete a step, the product displays instructions for the next step until you have completed all steps in the procedure. ●
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855
●
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 Clear jams in Tray 1, the right door, and the fuser Clear jams in Tray 1, the right door, and the fuser by opening the right door of the product. Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations inside the right door. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam. 1.
Open the right door.
2.
If paper is jammed in Tray 1, gently pull the paper from the bottom of the right door.
3.
Check for paper in the duplex-printing path inside the right door. If paper is near the top of the duplexprinting path, gently pull it out to remove it.
4.
Lift the jam-access cover at the bottom of the duplex printing path, and remove any jammed paper.
5.
Lift the green handle on the transfer-access panel and open the panel.
6.
Gently pull out any jammed paper.
7.
Close the transfer-access panel.
8.
If paper is jammed in the fuser, lift the jam-access cover on top of the fuser, and gently pull out the paper. WARNING! The fuser can be hot while the product is in use.
9.
Close the right door.
Clear jams in Tray 2 Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 2. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam. 1.
Open the right door.
2.
Lift the green handle on the transfer-access panel and open the panel.
3.
Gently pull out any jammed paper.
4.
Close the transfer-access panel.
5.
Close the right door.
6.
Pull the tray completely out of the product by pulling and lifting it up slightly.
7.
Remove any jammed or damaged sheets of paper.
124 Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
8.
Remove any paper from the feed rollers inside the product.
9.
Reinsert and close the tray.
Clear jams in the output bin If a finishing accessory is not attached to the product and paper is visible from the output bin, grasp the leading edge and remove it using both hands to avoid tearing the paper. If most of the sheet is still not visible in the output bin, open the right door on the product to access and remove the jammed paper. Output-accessory bridge The output-accessory bridge is installed on products with an optional finishing accessory. The outputaccessory bridge transfers paper from the output slot near the control panel, across the top of the product, and into the finishing accessory. Use the following procedure to clear jams in this area.
ENWW
1.
Lift the latch on the top cover of the output-accessory bridge and open the top cover.
2.
Gently pull the jammed paper to remove it.
Maintenance and clearing jams 125
HP Confidential
3.
Close the top cover of the output-accessory bridge.
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 Clear jams in Tray 1, the right door, and the fuser Clear jams in Tray 1, the right door, and the fuser by opening the right door of the product. Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations inside the right door. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam. 1.
Open the right door.
2.
If paper is jammed in Tray 1, gently pull the paper from the bottom of the right door.
3.
Check for paper in the duplex-printing path inside the right door. If paper is near the top of the duplexprinting path, gently pull it out to remove it.
4.
Lift the jam-access cover at the bottom of the duplex printing path, and remove any jammed paper.
5.
Lift the green handle on the transfer-access panel and open the panel.
6.
Gently pull out any jammed paper.
7.
Close the transfer-access panel.
8.
If paper is jammed in the fuser, lift the jam-access cover on top of the fuser, and gently pull out the paper. WARNING! The fuser can be hot while the product is in use.
9.
Close the right door.
Clear jams in Tray 2 Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 2. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam. 1.
Open the right door.
2.
Lift the green handle on the transfer-access panel and open the panel.
3.
Gently pull out any jammed paper.
4.
Close the transfer-access panel.
126 Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
5.
Close the right door.
6.
Pull the tray completely out of the product by pulling and lifting it up slightly.
7.
Remove any jammed or damaged sheets of paper.
8.
Remove any paper from the feed rollers inside the product.
9.
Reinsert and close the tray.
Clear jams in the output bin If a finishing accessory is not attached to the product and paper is visible from the output bin, grasp the leading edge and remove it using both hands to avoid tearing the paper. If most of the sheet is still not visible in the output bin, open the right door on the product to access and remove the jammed paper. Clear jams in the output-accessory bridge The output-accessory bridge is installed on products with an optional finishing accessory. The outputaccessory bridge transfers paper from the output slot near the control panel, across the top of the product, and into the finishing accessory. Use the following procedure to clear jams in this area.
ENWW
1.
Lift the latch on the top cover of the output-accessory bridge and open the top cover.
2.
Gently pull the jammed paper to remove it.
Maintenance and clearing jams 127
HP Confidential
3.
Close the top cover of the output-accessory bridge.
Clear jams in the document feeder Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the document feeder. When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam. 1.
Lift the latch to release the document-feeder cover.
2.
Open the document-feeder cover.
128 Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
3.
Lift the jam-access door, and remove any jammed paper. If necessary, rotate the green wheel at the front of the document feeder to remove jammed paper.
ENWW
4.
Press on the door next to the document-feeder rollers to make sure it is closed completely.
5.
Lift the document feeder input tray.
Maintenance and clearing jams 129
HP Confidential
6.
Squeeze inward on the two slots at each end of the backside-background selector assembly.
7.
Remove the backside-background selector assembly by pulling it out.
8.
Remove any jammed paper.
130 Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
9.
Reinstall the backside-background selector assembly by sliding it in until it locks into place.
10. Lower the document-feeder input tray.
11. Close the document-feeder cover.
ENWW
Maintenance and clearing jams 131
HP Confidential
132 Chapter 4 Use and maintain
ENWW
HP Confidential
5
ENWW
Support
●
Student performance objectives
●
Troubleshooting overview
●
Software
●
Firmware
●
Theory of operation
●
Troubleshooting
133
HP Confidential
Student performance objectives By the completion of this module, students should be able to: ●
Identify the available support and troubleshooting resources.
●
Describe the available drivers and identify differences.
●
Troubleshoot print driver compatibility issues.
●
Understand minimum HP FutureSmart firmware requirements.
●
Understand HP FutureSmart upgrade and downgrade options.
●
Access the pre-boot menu on both the HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 and HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 products.
●
Understand the basic theory of operation for the major product components.
●
Troubleshoot the major product components.
●
Understand how to conduct diagnostic tests on the output accessories.
134 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Troubleshooting overview This module highlights common issues and describes overall troubleshooting and diagnostic procedures. Additional resources include: ●
Product Service Manuals
●
The following product-specific support sites:
●
◦
HP Color LaserJet M855 — www.hp.com/support/colorljM855
◦
HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 — www.hp.com/support/colorljflowMFPM880
www.hp.com/support Select the appropriate country/region, select Troubleshooting, and then enter the product number for guided troubleshooting, videos, and additional information. The content on www.hp.com/support is available to customers.
●
Grow@HP Search Grow@HP for:
ENWW
◦
Additional resources for both products.
◦
NFC training material.
◦
HP ePrint training material.
◦
Information about additional related products and features.
Troubleshooting overview 135
HP Confidential
Software Software troubleshooting overview There are three primary Windows print drivers available for both products: ●
Discrete print driver
●
HP Universal Print Driver (UPD)
●
Windows in-OS print driver
The discrete driver is included on the In-Box CD and is available on the product support Web site. Both products require HP UPD version 5.7 or greater. Earlier version of the UPD do not support the output accessories or other advanced features. Download the latest version at www.hp.com/go/upd. The Windows in-OS print drivers are included as part of the Windows OS. The print drivers have limited functionality. HP suggests that customers install either the discrete print driver or the UPD to use the advanced features of the product. Most Windows 8 applications that are started from a Windows Start Screen tile use the in-OS print driver. Download the latest version of the in-OS print driver using Windows Update. NOTE: Windows tablets, phones, and other devices that use ARM processors us in-OS drivers. The discrete print driver and UPD are compatible with the HP Driver Deployment Utility (DDU) and the HP Driver Preconfiguration Utility. Download both utilities and additional resources at www.hp.com/go/dcu. Select the appropriate operating system from the list, and then download the HP Printer Administrator Resource Kit (PARK). Macintosh print drivers and utilities are on the In-Box CD and on the product support Web site. Customers using Macintosh computers that do not have a CD/DVD drive can download the software from the product support site. See the Tour the product module of this course for more information about supported print drivers and operating systems, including mobile printing options.
Troubleshooting The products require either the product-specific print driver (Windows and Mac OS) or version 5.7 or greater of the HP UPD. Earlier versions of the UPD do not recognize installed output accessories. Check to make sure the proper print driver is installed if the product cannot use an output accessory. Standard troubleshooting procedures apply if the proper print driver is installed. See the product Service Manual or the product support site for additional troubleshooting procedures. To check the installed print driver: 1.
On the computer, open the Devices and Printers control panel.
2.
Right-click the product icon, and then select Printer Properties. The properties window opens.
3.
Click the Advanced tab.
4.
Verify that the print driver is displayed in the Driver area.
136 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
ENWW
5.
If the installed print driver is not correct, select the correct print driver from the drop-down menu or click New Driver... to install the new printer driver.
6.
If necessary, install the print driver from the In-Box CD, or download the print driver from the product support site or www.hp.com/go/upd.
Software 137
HP Confidential
Firmware Firmware overview The products are shipped with FutureSmart3. Service packs for each version are released to address issues and implement minor enhancements. New features or changes to the user interface are introduced in new versions of FutureSmart firmware. Customers can elect to stay on the released version of FutureSmart and install service packs or upgrade to new versions of FutureSmart as they are released. Firmware cannot be downgraded below the version of FutureSmart that the products were released with. Firmware-upgrade procedures for the HP Color LaserJet M855 and HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 are the same as with other FutureSmart products. See the prerequisite course HP FutureSmart Firmware Training for more information.
Access the Pre-boot menu Although the control panels differ, the procedure for accessing the Pre-boot menu is the same for both products. To access the Pre-boot menu on the HP Color LaserJet M855 and HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880: 1.
Turn on the product.
2.
The HP logo appears on the screen while the touchscreen boots.
3.
The first HP logo is replaced by another HP logo that appears in the middle of the screen.
4.
Touch the HP logo in the middle of the screen 1/8 under the logo. NOTE: The 1/8 counter will only be displayed for one second. Touch the logo as soon as it appears or the product will continue the boot process.
5.
The Pre-boot menu appears on the screen.
6.
Touch the up and down arrows to navigate to the desired menu item, and then touch the OK button to select the item.
7.
Change the desired setting or select the desired option, and then navigate to the Pre-boot Home menu by touching the Back arrow or the Home button.
8.
Highlight Continue, and then touch the OK button to exit the Pre-boot menu and boot the product.
138 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Theory of operation Theory of operation overview This section of the course provides an overview of the overall theory of operation of the products. Systems and processes that are similar to other HP LaserJet products are not included in the course. See the product Service Manual or the prerequisite LaserJet Fundamentals and HP FutureSmart training courses on Grow@HP for more information. This topic is comprised of the following sections: ●
Service-level walkaround
●
Basic operation
●
Formatter-control system
●
Engine-control system
●
Laser/scanner system
●
Image-formation system
●
Scanning/image capture system (M880 only)
●
Pickup, feed, and delivery system
●
Input accessories
●
Output accessories
See the product Service Manual for additional information.
ENWW
Theory of operation 139
HP Confidential
Service-level walkaround Document feeder and scanner assemblies (M880) Figure 5-1 Document feeder and scanner assemblies (M880)
Table 5-1 Document feeder and scanner assemblies (M880) Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Kit, ADF whole unit, A3 (includes white backing kit) (M880)
A2W75-67907
1
2
Kit, scanner whole unit (includes white backing kit) (M880)
A2W75-67908
1
3
Cover, control panel access (M880)
5042-9118
1
4
Kit, control panel (without keyboard) (M880)
5851-5952
1
5
Cover, HIP (M880)
5851-5361
1
6
Cover, USB (M880)
5851-5136
1
Not shown
Kit, white backing, A3 (M880)
5851-5864
1
Not shown
Kit, ADF Mylar, A3 (M930)
5851-5857
1
140 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Document feeder assemblies (M880) Figure 5-2 Document feeder assemblies (1 of 2, M880)
Table 5-2 Document feeder assemblies (1 of 2, M880)
ENWW
Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Cover, front ADF (M880)
A8T68-40064
1
2
Cover, rear, left ADF (M880)
A8T68-40067
1
3
Cover, rear, right ADF (M880)
A8T68-40066
1
4
Assembly, ADF hinge (M880)
A8T68-60025
2
5
Cable, power, integrated scan assembly (M880)
CF367-60106
1
6
Cage, back, SCB cover (M880)
CF367-00018
1
7
Cover, back, scanner (M880)
A2W75-40001
1
Theory of operation 141
HP Confidential
Figure 5-3 Document feeder assemblies (2 of 2, M880)
Table 5-3 Document feeder assemblies (2 of 2, M880) Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Cover, ADF roller (M880)
A8T68-40072
1
2
Kit, ADF roller (M880)
C1P70-67901
1
3
Kit, ADF separation pad spring (M880)
5851-5855
1
4
Kit, background selector for backside scan (M880)
5851-5861
1
142 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Scanner assemblies Figure 5-4 Scanner assemblies
Table 5-4 Scanner assemblies
ENWW
Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Cover, left, scanner (M880)
A2W75-40003
1
2
Cover, front, scanner (M880)
A2W75-40002
1
3
Cover, right, scanner (M880)
A2W75-40004
1
4
Assembly, glass, flatbed
CF367-60105
1
Theory of operation 143
HP Confidential
Covers Figure 5-5 Covers (M855)
144 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-5 Covers (M855)
ENWW
Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Cover, right lower
RC3-3692-000CN
1
2
Cover, rear left
RC3-3713-000CN
1
3
Cover, fuser fan
RC3-3714-000CN
1
4
Cover, front upper
RC3-3718-000CN
1
5
Cover, rear right
RC3-3711-000CN
1
6
Cover, rear right upper
RC3-3712-000CN
1
7
Cover, rear upper B
RC3-5964-000CN
1
8
Cover, face down drive
RC3-5991-000CN
1
9
Cap, rear right
RC4-1386-000CN
1
10
Assembly, face down end tray
RM1-9631-000CN
2
11
Assembly, switch back cover
RM1-9633-000CN
1
12
Assembly, left front cover
RM2-0294-000CN
1
13
Assembly, top cover
RM2-0295-000CN
1
15
Cover, rear
RC4-1378-000CN
1
16
Assembly, switch back tray
RM2-5023-000CN
1
17
Assembly, left cover
RM2-5049-000CN
1
18
Cover, right upper
RC3-3722-000CN
1
19
Cover, HW integration pocket
RC3-3758-000CN
1
20
Cover, pocket base
RC3-3762-000CN
1
21
Cover, rear upper, upper
RC3-5290-000CN
1
22
Cover, right upper, rear
RC3-5952-000CN
1
Theory of operation 145
HP Confidential
Figure 5-6 Covers (M880)
Table 5-6 Covers (M880) Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Cover, right lower
RC3-3692-000CN
1
146 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-6 Covers (M880) (continued)
ENWW
Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
2
Cover, rear left
RC3-3713-000CN
1
3
Cover, fuser fan
RC3-3714-000CN
1
4
Cover, front upper
RC3-3718-000CN
1
5
Cover, rear right
RC3-3711-000CN
1
6
Cover, rear right upper
RC3-3712-000CN
1
7
Cover, rear upper B
RC3-5964-000CN
1
8
Cover, face down drive
RC3-5991-000CN
1
9
Cap rear right
RC4-1386-000CN
1
10
Assembly, face down end tray
RM1-9631-000CN
1
11
Assembly, switch back cover
RM1-9633-000CN
1
12
Assembly, left front cover
RM2-0294-000CN
1
13
Assembly, top cover
RM2-0295-000CN
1
15
Cover, rear
RC4-1378-000CN
1
16
Assembly, switch back tray
RM2-5023-000CN
1
17
Assembly, left cover
RM2-5049-000CN
1
18
Cover, rear upper side
RC3-3719-000CN
1
19
Cover, rear upper front
RC3-5288-000CN
1
20
Cover, rear upper rear
RC3-5289-000CN
1
21
Cover, rear uppper MFP
RC3-5960-000CN
1
22
Cover, right upper front MFP
RC3-5965-000CN
1
23
Cover, right upper rear MFP
RC4-1291-000CN
1
Theory of operation 147
HP Confidential
Right door assembly Figure 5-7 Right door assembly
Table 5-7 Right door assembly Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Cover, MP blanking
RC3-5984-000CN
1
2
Assembly, right door Sub
RM1-9640-000CN
1
3
Brush, cleaning
RB1-9617-000CN
1
148 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-7 Right door assembly (continued)
ENWW
Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
4
Assembly, MP tray
RM1-9642-000CN
1
5
Assembly, MP paper pick up
RM1-9644-000CN
1
8
Assembly, duplexing feed (M855)
RM2-5045-000CN
1
8
Assembly, duplexing feed (M880)
RM1-9646-000CN
1
Theory of operation 149
HP Confidential
Internal components Internal components (1 of 6) Figure 5-8 Internal components (1 of 6)
Table 5-8 Internal components Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Assembly, HVPS Trans B PCA
RM2-7002-000CN
1
2
IC Photo Interrupter
WG8-5935-000CN
4
150 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Internal components (2 of 6) Figure 5-9 Internal components (2 of 6)
Table 5-9 Internal components (2 of 6)
ENWW
Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Humidity sensor unit
RK2-4811-000CN
1
2
FFC, laser
RK2-4839-000CN
1
3
FFC, laser
RK2-4841-000CN
1
Theory of operation 151
HP Confidential Table 5-9 Internal components (2 of 6) (continued) Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
4
Assembly, fan
RM1-3364-000CN
1
5
Assembly, photo sensor
RM1-9629-000CN
1
6
Assembly, face down paper delivery
RM1-9841-000CN
1
7
Assembly, MP drive
RM1-9843-000CN
1
8
Assembly, duplex reverse
RM2-0291-000CN
1
9
Assembly, scanner
RM2-5176-000CN
2
10
Thermistor unit
RK2-1363-000CN
1
152 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Internal components (3 of 6) Figure 5-10 Internal components (3 of 6)
Table 5-10 Internal components (3 of 6)
ENWW
Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Cover, internal right
RC3-3533-000CN
1
2
Assembly, ITB alienation drive
RM1-3280-000CN
1
5
Assembly, registration 2nd transfer
RM1-9621-000CN
1
6
Fan (FM9, FM10)
RK2-1378-000CN
2
7
Assembly, shutter gear holder
RM1-9857-000CN
1
Theory of operation 153
HP Confidential Table 5-10 Internal components (3 of 6) (continued) Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
8
Assembly, interlock switch (SW101, SW102)
RM2-7025-000CN
1
9
Assembly, CPR sensor
RM2-7026-000CN
1
10
Assembly, door open switch (SW101, SW102, SW14)
RM2-7035-000CN
1
154 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Internal components (4 of 6) Figure 5-11 Internal components (4 of 6)
Table 5-11 Internal components (4 of 6)
ENWW
Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Fan (FM1)
RK2-1322-000CN
1
2
Fan (FM2, FM3, FM4)
RK2-1378-000CN
3
Theory of operation 155
HP Confidential Table 5-11 Internal components (4 of 6) (continued) Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
3
Fan (FM8)
RK2-1382-000CN
1
4
Motor, stepping DC (M21, M22)
RK2-4814-000CN
2
5
Cable, toner tag
RK2-4845-000CN
1
6
Assembly, DC motor (M10, M11)
RM1-4519-000CN
2
7
Assembly, fuser drive
RM1-9606-000CN
1
10
Assembly, drum motor (M13, M13, M14, M15)
RM1-9614-000CN
4
12
Assembly, toner tag PCA
RM2-7009-000CN
1
13
Cover, air duct
RC3-5990-000CN
1
14
IC photo interrupter
WG8-5935-000CN
1
156 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Internal assemblies (5 of 6) Figure 5-12 Internal assemblies (5 of 6)
ENWW
Theory of operation 157
HP Confidential Table 5-12 Internal assemblies (5 of 6) Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Fan (FM7)
RK2-1378-000CN
1
2
Cover, Front Inner lower
RL1-3637-000CN
1
3
Assembly, low voltage power supply
RL1-4003-000CN
1
4
Assembly, cassette paper pick up
RM1-9599-000CN
1
7
Assembly, MP Guide
RM1-9615-000CN
1
8
Assembly, lifter drive (M855)
RM1-3222-000CN
1
8
Assembly, lifter drive (M880)
RM1-3222-020CN
1
9
Cassette, tray 2 (1x500 engine)
RM2-5014-000CN
1
10
Assembly, main switch PCA
RM2-5046-000CN
1
12
IC, Photo Interrupter
WG8-5935-000CN
1
13
Assembly, upper front inner cover (M855)
RM2-0313-000CN
1
13
Assembly, upper front inner cover (M880)
RM2-5034-000CN
1
158 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Internal components (6 of 6) Figure 5-13 Internal components (6 of 6)
Table 5-13 Internal components (6 of 6)
ENWW
Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Cable, video interface (M855)
RK2-4843-000CN
1
1
Cable, video interface (M880)
WG8-5935-000CN
1
Theory of operation 159
HP Confidential Table 5-13 Internal components (6 of 6) (continued) Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
2
Assembly, fuser power supply
RL1-4005-000CN
1
3
Assembly, high voltage power supply tran. A PCA
RM2-7001-000CN
1
4
Assembly, DC controller PCA (M855)
RM2-7005-000CN
1
4
Assembly, DC controller PCA (M880)
RM2-7006-000CN
1
5
Cartridge interface kit
RM2-5053-000CN
2
6
Assembly, inter connect board (ICB) (M855)
RM2-0296-000CN
1
6
Assembly, inter connect board (ICB) (M880)
RM2-5035-000CN
1
7
Cable, USB AB
RK2-4804-000CN
1
8
Cable, USB, BB
RK2-4806-000CN
1
160 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
1x500-sheet feeder 1x500-sheet feeder covers Figure 5-14 1x500-sheet feeder covers
Table 5-14 1x500-sheet feeder covers
ENWW
Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Cover, right lower
RC3-5875-000CN
1
2
Cover, right front
RC3-5920-000CN
1
Theory of operation 161
HP Confidential Table 5-14 1x500-sheet feeder covers (continued) Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
3
Cover, right rear
RC3-5881-000CN
1
4
Cover, front upper face (3x500)
RC3-5884-000CN
1
5
Cover, front upper face left (3x500)
RC3-5885-000CN
1
6
Cover, front upper
RC3-5886-000CN
1
7
Cover, rear (3x500)
RC3-5887-000CN
1
8
Cover, left
RC3-5913-000CN
1
9
Assembly, right door (1x500)
RM2-0280-000CN
1
10
Assembly, stock box (1x500)
RM2-0282-000CN
1
11
Assembly, stock box cover (1x500)
RM2-0283-000CN
1
162 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
1x500–sheet feeder components Figure 5-15 1x500-sheet feeder components
Table 5-15 1x500-sheet feeder components
ENWW
Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Stepping Motor DC (M3302, M3304) (HCI)
RK2-1331-000CN
1
2
Assembly, auto close (HCI)
RM1-8880-000CN
2
Theory of operation 163
HP Confidential Table 5-15 1x500-sheet feeder components (continued) Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
3
Assembly, cassette
RM2-0273-000
1
4
Assembly, paper pick-up
RM2-0275-000
1
7
Assembly, controller PCB
RM2-0715-000
1
A24
Connector, drawer
VS1-7257-012CN
1
3x500-sheet feeder 3x500-sheet feeder covers Figure 5-16 3x500-sheet feeder covers
Table 5-16 3x500-sheet feeder covers Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Cover, right lower
RC3-5875-000CN
1
2
Cover, right front (3x500)
RC3-5878-000CN
1
164 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-16 3x500-sheet feeder covers (continued)
ENWW
Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
3
Cover, right rear
RC3-5881-000CN
1
4
Cover, front upper face
RC3-5884-000CN
1
5
Cover, front upper face left
RC3-5885-000CN
1
6
Cover, Front Upper
RC3-5886-000CN
1
7
Cover, rear
RC3-5887-000CN
1
8
Cover, left
RC3-5913-000CN
1
9
Assembly, right door
RM2-0280-000CN
1
Theory of operation 165
HP Confidential
3x500-sheet feeder components Figure 5-17 3x500-sheet feeder components
Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Motor, stepping (M112, M122, M132)
RK2-1331-000CN
3
166 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
2
Assembly, auto close
RM1-3531-060CN
3
3
Assembly, cassette
RM2-0273-000CN
2
4
Assembly, paper pick up
RM2-0275-000CN
3
7
Assembly, controller PCA
RM2-0716-000CN
1
8
Assembly, Cassette (3x500)
RM2-0276-000CN
1
9
Switch, button (SW113) (3x500)
WC2-5512-000CN
1
A24
Connector, drawer
VS1-7257-012CN
1
Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
3
Cover, rear (HCI)
RC3-5896-000CN
1
5
Assembly, right door (HCI)
RM2-0256-000CN
1
High capacity input (HCI) feeder Figure 5-18 HCI covers
Table 5-17 HCI covers
ENWW
Theory of operation 167
HP Confidential
Figure 5-19 HCI internal components (1 of 2)
Table 5-18 HCI internal components (1 of 2) Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Assy, controller PCA (HCI)
RM2-0717-000CN
1
2
Stepping Motor DC (M3302, M3304) (HCI)
RK2-1331-000CN
1
3
Switch, button (SW3301) (HCI)
WC2-5512-000CN
1
4
Assembly, lifter drive (M3302, M3303) (HCI)
RM1-8879-000CN
1
5
Assembly, auto close (HCI)
RM1-8880-000CN
1
168 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-18 HCI internal components (1 of 2) (continued) Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
6
Assembly, paper remnant detect (HCI)
RM1-9579-000CN
1
7
Assembly, paper pick up drive (HCI)
RM1-8872-000CN
1
A11
Plate, Drawer
RL1-4000-000CN
1
A22
Connector, drawer
VS1-7257-012CN
1
Figure 5-20 HCI internal components (2 of 2)
ENWW
Theory of operation 169
HP Confidential Table 5-19 HCI internal components (2 of 2) Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
3
Assembly, crossing paper feed (HCI)
RM2-0270-000CN
1
4
Assembly, paper pick up, left (HCI)
RM1-8876-000CN
1
7
Assembly, paper pick up, right (HCI)
RM1-8869-000CN
1
170 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Stapler stacker/booklet maker Stapler stacker covers Figure 5-21 Stapler stacker covers
Table 5-20 Stapler stacker covers
ENWW
Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Cover, stepped Lower (stapler/ stacker)
RC4-2447-000CN
1
2
Cover, stepped, upper
RC4-2448-000CN
1
3
Cover, open/close, stepped
RC4-2449-000CN
1
Theory of operation 171
HP Confidential Table 5-20 Stapler stacker covers (continued) Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
4
Guide, wall, upper
RC4-2455-000CN
1
5
Cover, tray cable
RC4-2462-000CN
1
6
Cover, foot front (stapler/ steacker)
RC4-2475-000CN
1
7
Cover, latch, lower
RC4-2477-000CN
2
8
Cover, foot, rear
RC4-2484-000CN
1
9
Cover, punch front lower (punch)
RC4-2476-000CN
1
10
Cover, punch front (punch)
RC4-2478-000CN
1
11
Cover, punch rear (punch)
RC4-2482-000CN
1
12
Assembly, height wall, lower (SS)
RM2-5313-000CN
1
13
Assembly, front cover
RM2-5320-000CN
1
14
Assembly, rear cover
RM2-5321-000CN
1
15
Assembly, upper cover
RM2-5322-000CN
1
17
Assembly, latch (punch)
RM2-5352-000CN
1
17
Assembly, latch
RM2-5319-000CN
1
18
Assembly, punch upper cover
RM2-5336-000CN
1
172 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Booklet maker covers Figure 5-22 Booklet maker covers
Table 5-21 Booklet maker covers
ENWW
Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Cover, stepped lower (booklet maker)
RC4-2447-000CN
1
6
Cover, front (booklet maker)
RC4-2475-000CN
1
12
Assembly, height wall center (BM)
RM2-5315-000CN
1
16
Assembly, stack wall upper
RM2-5343-000CN
1
Theory of operation 173
HP Confidential Table 5-21 Booklet maker covers (continued) Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
19
Guide, left lower (booklet maker)
RC4-2467-000CN
1
20
Cover, saddle delivery inner (booklet maker)
RC4-2471-000CN
1
21
Assembly, saddle tray (booklet maker)
RM2-5318-000CN
1
174 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Finisher main body (1 of 3) Figure 5-23 Finisher main body (1 of 3)
Table 5-22 Finisher main body (1 of 3)
ENWW
Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Staple assembly
4G3-0938-000CN
1
2
Stack upper tray assembly
RM2-5324-000CN
1
3
Stack lower tray assembly
RM2-5339-000CN
1
Theory of operation 175
HP Confidential Table 5-22 Finisher main body (1 of 3) (continued) Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
4
Cable, staple connecting
4G3-1777-000CN
1
5
Staple sub assembly
4G3-0939-000CN
1
Finisher main body (2 of 3) Figure 5-24 Finisher main body (2 of 3)
Table 5-23 Finisher main body (2 of 3) Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Assembly, upper cover lock
4G3-0210-000CN
1
176 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-23 Finisher main body (2 of 3) (continued)
ENWW
Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
2
Assembly, entrance sensor bracket
FM2-0717-000CN
1
3
Assembly, entrance sensor flag
FM2-0718-000CN
1
4
Assembly, upper crossmember
FM0-1882-000CN
1
5
Assembly, entrance upper guide (booklet maker)
FM0-1887-000CN
1
6
Assembly, paper feed motor
FM0-1889-000CN
1
7
Photo interrupter tlp1242
WG8-5593-000CN
1
8
Assembly, operation tray
RM2-5309-000CN
1
9
Flag, paper sensing sensor
FC5-5004-000CN
1
10
Assembly, swing, HP sensor
4G3-1564-000CN
1
11
Assembly, assist sensor
FM2-1396-000CN
1
12
Assembly, adjust guide HP sensor
FM2-1393-000CN
2
Theory of operation 177
HP Confidential
Finisher main body (3 of 3) Figure 5-25 Finisher main body (3 of 3)
Table 5-24 Finisher main body (3 of 3) Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Assembly, stack ejection motor
4G3-0769-000CN
1
2
Assembly, paper face sensor
4G3-0934-000CN
1
3
Assembly, main controller PCB
RM2-7582-000CN
1
4
Clutch, electromagnetic
4H3-0370-000CN
1
5
Assembly, return roller
FM0-2403-000CN
1
178 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-24 Finisher main body (3 of 3) (continued)
ENWW
Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
6
Paper detect holder assembly, up
FM0-2429-000CN
1
7
Assembly, pressure roller
FM2-0730-000CN
1
8
Assembly, shutter HP sensor
FM2-1401-000CN
1
9
Assembly, press motor
FM2-1409-000CN
1
10
Assembly, sensor/switch
FM2-1417-000CN
1
11
Assembly, swing guide
RM2-5307-000CN
1
12
Assembly, interface cable
RM2-5521-000CN
1
Theory of operation 179
HP Confidential
Stapler/stacker finisher main body Figure 5-26 Stapler/stacker finisher main body
Table 5-25 Stapler/stacker finisher main body Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Cover, inner lower
RC4-2474-000CN
1
2
Assembly, inner cover upper
RM2-5305-000CN
1
3
Assembly, paper pass (SS)
RM2-5334-000CN
1
4
Assembly, saddle motor (M113) (SS)
FM2-0737-000CN
2
180 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-25 Stapler/stacker finisher main body (continued)
ENWW
Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
5
Assembly, common driver PCA
RM2-7590-000CN
1
6
Assembly, punch hole (punch)
RM2-5355-000CN
1
7
Box, dust
4F3-1396-000CN
1
8
Assembly, punch controller PCA (punch)
RM2-7592-000CN
1
Theory of operation 181
HP Confidential
Booklet maker finisher main body Figure 5-27 Booklet maker finisher main body
Table 5-26 Booklet maker finisher main body Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Assembly, inner cover lower
RM2-5304-000CN
1
3
Assembly, saddle paper feed
RM2-5351-000CN
1
4
Assembly, saddle motor (M113)
FM2-0737-000CN
2
6
Assembly, 2/3 punch hole
RM2-5354-000CN
1
182 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-26 Booklet maker finisher main body (continued) Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
9
Assembly, punch inner cover
RM2-5337-000CN
1
10
Knob
FB3-7881-000CN
1
Quantity
Booklet maker saddle assembly Figure 5-28 Booklet maker saddle assembly (1 of 3)
Table 5-27 Booklet maker saddle assembly (1 of 3)
ENWW
Callout
Description
Part number
2
Assembly, guide motor
4G3-0725-000CN
3
Assembly, saddle feed motor
4G3-1933.000CN
Theory of operation 183
HP Confidential Table 5-27 Booklet maker saddle assembly (1 of 3) (continued) Callout
Description
Part number
6
Assembly, motor mount
FM0-1686-000CN
8
Assembly, guide sensor
FM6-2283-000CN
9
Assembly, saddle paper delivery
RM2-5332-000CN
10
Assembly, upper delivery guide
RM2-5349-000CN
Quantity
Figure 5-29 Booklet maker saddle assembly (2 of 3)
184 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-28 Booklet maker saddle assembly (2 of 3) Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Assembly, inner side plate
4G3-0671-000CN
1
4
Assembly, saddle guide
4G3-1940-000CN
1
11
Assembly, delivery switch mount
RM2-5633-000CN
1
Figure 5-30 Booklet maker saddle assembly (3 of 3)
ENWW
Theory of operation 185
HP Confidential Table 5-29 Booklet maker saddle assembly (3 of 3) Callout
Description
Part number
Quantity
5
Assembly, saddle stapler
4G3-2721-000CN
1
7
Assembly, rear end sensor
FM2-0763-000CN
1
12
Assembly, saddle controller PCB
RM2-7586-000CN
1
Basic operation The product routes all high-level process through the formatter, which stores font information, processes the print image, and communicates with the host computer. The basic product operation comprises the following systems: ●
The engine-control system, which includes the DC controller printed circuit assembly (PCA), the lowvoltage and high-voltage power supplies, and the fuser control
●
The laser/scanner system, which forms the latent image on the photosensitive drum
●
The image-formation system, which transfers a toner image onto the paper
●
The paper feed system, which uses a system of rollers and belts to transport the paper through the product
●
Accessories
Figure 5-31 Relationship between the main product systems
186 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Sequence of operation The DC controller in the engine-control system controls the operational sequences of the product. The following table describes durations and operations for each period of a print operation from the time the product is turned on until the motor stops rotating. Normal sequence of operation NOTE: The following sequence of operation applies tot he engine portion of the product. Name
Timing
Purpose
Waiting
From the time the power is turned on or when the product exits Sleep mode until the product is ready for printing
●
Pressurizes the fuser pressure roller
●
Detects the toner cartridges and imaging drums
●
Detects the home position for the intermediate-transfer belt (ITB) and the developing unit
●
Cleans waste toner from the ITB
●
The product is in the ready state
●
Await print reservation command (await INTR sequence)
●
The product enters Sleep mode after the specified length of time
●
The product calibrates if it is time for an automatic calibration
●
Activates the high-voltage power supply
●
Prepares each laser/scanner unit
●
Warms the fuser to the appropriate temperature
●
Forms the image on the photosensitive drums
●
Transfers the toner to the paper
●
Fuses the toner image onto the paper
●
Performs calibration after a specified number of pages
●
Moves the last printed sheet into the output bin
●
Stops each laser/scanner unit
●
Discharges the bias from the high voltage power supply
Standby
Initial rotation
Printing
Last rotation
From the end of the waiting sequence or the last rotation until the formatter receives a print command or until the product is turned off
From the time the formatter receives a print command until the paper enters the paper path
From the time the first sheet of paper enters the paper path until the last sheet has passed through the fuser
From the time the last sheet of paper exits the fuser until the motors stop rotating
Formatter-control system The formatter performs the following functions:
ENWW
●
Controls sleep mode
●
Receiving and processing print data from various product interfaces
●
Monitoring control panel functions and relaying product status information (through the control panel and the network or bidirectional interface)
●
Developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the DC controller PCA
Theory of operation 187
HP Confidential
●
Storing font information
●
Communicating with the host computer through the network or bidirectional interface
The formatter receives a print job from the network or bidirectional interface and separates it into image information and instructions that control the printing process. The DC controller PCA synchronizes the image formation system with the paper input and output systems, and then signals the formatter to send the print image data.
Formatter hardware The formatter system includes the following components. Component
Function
Microprocessor
Stores fonts and microprocessor control programs.
RAM
Stores printing and font information and temporarily stores print-image data before it is sent to the print engine. RAM data is lost when the product is turned off. NOTE: Upgrading RAM improves graphic-intense printing operations, but does not increase the I/O buffer space or the printing speed.
NVRAM
Stores configuration information. NVRAM is saved with the product is turned off.
USB
Sends and receives data through USB type B interface connector (connected to the host computer).
Hard disk drive (HDD)
The firmware is contained in the HDD or SSD. A remote firmware upgrade process is used to overwrite and upgrade the firmware on the HDD or SSM.
Solid state module (SSM)
NOTE:
The SSM is for the M855dn model only.
Real time clock
This clock is used for the Wake-up time feature. It includes a battery to supply power when the product is turned off.
HP Jetdirect Inside (JDI)
JDI is an Ethernet interface that is part of the formatter.
Sleep mode NOTE: In the General Settings menu (a submenu of the Administration menu), this item is termed Sleep Timer Settings. This feature conserves power after the product has been idle for an adjustable period of time. When the product is in Sleep Mode, the control-panel backlight is turned off, but the product retains all settings, downloaded fonts, and macros. The default setting is for Sleep Mode to be enabled, and the product enters Sleep Mode after a 30-minute idle time. The product exits Sleep Mode and enters the warm-up cycle when any of the following events occur: ●
A print job, valid data, or a PML or PJL command is received
●
A control-panel button is pressed
●
A cover is opened
●
A paper tray is opened
●
The engine-test switch is pressed
188 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
NOTE: Product error messages override the Sleep message. The product enters Sleep Mode at the appropriate time, but the error message continues to appear. TIP: When the product is in Sleep Mode, the sub power supply is off and the low-voltage power supply is on. The scanner can not be used when the product is in Sleep Mode. Input/output The product has three I/O interfaces: ●
Hi-Speed USB 2.0
●
10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection with IPv4 and IPv6
●
Easy-access USB printing (no computer required)
CPU The formatter incorporates an 800 MHz processor. Memory The random access memory (RAM) on the formatter printed circuit assembly (PCA) contains the page, I/O buffers, and the font storage area. It stores printing and font information received from the host system, and can also serve to temporarily store a full page of print-image data before the data is sent to the print engine. NOTE: If the product encounters a problem when managing available memory, a clearable warning message displays on the control-panel display. Firmware The hard disk drive (HDD) or solid state module (SSM) store the firmware. A remote firmware upgrade process is used to overwrite and upgrade the firmware on the HDD or SSM. Nonvolatile memory The product uses nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM) to store device and user configuration settings. The contents of NVRAM are retained when the product is turned off or disconnected. PJL overview The printer job language (PJL) is an integral part of configuration, in addition to the standard printer command language (PCL). With standard cabling, the product can use PJL to perform a variety of functions.
ENWW
●
Two-way communication with the host computer through a network connection or a USB connection. The product can inform the host about the control-panel settings which can be changed from the host.
●
Dynamic I/O switching. The product uses this switching to be configured with a host on each I/O. The product can receive data from more than one I/O simultaneously, until the I/O buffer is full. This can occur even when the product is offline. Context-sensitive switching. The product can automatically recognize the personality (PS or PCL) of each job and configure itself to serve that personality.
●
Isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the next. For example, if a print job is sent to the product in landscape mode, the subsequent print jobs print in landscape mode only if they are formatted for landscape printing.
Theory of operation 189
HP Confidential
PML The printer management language (PML) allows remote configuration and status read-back through the I/O ports.
Control panel The control panel is an 8 inch full color SVGA (800 x 600 LCD) with capacitive touchscreen and adjustable viewing angle. It includes an easy-access USB port for walk-up printing and a hardware integration pocket for third-party USB devices such as card readers. The control panel has a diagnostic mode to allow testing of the touchscreen, Home button, and speaker. The control panel does not require calibration. The M880 model has a QWERTY retractable keyboard beneath the control panel. The keys are mapped to your language in the same way the virtual keyboard on the product control panel is mapped. If you select a different keyboard layout for the virtual keyboard, the keys on the physical keyboard are remapped to match the new settings.
Engine-control system The engine-control system receives commands from the formatter and interacts with the other main systems to coordinate all product functions. It consists of the following components: ●
DC controller
●
Low-voltage power supply
●
High-voltage power supply
●
Fuser control
Figure 5-32 Engine-control system
190 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
DC controller The DC controller provides operational commands to each of the product components, and it interacts with the other engine-control systems and product systems to control the product operational sequence. Figure 5-33 DC controller block diagram
ENWW
Theory of operation 191
HP Confidential Table 5-30 Motors Component type
Abbreviation
Component name
Motor
M1
Scanner motor (Y/M)
M2
Scanner motor (C/K)
M5
Pickup motor
M6
Registration motor
M7
Cassette lifter motor
M10
ITB motor
M11
Fuser motor
M12
Drum motor (Y)
M13
Drum motor (M)
M14
Drum motor (C)
M15
Drum motor (K)
M17
Fuser shutter motor (newly added electrical component)
M18
Developer alienation motor (C/K)
M19
Developer alienation motor (Y/M)
M20
T1 roller alienation motor
M21
Toner-replenishment motor (Y/M)
M22
Toner-replenishment motor (C/K)
M301
Duplex re-pickup motor
M302
Duplex switch back motor
M303
Duplex feed motor
192 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-31 Fans Component type
Abbreviation
Component name
Fan
FM1
Laser scanner fan
FM2
Fuser fan
FM3
Cartridge fan (Y/M) (cartridge fan added)
FM4
Cartridge fan (C/K) (cartridge fan added)
FM5
VOC fan
FM6
Low-voltage power supply fan
FM7
Cartridge front area cooling fan
FM8
Delivery fan
FM9
Fuser edge area cooling fan (rear) (newly added electrical component)
FM10
Fuser edge area cooling fan (front) (newly added electrical component)
FM301
Duplex fan 1
FM302
Duplex fan 2
Component type
Abbreviation
Component name
Solenoid
SL1
Cassette pickup solenoid
SL2
MP tray (Tray 1) pickup solenoid
SL4
Toner-replenishment solenoid (Y)
SL5
Toner-replenishment solenoid (M)
SL6
Toner-replenishment solenoid (C)
SL7
Toner-replenishment solenoid (K)
SL301
Duplex flapper solenoid
Table 5-32 Solenoids
ENWW
Theory of operation 193
HP Confidential Table 5-33 Switches Component type
Abbreviation
Component name
Switch
SW11
Cassette media-width switch
SW12
Cassette trailing edge switch
SW13
Right door open detection switch (newly added electrical component)
SW14
Front door open detection switch (newly added electrical component)
SW17
Main switch
SW101
Interlock switch 1
SW102
Interlock switch 2
Component type
Abbreviation
Component name
Photointerrupter
SR11
Fuser shutter home position sensor (front) (newly added electrical component)
SR12
Fuser shutter home position sensor (rear) (newly added electrical component)
SR13
T2 assembly cover open detection sensor
SR14
Drum home position sensor (K)
SR15
Drum home position sensor (C)
SR16
Drum home position sensor (M)
SR17
Drum home position sensor (Y)
SR18
ITB home position sensor
SR19
Developer home position sensor (Y/M)
SR20
Developer home position sensor (C/K)
SR21
Cassette media-level sensor
SR22
Cassette media-feed sensor
SR24
MP tray (Tray 1) media-feed sensor
SR25
MP tray (Tray 1) media-presence sensor
SR26
MP tray (Tray 1) last-media sensor
SR27
ITB toner collection box full sensor
SR28
Fuser home position sensor
SR29
Loop sensor 1 (loop sensor added)
SR30
Loop sensor 2 (loop sensor added)
SR31
Cassette media-presence sensor
SR32
Cassette media-surface sensor
Table 5-34 Photointerrupters
194 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-34 Photointerrupters (continued) Component type
ENWW
Abbreviation
Component name
SR33
Face-down tray media-full sensor
SR34
Fuser cover open detection sensor
SR35
Fuser delivery sensor 1 (fuser delivery sensor added)
SR36
Media-width sensor 3 (newly added electrical component)
SR37
Media-width sensor 1 (newly added electrical component)
SR38
Media-width sensor 2 (newly added electrical component)
SR39
Toner cartridge presence sensor (K)
SR40
Toner cartridge presence sensor (C)
SR41
Toner cartridge presence sensor (M)
SR42
Toner cartridge presence sensor (Y)
SR43
Toner-replenishment motor rotation sensor (Y/M)
SR44
Toner-replenishment motor rotation sensor (C/K)
SR45
Fuser delivery sensor 2 (fuser delivery sensor added)
SR301
Duplex switch back feed sensor
SR302
Duplex feed sensor
SR303
Color sensor engagement sensor
SR304
Duplex re-pickup sensor
SR2501
TOP sensor
Theory of operation 195
HP Confidential Table 5-35 Sensors Component type
Abbreviation
Component name
Sensor
CN1
Environment sensor
CS
Color sensor
MS
Media sensor
-
CPR/Density sensor (CPR/Density sensor added)
-
ITB seal sensor
SCN-TH1
Laser scanner assembly temperature sensor 1
SCN-TH2
Laser scanner assembly temperature sensor 2
-
Process cartridge toner collection box full sensor (Y)
-
Process cartridge toner collection box full sensor (M)
-
Process cartridge toner collection box full sensor (C)
-
Process cartridge toner collection box full sensor (K)
-
Process cartridge toner-level sensor (Y)
-
Process cartridge toner-level sensor (M)
-
Process cartridge toner-level sensor (C)
-
Process cartridge toner-level sensor (K)
Motors The product has numerous motors for the paper-feed and image-formation. The DC controller can sense failure for several of the motors. When this occurs, the DC controller notifies the formatter so it can halt the printing process and provide an alert on the control panel display. Table 5-36 Motors Abbreviation
Component name
Components driven or motor function
M1
Scanner motor (Y/M)
Laser/scanner
M2
Scanner motor (C/K)
Laser/scanner
M5
Pickup motor
Cassette pickup roller, the cassette feed roller, and the MP tray pickup roller
No
M6
Registration motor
Registration roller
No
M7
Cassette lifter motor
Cassette lifter mechanism
No
M9
Primary-transfer-roller disengagement motor
Engages or disengages the primary transfer roller
No
M10
ITB motor
ITB and the secondary transfer roller
Yes
M11
Fuser motor
Fuser roller, the delivery roller, and the fuser pressure roller
Yes
M12
Drum motor (Y)
Photosensitive drum and the primary charging roller in the yellow imaging drum
Yes
196 Chapter 5 Support
Failure detection
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-36 Motors (continued) Abbreviation
Component name
Components driven or motor function
Failure detection
M13
Drum motor (M)
Photosensitive drum and the primary charging roller in the magenta imaging drum
Yes
M14
Drum motor (C)
Photosensitive drum and the primary charging roller in the cyan imaging drum
Yes
M15
Drum motor (K)
Photosensitive drum and the primary charging roller in the black imaging drum
Yes
M17
Fuser shutter motor (newly added electrical component)
Fuser edge shutter
M18
Developer alienation motor (C/K)
Engages and disengages the developing rollers in the cyanand blackimaging drums
No
M19
Developer alienation motor (Y/M)
Engages and disengages the developing rollers in the yellow- and magenta-imaging drums
No
M20
T1 roller alienation motor
M21
Toner-replenishment motor (Y/M)
M22
Toner-replenishment motor (C/K)
M301
Duplex re-pickup motor
Duplexing paper re-pickup roller and engages or disengages the color sensor
No
M302
Duplex switch back motor
Duplexing paper-reverse roller
No
M303
Duplex feed motor
Duplexing paper-feed roller
No
Fans The product has 12 fans that prevent the temperature from rising in the product and for cooling delivered paper. Table 5-37 Fans
ENWW
Abbreviation
Component name
Area cooled
Type
Speed
Failure detection
FM1
Laser scanner fan
Laser/scanner area and formatter
Intake
Full/half
FM2
Fuser fan
Fuser
Intake
Full/half
FM3
Cartridge fan (Y/M)
Around the cartridge (Y/M)
Exhaust
Full
Yes
FM4
Cartridge fan (C/K)
Around the cartridge (C/K)
Exhaust
Full
Yes
FM5
Low-voltage power supply fan
Low-voltage power supply unit
Exhaust
Full/half
FM6
Cartridge front-area fan
Toner-cartridge and imagingdrum area
Intake
Full/half
FM7
Delivery unit fan
Delivery unit
Intake
Full
Theory of operation 197
HP Confidential Table 5-37 Fans (continued) Abbreviation
Component name
Area cooled
Type
Speed
Failure detection
FM9
Fuser edge area cooling fan (rear) (newly added electrical component)
Around the rear edge of fuser sleeve
Exhaust
Full/half
Yes
FM10
Fuser edge area cooling fan (front) (newly added electrical component)
Around the front edge of fuser sleeve
Exhaust
Full/half
Yes
FM301
Duplex fan 1
Duplexing driver PCA
Intake
Full
FM302
Duplex fan 2
Output bin area
Exhaust
Full/half
Automatic damp paper detection The product automatically detects damp paper. This helps to avoid jams caused by curling damp paper. The DC controller detects damp paper by measuring the resistance value of the transfer roller during a transfer operation. Also, the DC controller records the damp condition of paper that is loaded in the input devices. The DC controller optimizes the fuser temperature control and prevents an occurrence of paper curl when the damp paper is fed through the product.
Low-voltage power supply The low-voltage power supply (LVPS) converts ac power into the DC voltage for the product mechanical assemblies. The following figure shows the system block diagram of the low-voltage power supply.
198 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
The product uses three DC voltages: 24V, 5V, and 3.3V. The following table provides descriptions of these voltages. Figure 5-34 Low-voltage power supply block diagram
Table 5-38 Low-voltage power supply voltages description Main DC voltage
Sub-voltage
Behavior
+24V
+24VA
Supplied constantly Stopped during inactive off, active off or Sleep mode
+24VB
Supplied constantly Stopped during inactive off, active off or Sleep mode Interrupted when the right door open or front door open
ENWW
Theory of operation 199
HP Confidential Table 5-38 Low-voltage power supply voltages description (continued) Main DC voltage
Sub-voltage
Behavior
+5V
+5VA
Supplied constantly Stopped during inactive off, active off or Sleep mode
+5VB
Supplied constantly Stopped during inactive off, active off or Sleep mode Interrupted when the right door open or front door open
+5VR
Supplied constantly
+5VF
Supplied constantly Stopped during inactive off
+3.3V
+3.3VA
Supplied constantly Stopped during inactive off or active off
+3.3VR
Supplied constantly
Over-current/over-voltage protection The low-voltage power supply (LVPS) has a protective circuit against over-current and over-voltage to prevent failures in the power supply circuit. It automatically stops supplying the DC voltage whenever excessive current flows or voltage abnormally increases. If the DC voltage is not being supplied from the LVPS, the protective function might be running. In this case, turn off the power switch and unplug the power cable. Do not turn the power switch on until the problem is identified. The DC controller notifies the formatter of a LVPS failure when the protective function is activated. In addition, the fuser control and the LVPS each have one fuse to protect against over-current. If over-current flows into the ACline, the fuse fails and AC power is stopped. For personal safety, the product interrupts +24VB and +5VB power when the interlock switch is turned off. Accordingly, the dc voltage to the following components is interrupted: ●
Fuser
●
High-voltage power supply
●
Delivery fan
●
Fuser edge area cooling fan (rear)
●
Fuser edge area cooling fan (front)
●
Drum motor
●
ITB motor
●
Fuser motor
●
Developer alienation motor
200 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
●
Pickup motor
●
Registration motor
●
Fuser shutter motor
●
Duplex re-pickup motor
●
Duplex feed motor
●
Duplex switch back motor
●
Laser/BD PCA
WARNING! The remote switch control circuit turns on or off the product power so that the ac power flows even if the power switch is turned off. Unplug the power cord before disassembling the product. WARNING! If you believe the over-current or over-voltage protection circuits have been activated, do not connect the product power cord or turn on the product power until the cause of the failure is found and corrected. Table 5-39 Low-voltage power supply functions Function
Applied
Sleep mode
Yes
Power supply voltage detection
Yes
Automatic power OFF
Yes
Automatic power ON/OFF
N/A
Active OFF
Yes
Inactive OFF
Yes
Network mode
N/A
Power switch illumination
Yes
Low-voltage power supply failure detection
Yes
Power save mode
Yes
Sleep mode operation When the product is in Sleep Mode, the sub power supply is off and the low-voltage power supply is on. The scanner can not be used when the product is in Sleep Mode.
High-voltage power supply The high-voltage power supply (HVPS) applies biases to the following components:
ENWW
●
Primary charging roller
●
Developing roller
●
T1 roller
●
T2 roller
Theory of operation 201
HP Confidential
●
Static charge eliminator
●
Pressure roller
The following figure shows the system block diagram of the high-voltage power supply. NOTE: The primary charging roller and the developing roller are in the cartridge. Figure 5-35 High-voltage power supply block diagram
Circuit
Description
Primary-charging-bias generation
A dc negative bias is applied to the surface of the photosensitive drum in each imaging drum to prepare it for image formation.
Developing-bias generation
A dc negative bias is used to adhere the toner to each photosensitive drum during the image-formation process.
Primary-transfer-bias generation
A dc positive bias is used to transfer the latent toner image from each photosensitive drum onto the ITB.
Secondary-transfer-bias generation
Two dc biases—one positive and one negative—are used to transfer the toner from the ITB onto the paper.
202 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential Circuit
Description
Static-charge-eliminator-bias generation
A dc negative bias is used to reduce the electrical charge on the paper after the secondary-transfer process.
Fuser-roller-bias generation
A dc negative bias is applied to the fuser roller to remove any toner that adheres to the roller after fusing.
Fuser bias The fusing method is changed to the on-demand fusing method. Accordingly, the fuser bias is changed. The fuser bias is dc positive bias for improving the print-quality generated in the fuser bias circuit in the highvoltage power supply.
Fuser-control circuit The fuser heater control circuit controls the fuser temperature according to commands from the DC controller. The product uses on-demand fusing. The fuser-control circuit consists of the following major components: Figure 5-36 Fuser-control circuit
Table 5-40 Fuser components
ENWW
Abbreviation
Component name
Function
H1
Fuser main heater
Heats the edge of the fuser sleeve
H2
Fuser sub heater
Heats the edge of the fuser sleeve
Theory of operation 203
HP Confidential Table 5-40 Fuser components (continued) Abbreviation
Component name
Function
H3
Fuser sub heater
Heats the center area of the fuser sleeve
TH1
Main thermistor
Detects the center temperature of the fuser heater
TH2
Sub thermistor 1
Detects the temperature at one end of the fuser heater
TH3
Sub thermistor 2
TH4
Sub thermistor 3
TP101
Thermoswitch
Prevents an abnormal temperature rise of the fuser heater
Figure 5-37 Fuser system block diagram
Fuser heater protection The fuser heater protective function detects an excessive temperature rise of the fuser and interrupts power supply to the fuser heater. The following four protective components prevent the fuser heater from excessive rising temperature:
204 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
●
DC controller The DC controller monitors the detected temperature of the thermistor. The DC controller releases the triac and relay to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater when it detects an excessive temperature.
●
◦
TH1: 223° C (433° F) or higher
◦
TH2: 195° C (383° F) or higher
◦
TH3: 223° C (433° F) or higher
◦
TH4: 195° C (383° F) or higher
◦
TP1: 240° C (464° F) or higher
◦
TP2: 240° C (464° F) or higher
Fuser-heater safety circuit The fuser heater safety circuit monitors the detected temperature of the thermistor. The fuser heater safety circuit releases the triac and relay to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater when it detects an excessive temperature.
●
◦
TH1: 230° C (446° F) or higher
◦
TH2: 200° C (392° F) or higher
◦
TH3: 230° C (446° F) or higher
◦
TH4: 200° C (392° F) or higher
◦
TP1: 250° C (482° F) or higher
◦
TP2: 250° C (482° F) or higher
Current detection circuit The inlet current detection circuit monitors the current flowing through the fuser control circuit and the fuser current detection circuit monitors the current flowing through the fuser heater. The DC controller deactivates the FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater when the current of the CURRENT DETECTION signal is higher than a specified value.
●
Thermoswitch The contact to the thermoswitch breaks to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater when the temperature of the fuser heater is abnormally high. ◦
TS101: 200° C (392° F) or higher
◦
TS102: 200° C (392° F) or higher
◦
TS103: 200° C (392° F) or higher
NOTE: When the thermoswitches reach this temperature, the actual temperature on the fuser rollers is approximately 370° C (698° F). Table 5-41 Fuser control functions
ENWW
Function
Applied
Fuser temperature control
Yes
Theory of operation 205
HP Confidential Table 5-41 Fuser control functions (continued) Function
Applied
Fuser failure detection
Yes
Frequency detection circuit failure detection
Yes
Fuser depressurization mechanism failure detection
Yes
Fuser type discrepancy detection
Yes
Fuser type identification detection
Yes
Fuser presence detection
Yes
Fuser life detection
Yes
Relay failure detection
Yes
Pressure roller cleaning
Yes
Fuser edge cooling function
Yes
The detective conditions of the fuser failure detection are changed as follows: ●
Abnormal high temperature ◦
Abnormal high temperature 1 The sub thermistor 1 keeps detecting 285°C (545°F) or higher for a specified period.
◦
Abnormal high temperature 2 The sub thermistor 2 keeps detecting 285°C (545°F) or higher for a specified period. The sub thermistor 3 keeps detecting 285°C (545°F) or higher for a specified period.
◦
Abnormal high temperature 3 The main thermistor keeps detecting 210°C (410°F) or higher for a specified period.
●
Abnormal low temperature ◦
Abnormal low temperature 1 The sub thermistor 1 keeps detecting 80°C (176°F) or lower for a specified period during INTR period or PRINT period.
206 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
The sub thermistor 1 keeps detecting 50°C (122°F) or lower for a specified period during STBY period. ◦
Abnormal low temperature 2 The sub thermistor 2 keeps detecting 80°C (176°F) or lower for a specified period during INTR period or PRINT period. The sub thermistor 2 keeps detecting 50°C (122°F) or lower for a specified period during STBY period. The sub thermistor 3 keeps detecting 80°C (176°F) or lower for a specified period during INTR period or PRINT period. The sub thermistor 3 keeps detecting 50°C (122°F) or lower for a specified period during STBY period.
◦
Abnormal low temperature 3 The main thermistor keeps detecting 60°C (140°F) or lower for a specified period during INTR period or PRINT period.
●
Abnormal temperature rise Each thermistor does not detect a specified temperature within a specified period from when the fuser heater is turned on.
●
Drive circuit failure The current flowing through the fuser heater is out of specified power supply range. The current flowing through the low-voltage power supply from the inlet is out of specified current range.
Fuser identification Whenever the product is turned on or when the right door is closed, the DC controller detects whether the fuser is present and whether the fuser is for a 110-volt model or a 220-volt model. Fuser-life detection The fuser is rated to print a certain number of pages. When a new fuser is installed, the DC controller receives a signal and directs the formatter to set the fuser count to zero. As pages are printed, the formatter increments the fuser count. When the page count reaches a certain threshold, the formatter sends a message to the control panel to alert the customer to order a replacment fuser. When the maximum number of pages has printed, the formatter sends a message to the control panel to prompt the customer to replace the fuser.
Laser/scanner system The laser/scanner system forms the latent electrostatic image on the photosensitive drums inside each of the imaging drums. The product has two laser/scanners: one for yellow and magenta and the other for cyan and black. The DC controller receives instructions from the formatter regarding the image of the page to be printed. The DC controller signals the lasers to emit light, and the laser beams pass through lenses and onto the scanner
ENWW
Theory of operation 207
HP Confidential
mirror, which rotates at a constant speed. The mirror reflects the beam onto the photosensitive drum in the pattern required for the image, exposing the surface of the drum so it can receive toner. Figure 5-38 Laser/scanner system
208 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Image-formation system The image-formation system creates the printed image on the paper. It consists of the laser/scanners, toner cartridges, imaging drums, ITB, and fuser. Figure 5-39 Image-formation system
Toner cartridge The product has four toner cartridges, one for each color. Each toner cartridge contains a reservoir of toner and the following components:
ENWW
Theory of operation 209
HP Confidential
●
Toner feed screw
●
Toner stirrer
●
Memory tag
Figure 5-40 Print-cartridge system
The toner feed screw rotates, picks up the toner particles, and transports them into the imaging drum. The toner stirrer rotates at the same time as the toner feed screw to keep the toner particles from sticking to each other. The memory tag is a non-volatile memory chip that stores information about the usage for the toner cartridge. The DC controller notifies the formatter of an error if any of the following conditions exist:
210 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
●
If the memory tag fails to either read to or write from the DC controller
●
If any of the print-cartridge presence sensors do not detect the presence of the toner cartridge
●
If the toner level in any of the toner cartridges drops below a certain level
●
If the toner feed motor is rotating but the rotational-count sensor does not increment the rotation count after a specified length of time. This condition indicates a failure in the toner-feed motor.
Imaging drum The product has four imaging drums, one for each color. Each imaging drum contains the following components:
ENWW
●
Photosensitive drum
●
Primary charging roller
●
Developing roller
●
Toner feed roller
Theory of operation 211
HP Confidential
●
Toner feed screw
●
Waste toner feed screw
Figure 5-41 Imaging-drum system
The drum motor causes the photosensitive drum to rotate. That rotation cause the primary charging roller to rotate. The drum motor also drives the toner feed screw, the toner feed roller, and the developing roller to transfer toner from the toner cartridge into the imaging drum. The toner feed motor drives the waste toner feed screw, which removes the waste toner and transports it to the waste toner container. The memory tag is a non-volatile memory chip that stores information about the usage for the imaging drum.
212 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
The DC controller notifies the formatter of an error if any of the following conditions exist: ●
If the memory tag fails to either read to or write from the DC controller
●
If the toner level in any of the waste toner containers reaches a certain level
●
If any of the drum-presence sensors do not detect the presence of the imaging drum
●
If any of the imaging drums are installed incorrectly.
●
If the number of pages printed with the current imaging drum reaches a predetermined level
●
If the level of toner in the imaging drum is not at a predetermined level while the toner cartridge is feeding toner to the imaging drum. This indicates a toner feed failure.
●
If the toner-level sensor detects a level of toner that is outside of a certain range during the print operation. This indicates a toner-level sensor failure.
Developing roller engagement and disengagement The product can print in full-color mode or in black-only mode. To print in black only, the developing rollers in the cyan, magenta, and yellow imaging drums are disengaged. This maximizes the life of those three imaging drums. Figure 5-42 Developing roller engagement and disengagement control
The DC controller rotates the developing disengagement motor and changes the direction of the cam according to the instructions from the formatter for each print job. When the product is turned on and at the end of each print job, all four of the developing rollers disengage from the photosensitive drums. If the next print job is full-color, then each of the developing rollers engage. If the next print job is black only, then only the black developing roller engages. If the DC controller does not detect any output from the developing home-position sensor, it determines that the developing disengagement motor has failed.
ENWW
Theory of operation 213
HP Confidential
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit The ITB unit accepts the toner images from the photosensitive drums and transfers the completed image to the paper. The ITB unit has these main components: ●
ITB
●
ITB feed roller
●
ITB-driven roller
●
Primary transfer rollers
The ITB motor drives the ITB feed roller, which rotates the ITB. The motion of the ITB causes the primary transfer rollers to rotate. Figure 5-43 ITB unit
Primary-transfer-roller engagement and disengagement Depending on the requirements of the print job, the primary transfer rollers engage with the ITB so it can receive toner from the photosensitive drums. There are three states of roller engagement.
214 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-42 Primary-transfer-roller engagement states All rollers disengaged
This is the home position for the ITB unit.
Black roller engaged
This is the state for a black-only print job.
All rollers engaged
This is the state for a full-color print job.
The primary-transfer-roller disengagement motor rotates or reverses to place the primary-transfer-roller disengagement cam into one of three positions. The cam causes the transfer roller slide plate to move to the right or left, which causes the primary transfer rollers to move up to engage the ITB with the photosensitive drum or down to disengage it. If the DC controller does not receive the expected signal from the ITB home-position sensor during the primary-transfer-roller engagement or disengagement operation, but the primary-transfer-roller
ENWW
Theory of operation 215
HP Confidential
disengagement motor is rotating, it determines that the primary-transfer-disengagement mechanism has failed, and it notifies the formatter. Figure 5-44 Three states of primary-transfer-roller engagement and disengagement
ITB unit detection The DC controller monitors several signals from the ITB unit to detect status. Table 5-43 ITB unit detection ITB unit life detection
When a specified number of pages have been printed since an ITB unit was installed, the DC controller alerts the formatter that the ITB unit is at the end of its life.
ITB unit waste toner full detection
When any of the waste-toner containers collect a specified level of toner, the DC controller alerts the formatter that the imaging drum needs to be replaced.
216 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-43 ITB unit detection (continued) ITB unit presence detection ITB perimeter detection
To ensure that the toner image is placed correctly on each page, the DC controller uses the ITB sensor marks on the surface of the ITB. It adjusts the paper re-pickup timing based on this position.
ITB sensor-mark detection-sensor-failure detection
If the DC controller cannot detect the ITB sensor marks, it determines that the ITB sensor-mark detection-sensor has failed, and it notifies the formatter.
Secondary-transfer-roller unit The secondary-transfer-roller unit transfers the toner image from the ITB surface onto the paper. The ITB motor drives the secondary transfer roller, and the registration motor drives the registration roller. To ensure that the toner image is placed correctly on each page, the DC controller stops the registration motor when the leading edge of the paper passes the vertical synchronous position sensor. It holds the paper in this position until the ITB is in the correct position, according to the ITB perimeter detection, to align the toner image with the paper. When the product is turned on, when it is coming out of Sleep mode, or after a door has been closed, dc bias is applied to the secondary transfer roller. If no current is detected, the DC controller determines that the secondary-transfer-roller unit is not present, and it notifies the formatter.
ENWW
Theory of operation 217
HP Confidential
The DC controller can detect when a new secondary-transfer-roller unit has been installed. After a specified number of pages have been printed since a new secondary-transfer-roller unit has been installed, the DC controller notifies the formatter that the secondary-transfer-roller unit is reaching the end of its life. Figure 5-45 Secondary-transfer-roller unit
218 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Calibration The product calibrates itself to maintain proper print quality. The calibration corrects color-misregistration and color-density variation due to environmental changes or internal variation in the product. The CPR/ Density sensor is added in the center of horizontal scanning direction for more precise correction. Figure 5-46 Calibration mechanism
The product has the following calibration functions. Table 5-44 Calibration functions Function
Applied
CPR correction control
Yes
Environment correction control
Yes
Image density control (DMAX)
Yes
Image halftone control (DHALF)
Yes
Density uniformity with a page adjustment
Yes
Gray axis control (GAS)
N/A
Color measurement on paper (M855 only)
Yes
Color-misregistration contol Internal variations in the imaging drums or the laser/scanners can cause the toner images to become misaligned. The color misregistration control corrects the following problems:
ENWW
●
Horizontal scanning start position
●
Horizontal scanning magnification
●
Vertical scanning start position
Theory of operation 219
HP Confidential
This calibration occurs at these times: ●
The product is turned on, or the front door is closed, after replacing an imaging drum.
●
The product is turned on, or the right door is closed, after replacing the ITB.
●
A specified number of pages have been printed.
●
The temperature in the laser/scanner unit area changes, which is a predictor of color misregistration.
●
The user requests a calibration by using the control-panel menus
If data from the color misregistration and image-density sensors is outside a specified range when the product is turned on or when it is beginning the calibration sequence, the DC controller determines that these sensors have failed, and it notifies the formatter. Image stabilization control Environmental changes or deterioration of the photosensitive drums and toner can cause variations in the image density. The image stabilization control reduces these fluctuations. There are three kinds of image stabilization controls. Table 5-45 Image stabilization controls Environment change control
Image density control (DMAX)
Image halftone control (DHALF)
220 Chapter 5 Support
The DC controller monitors environmental information from internal and external temperature and humidity sensors. It adjusts the high-voltage bias to accommodate environmental changes. This control is performed under the following circumstances: ●
The product is turned on.
●
The imaging drum is replaced.
●
A change in environmental conditions occurs.
This control corrects variations in image density that are related to deterioration of the photosensitive drum or the toner. The DC controller adjusts the high-voltage biases to correct the problem under the following conditions: ●
The thermistor detects a temperature that is too low when the product is turned on.
●
The product is turned on, or the front door is closed, after replacing an imaging drum.
●
The product is turned on, or the right door is closed, after replacing the ITB.
●
A specified number of pages have been printed.
The formatter performs this control to calibrate the halftone, based on the halftonedensity measurements, under the following conditions: ●
The thermistor detects a temperature that is too low when the product is turned on.
●
The product is turned on, or the front door is closed, after replacing an imaging drum.
●
The product is turned on, or the right door is closed, after replacing the ITB.
●
A specified number of pages have been printed.
ENWW
HP Confidential
Color-sensor control (duplex models only) The image halftone control measures the color halftones of the toner image on the ITB. However, this control cannot adjust halftone variations that occur because of differences in types of paper. To accommodate differences in paper, the product has a color-sensor-control mechanism, which is located in the duplex paper path. The product adjusts the color halftones based on measurements from a test pattern that is printed on a page and passed through the duplexer after fusing. Figure 5-47 Color-sensor control
ENWW
Theory of operation 221
HP Confidential
The color sensor engages or disengages based on the position of the color-sensor disengagement cam, which is driven by reversing the duplexing re-pickup motor. If the DC controller receives no signal from the color-sensor disengagement sensor during a color sensor control operation, it determines that the duplexing paper feed mechanism has failed. Gray-axis correction The gray axis correction adjusts for differences in the process-gray color that is designated by the formatter. The formatter adjusts the color balance for cyan, magenta, and yellow based on measurements from this control. Figure 5-48 Gray-axis correction
Scanning/image capture system (M880 only) NOTE: The information in this section applies only to the HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 product.
Scanner The bright and dark areas of a scanned document reflect different light values from the light source (CCFL), and the light emits through the lens in the scan head. When the CCD sensors receive the light, photoelectricity is produced according to the light strength. The CCD and CCB/B change the light into electricity, and then the CCD/B transmits the analog electrical signal through the R, G, B channels. The analog
222 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
signal (R,G,B) is sent to the to the A/D converter, which converts the analog signals to digital signals. The ASIC reads the digital data produced by the A/D converter and then processes the read data in the inner ASIC. NOTE: The same optical system is used for the glass and ADF scans. Figure 5-49 Scanner components (1 of 2)
Figure 5-50 Scanner components (2 of 3)
ENWW
Theory of operation 223
HP Confidential
Figure 5-51 Scanner components (3 of 3)
224 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Product boards The scanner includes two major parts: structure and scanner. The scanner includes the copy-processor board (CPB), scanner-control board (SCB), and PCI-e cable, which are embedded in the structure and scanner bodies. The scanner controls the ADF. Figure 5-52 Scanner
Scanner system block diagram The scanner has its own power supply, which can accept the universal ac input range provided by the product power supply. The print engine controls the scanner power supply via a PSON signal. However, the PSON signal does not control the STBY_3.3 Yes power source from the print engine. STBY_3.3 Yes provides power for certain sensors during sleep mode. The scanner system has three cooling fans. The control-panel fan and scanner cooling fan are connected to the scanner power supply directly. The lamp fan is connected to the SCB and controlled by the SCB firmware. All three fans have a fan-lock detection mechanism. The lamp fan only operates during ADF scanning, while the other two fans operate when the scanner is on. The light source system includes one inverter and one Xelamp. The inverter is located on the scanner structure. The Xe-lamp is located on the scanner carriage.
ENWW
Theory of operation 225
HP Confidential
CAUTION: The inverter output voltage is 1.8 KV high voltage. Do not touch both the inverter and carriage when the scanner is on. Two FFC cables connect the CCD board on the carriage and the SCB. The board-to-board connectors connect the SCB and CPB and CPB and SDC. The black PCI-e cable connects the SDC and print engine (formatter board). Figure 5-53 Scanner system block diagram
Scanner image-data path For input signals, ZR ASIC generates the SH signal of each line. This SH transfers to the AFE chip through the FPGA chip. The AFE then sends the SH signal to the CCD. The clock signal of the AFE chip is provided from the FPGA. The AFE sends the CCD clock/control signals to the CCD. For output signals, the CCD analog video signals can be decoded as digital data by the AFE (ADC). The AFE sends back the image data using LVDS signals. Two LVDS receiver chips deserialize image data and send it to
226 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
the FPGA. The FPGA combines even and odd pixel data and converts it to the HP video interface. The LVDS transmitter chip serializes data as the LVDS format and sends it to the CPB. Figure 5-54 Scanner system image-data path
Scanner power topology The scanner power-supply input range is universal ac (100 to 240 Vac). It is controlled by the PSON signal, which is provided by the print engine. There is one standby power (STBY_3.3 Yes) provided for sensors during sleep mode. Total power consumption of the scanner power supply is 139.7 W. Figure 5-55 Scanner power topology
ENWW
Theory of operation 227
HP Confidential
Scanner power states The scanner has three power states: ●
Standby: Scanner is ready to scan.
●
Sleep: Scanner is in low-power state. Some components are off.
●
Deep Sleep: Scanner is in the lowest power state. Most of the components are off, and the power to the processor (U10) of the scanner-controller board is off.
Table 5-46 Scanner power states Mode
Scanner system
product system
RDY
Standby
Standby
Sleep1
Sleep
Reduced power
Sleep2
Deep sleep
Lowest product state
Figure 5-56 Sleep-state power topology
During sleep state, the scanner shuts down most of its peripherals including the CCD, AFE, LVDS, FB/ ADF motors, lamp, and inverter. The scanner stops the FPGA oscillator to reduce FPGA (U6) power consumption. Only the CPB sensor signals (cover lid, ADF media presence, and nWake) allow the CPB to send a command to wake up the scanner.
228 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Figure 5-57 Deep-sleep-state power topology
During deep-sleep state, the CPB disables the SCB_PWR_EN signal, which disables the scanner-logic power source. The power to the processor of the SCB is off. 24 Yes from the scanner power supply is provided to the CPB. Sensor topology Each fan has a lock signal that informs the system if a fan-rotation function has failed. The lid sensor triggers the detection of the FB paper-size sensors. The ADF has eight sensors. The CCD board has a home sensor. The status of these sensors is reported to the CPB by the SCB. The lid sensor, media_presence, and nWake signals
ENWW
Theory of operation 229
HP Confidential
are directly connected to the CPB and powered by STBY_3.3 Yes. STBY_3.3 Yes is provided continuously when PSON is enabled. Figure 5-58 Sensor topology
Location
Name
Description
ADF
Media_Presence
Media presence: H Media empty: L
Deskew
Skew: H No skew: L
Top_of_Page
Top of page: H Not top of page: L
EXIT_SENSOR
Not available
Door_Open (Hatch)
Door close: H Door open: L
Long_Media
Long media: H Not long media : L
Paper_Width_Adjust
Wide media: H Not wide media: L
Pick_Success_Sensor
230 Chapter 5 Support
If the ADF module is attached, this signal will always be H.
ENWW
HP Confidential Location
Name
Description
Carriage
Home Sensor
At home: H Not at home: L
SCB
Lid
FB cover open: H FB cover close: L
Paper (wide)
Wide paper: H Not wide paper: L
Paper (long)
Long paper: H Not long paper: L
nWake
Wake up status: H Idle status: L
ENWW
Theory of operation 231
HP Confidential
Boards I/Os Figure 5-59 SCB map
The main board of the scanner is the SCB. The connectors are external I/O ports of the SCB. The LEDs (D5-D8, D18) are SCB LED indicators. The jumpers (J3, J5, USB) are reserved for debugging and the manufacturer.
232 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-47 SCB connectors Item number
Connector
Pin number
Connects to
Remark
1
CON1
28
CCDB
2
CON2
28
CCDB
3
CON4
3
Lid sensor
4
CON3
8
Paper sensors
5
CON13
3
Lamp fan
6
CON6
34
ADF module
7
CON7
4
FB motor
8
CON12
4
Xe-lamp inverter
24V
9
CON10
8
Power supply
ADF and Xe-lamp power (24 Yes)
10
CON11
7
Power supply
SCB 24 Yes, 5 Yes and STBY_3.3 Yes
11
CON8
34
CPB
1284C metal connector
LVDS
The CCD board connects to the SCB using two 28-pin FFC cables. The CCD board and the home sensor are located on the carriage. There are only three connectors on the CCD board. Figure 5-60 CCD map
Table 5-48 CCD map
ENWW
Item number
Connector
Pin number
Connects to
1
CON1
28
CCDB
2
CON2
28
CCDB
3
CON3
3
Home
Remark
LVDS
Theory of operation 233
HP Confidential
Scanner operation flow Figure 5-61 Power-on initialization-operation flow (1 of 2)
234 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Figure 5-62 Power-on initialization-operation flow (2 of 2)
ENWW
Theory of operation 235
HP Confidential
Figure 5-63 FB scan-operation flow
236 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Figure 5-64 ADF scan-operation flow
ENWW
Theory of operation 237
HP Confidential
Document feeder system Figure 5-65 Document feeder cross section
Item number
Component name
1
Paper stopper
2
Input tray
3
Lift plate
4
Exit-drive roller
5
Pick roller
6
Separation roller
7
Deskew-drive roller
8
Pre-scan drive roller
9
Simplex selector
10
Post-scan drive roller
11
Duplex selector (background selector)
12
Output tray
238 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Document feeder sensors The document feeder contains the following sensors: Figure 5-66 Document feeder sensor positions
Table 5-49 Document feeder sensors
ENWW
Item number
Component name
Description
1
Sensor, legal
Detects whether there is a legal-size original.
2
Sensor, portrait/landscape
Detects whether there is a portrait-size or landscape-size original.
3
Sensor, media width
Detects the media stack width (one sheet or multiple sheets). Used in combination with other sensors to determine media size and orientation.
4
Sensor, stack height
Detects the media stack height (one sheet or multiple sheets).
5
Sensor, paper presence
Detects whether a document is present in the document feeder. If paper is present in the document feeder when copies are made, the product scans the document using the document feeder. If no paper is present when copies are made, the product scans the document using the scanner glass.
Theory of operation 239
HP Confidential Table 5-49 Document feeder sensors (continued) Item number
Component name
Description
6
Sensor, ultrasonic
Uses ultrasonic sound to detect a mutli-page paper feed. NOTE:
This sensor also functions as the pick success sensor.
7
Sensor, deskew
Detects the top of the page as it approaches the back-side scan module during e-duplex copy jobs.
8
Sensor, prescan1
Activates the frontside scan module (this component is in the scanner base) and the frontside background selector (this component is in the document feeder) if needed for an e-duplex copy job (HP EveryPage).
9
Sensor, prescan2
Activates the backside scan module and the backside background selector if needed (these components are in the document feeder) for an e-duplex copy job.
Document feeder simplex operation Following is the basic sequence of operation for a document feeder simplex job. Figure 5-67 Simplex operation paper path
1.
The paper presence sensor is activated when paper is loaded in the input tray.
2.
The lift motor rotates to raise the lift plate until the maximum height is reached or the stack height sensor is triggered.
3.
The pick motor rotates to lower the pick roller and start picking the loaded paper.
4.
The ultrasonic sensor detects if more than one page passes the separation roller. If there is a multipick, the document feeder stops, and an error message appears on the control-panel display.
5.
The deskew sensor is activated when leading edge of paper is driven passed it. The firmware registers the leading edge of paper position.
240 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
6.
The leading edge of paper is continues to be driven into the pinch point of the deskew drive roller and the deskew pinch rollers. The paper is driven a preset distance past this point to create a buckle of paper allowing for skew correction
7.
The deskew motor rotates to drive the deskew drive roller which pulls paper towards the prescan drive roller.
8.
The pick motor stops turning and allows both the pick and separator rollers to free-spin while paper is being pulled in by the deskew drive roller.
9.
The feed motor rotates to drive paper into the prescan1 sensor. The firmware registers the paper leading edge position as the prescan1 sensor is triggered.
10. The feed motor continues to rotate to drive the paper leading edge a calibrated distance from prescan1 sensor to the simplex scan area. The simplex scanner begins capturing scan data. 11. If the ultrasonic sensor detects the trailing edge of the page and paper presence sensor is still activated, more than one page was loaded in the input tray, and the next page is fed starting with step 3. This is repeated for all pages loaded in the document feeder input tray. 12. The prescan1 sensor is de-activated when trailing edge of paper passes it. The firmware registers this position as the trailing edge of the paper. 13. The feed motor continues to rotate to drive the paper trailing edge through the preset distance from prescan1 sensor to the scan area. The simplex scanner stops capturing scan data. 14. The feed motor continues to rotate until the input tray is empty and all pages have been fed through the document feeder. 15. The lift motor rotates to lower the lift plate to the home position, and the document feeder is in a ready state for the next scan operation.
ENWW
Theory of operation 241
HP Confidential
Document feeder duplex operation Following is the basic sequence of operation for a document feeder duplex job. Figure 5-68 Duplex operation paper path
1.
The paper presence sensor is activated when paper is loaded onto the input tray.
2.
The lift motor rotates to raise the lift plate until the maximum height is reached or the stack height sensor is triggered.
3.
The pick motor rotates to lower the pick roller and start picking the loaded paper.
4.
The ultrasonic sensor detects if more than one page passes the separation roller. If there is a multipick, the document feeder stops and an error message appears on the control-panel display.
5.
The deskew sensor is activated when the leading edge of the paper is driven passed it. The firmware registers the leading edge of the paper position.
6.
The leading edge of the paper is continues to be driven into the pinch point of the deskew drive roller and the deskew pinch rollers. The paper is driven a preset distance past this point to create a buckle of paper allowing for skew correction.
7.
The deskew motor rotates to drive the deskew drive roller which pulls the paper toward the prescan drive roller.
8.
The pick motor stops turning and allows both the pick roller and the separator roller to free-spin while paper is being pulled in by the deskew drive roller.
9.
The feed motor rotates to drive the paper into the prescan1 sensor. The firmware registers the paper leading edge position as the prescan1 sensor is triggered.
10. The feed motor continues to rotate to drive the paper leading edge a calibrated distance from prescan1 sensor to the simplex scan area. The simplex scanner begins capturing scan data. 11. The feed motor continues to drive the paper until the prescan2 sensor is triggered by the paper leading edge. The firmware registers the paper leading edge position as the prescan2 sensor is triggered.
242 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
12. The feed motor continues to drive the paper leading edge through the calibrated distance from prescan2 sensor to the duplex scan area. The duplex scanner begins capturing scan data. 13. If the ultrasonic sensor detects the trailing edge of the page and the paper presence sensor is still activated, more than one page was loaded, and the next page is fed (once the firmware has the memory available to store the scan data). This is repeated for all pages that are loaded in the document feeder. 14. The prescan1 sensor is de-activated when the trailing edge of the paper passes it. The firmware registers this position as the trailing edge of the paper. 15. The feed motor continues to rotate to drive the paper trailing edge through the preset distance from the prescan1 sensor to the scan area. The simplex scanner stops capturing scan data. 16. The prescan2 sensor is de-activated when the trailing edge of the paper passes it. The firmware registers this position as the trailing edge of the paper. 17. The feed motor continues to rotate to drive the paper trailing edge through the preset distance from the prescan2 sensor to the scan area. The duplex scanner stops capturing scan data. 18. The feed motor continues to rotate until the input tray is empty and all pages have been fed through. 19. The lift motor rotates to lower the lift plate to the home position and the document feeder is in a ready state for the next scan operation.
ENWW
Theory of operation 243
HP Confidential
Document feeder paper control and deskew Figure 5-69 Deskew rollers and width adjust
Item number
Component name
1
Deskew Pinch Rollers
2
Deskew Rollers
3
Width Adjust
●
Adjustable width adjust guides are provided on the input tray to ensure that the paper is stacked together neatly at the center of the input tray. It also ensures the paper is located parallel with the direction of travel into the document feeder paper path.
●
To further minimize skew due to improper loading of paper in the input tray, a deskew function is perform by buckling the paper to accumulate a paper buffer.
●
The leading edge of the paper lines up parallel with the deskew drive rollers in preparation to be driven into the remaining paper path of the document feeder.
244 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Document feeder paper pick and separation Figure 5-70 Separation angled ramp, separation roller, and separation pad
ENWW
Item number
Description
1
Angled ramp
2
Separation roller
3
Separation pad
●
The top sheet of paper is picked by the pick roller.
●
The angled ramp (callout 1) profile functions as a barrier to prevent the remaining lower sheets from being picked with the top sheet.
●
If more than one sheet of paper is being picked, the separation roller (callout 2) and separation pad (callout 3) stop the lower sheet of paper, which allows only the single top sheet to be pulled into the document feeder.
●
The ultrasonic sensor, located behind the separator pad, ensures that the document feeder stops if more than one page is picked (HP Every page technology).
●
The separation roller and separation pad are customer replaceable and have an expected life of 100,000 pages.
Theory of operation 245
HP Confidential
Document feeder paper stopper & fins Figure 5-71 Paper stopper
●
The paper stopper on the output bin is adjustable to recieve A4 short edge/legal and A3/Ledger paper.
●
An audible click sound can be heard when the paper stopper is pulled out and locked in position.
●
A spring automatically retracts the paper stopper when the user pushes in to close it.
●
A pair of guides function to neatly stack A4 long edge feed paper, and then collapse when a longer sized paper is used.
Document feeder simplex selector ●
The simplex selector serves as a white or black background during the scanning process. The black background is used when certain automatic cropping and edge detection modes are enabled on the device.
●
Switching between white and black mode is caused by rotating the deskew motor in reverse which actuates a cam and lever that toggle the selector.
●
The simplex selector can sufficiently move (relative to the document feeder) to ensure consistent and stable contact with the document feeder-specific window of the simplex scanner.
246 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Document feeder white backing Figure 5-72 White backing and simplex selector
ENWW
Item number
Description
1
White backing
●
The white backing (mounted to the document feeder; callout 1) ensures that any paper placed on the flatbed scanner conforms to the glass, resulting in a uniform scan. The white color also enables scanning of transparent paper on the flatbed scanner window.
●
The optical properties (color and reflectance) are sufficient to achieve the required image quality attributes on both transparent and non-transparent paper.
●
The material used is UV-stabilized so its color will not change over time after being exposed to the light source from the scanner.
Theory of operation 247
HP Confidential
Document feeder duplex selector Figure 5-73 Duplex selector
Item number
Description
1
Duplex selector
●
The duplex selector is used as a white and black background for duplex scans. It also provides a white surface for duplex scanner calibration when the device is powered on.
●
Switching between white, black, and calibration mode is caused by rotating the deskew motor in reverse, which actuates a cam and lever that toggle the selector.
●
The duplex selector is biased toward the duplex scanner to keep the media conformed to the duplex scanner glass.
●
The duplex selector is removable so that the surfaces of the selector and the scanner can be cleaned if scans start to have lines in them. To access the seclector, open the cover hatch, raise the input tray, push on the green latches, and then pull duplex selector out of the document feeder.
248 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Document feeder hinge Figure 5-74 Document feeder closed (book mode)
ENWW
●
The hinges of the document feeder allow the document feeder to move vertically and accommodate the placement of books and other objects up to 40 mm (1.57 in) in height onto the flatbed scanner window, while still being able to close on top of the book or object (with the bottom of the document feeder mostly parallel to the flatbed scanner window).
●
The document feeder hinge provides a height adjustment of at least 40 mm (1.57 in) when a maximum downward force of 5 kg (11 lb) is applied at front edge of the document feeder, with the fulcrum (such as the spine of a book) centered in the scan window and parallel to its long axis.
●
The document feeder is can withstand a downward force of at least 15 kg (33 lb) applied at the front edge center of the document feeder, and the fulcrum (such as the spine of a book) oriented parallel to the long axis of the scan window but located anywhere within the scan window, without breaking, deforming, detaching, or experiencing performance degradation.
●
The document feeder hinge supports the document feeder in the open position and will prevent the document feeder from damage by being slammed.
●
The hinge will hold the document feeder static in all positions higher than 125 mm (4.92 in) (as measured at the front of the document feeder). The force required to open or close the document feeder is less than 2.27 kg (5 lb).
●
The hinge allows the document feeder to open to an angle of 70º from the horizontal.
Theory of operation 249
HP Confidential
Figure 5-75 Document feeder open (max opening 70º)
Pickup, feed, and delivery system The DC controller controls the pickup, feed, and delivery system according to commands from the formatter. The pickup, feed, and delivery system uses a series of rollers to move the paper through the product.
250 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Photo sensors and switches The following figure shows the sensors and switches for the pickup, feed, and delivery system. Figure 5-76 Photo sensors and switches electrical components
Table 5-50 Photo sensors and switches
ENWW
Abbreviation
Component name
SW11
Cassette media-width switch
SW12
Cassette trailing edge switch
SW13
Right door open detection switch (newly added electrical component)
SW14
Front door open detection switch (newly added electrical component)
SR21
Cassette media-level sensor
SR22
Cassette media-feed sensor
SR24
MP tray (Tray 1) media-feed sensor
SR25
MP tray (Tray 1) media-presence sensor
SR26
MP tray (Tray 1) last-media sensor
SR29
Loop sensor 1 (loop sensor added)
SR30
Loop sensor 2 (loop sensor added)
SR31
Cassette media-presence sensor
SR32
Cassette media-surface sensor
Theory of operation 251
HP Confidential Table 5-50 Photo sensors and switches (continued) Abbreviation
Component name
SR33
Face-down tray media-full sensor
SR35
Fuser delivery sensor 1 (fuser delivery sensor added)
SR36
Media-width sensor 3 (newly added electrical component)
SR37
Media-width sensor 1 (newly added electrical component)
SR38
Media-width sensor 2 (newly added electrical component)
SR45
Fuser delivery sensor 2 (fuser delivery sensor added)
SR301
Duplex switch back feed sensor
SR302
Duplex feed sensor
SR304
Duplex re-pickup feed sensor
SR2501
TOP sensor
MS
Media sensor
252 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Motors and solenoids The following figure shows the motors and solenoids for the pickup, feed and delivery system. Figure 5-77 Motors and solenoids electrical components
Table 5-51 Motors and solenoids (paper path)
ENWW
Abbreviation
Component name
M5
Pickup motor
M6
Registration motor
M7
Cassette lifter motor
M10
ITB motor
M11
Fuser motor
M301
Duplex re-pickup motor
M302
Duplex switch back motor
M303
Duplex feed motor
SL1
Cassette pickup solenoid
Theory of operation 253
HP Confidential Table 5-51 Motors and solenoids (paper path) (continued) Abbreviation
Component name
SL2
MP tray (Tray 1) pickup solenoid
SL301
Duplex flapper solenoid
The pickup, feed, and delivery system can be divided into three units: ●
Pickup and feed system
●
Fuser and delivery unit
●
Duplexing unit
Figure 5-78 Three main units of the pickup, feed, and delivery system
Pickup and feed system The pickup and feed unit picks an individual sheet of paper from the multipurpose tray or the cassettes, carries it through the secondary-transfer unit, and feeds it into the fuser.
254 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-52 Main operations within the pickup-and-feed system Operation
Steps
Cassette pickup
1.
Paper-size and cassette-presence detection
2.
Lift operation
3.
Paper-level and paper-presence detection
4.
Multiple-feed prevention
1.
Paper-presence detection
2.
Last paper detection
1.
Skew-feed prevention
2.
Paper detection
3.
Feed-speed control
Multipurpose tray pickup
Paper feed
Cassette pickup The sequence of steps for the cassette tray pickup operation is the following:
ENWW
Theory of operation 255
HP Confidential
1.
When the product is turned on or the tray is pushed closed, the lifting mechanism lifts the paper stack so it is ready.
2.
After receiving a print command from the formatter, the DC controller rotates the pickup motor, which causes the cassette pickup roller, cassette feed roller, and cassette separation roller to rotate.
3.
The DC controller drives the cassette pickup solenoid, which rotates the cassette pickup cam. As the pickup cam rotates, the pickup arm moves down, the cassette pickup roller touches the surface of the paper stack, and it picks up one sheet of paper.
Figure 5-79 Cassette-pickup mechanism
Cassette paper-size and cassette-presence detection The cassette end-plate detection switch and the cassette side-plate detection switch detect the size of the paper that is loaded in the cassette. Each of these switches contains three sub-switches. The DC controller compares the paper length that is detected by the vertical-synchronous-position sensor to the detected size and to the size that is specified for the print job. If they do not match, the DC controller notifies the formatter.
256 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
The cassette end-plate detection switch also detects whether the cassette is present. If all three of its switches are off, the DC controller determines that the cassette is absent. Figure 5-80 Cassette paper-size detection switches
Table 5-53 Switch states for paper-size detection Paper size
ENWW
Cassette end-plate detection switch (SW4)
Cassette side-plate detection switch (SW5)
Top switch
Center switch
Bottom switch
Top switch1
Center switch
Bottom switch
A5
On
On
Off
On or off
Off
On
A4
On
On
Off
On or off
Off
Off
Letter
On
On
Off
On or off
On
Off
B5
Off
On
Off
On or off
Off
On
Executive
Off
On
Off
On or off
Off
On
Letter-R
Off
Off
On
On or off
Off
On
A4-R
On
Off
On
On or off
Off
On
Legal
On
Off
Off
On or off
Off
On
Theory of operation 257
HP Confidential Table 5-53 Switch states for paper-size detection (continued) Paper size
Cassette end-plate detection switch (SW4)
Cassette side-plate detection switch (SW5)
Top switch
Center switch
Bottom switch
Top switch1
Center switch
Bottom switch
B4
On
Off
Off
On or off
On
On
A3
On
Off
Off
On or off
Off
Off
Ledger
On
Off
Off
On or off
On
Off
Cassette absence
Off
Off
Off
1
The top side-plate detection switch controls the lifter mechanism. When the switch is on, the lifting plate moves up. When it is off, the lifting plate moves down. Its position has no effect on paper-size detection.
Cassette lift operation When the product is turned on, when the cassette is inserted, or as the paper level in the cassette decreases, the cassette lift mechanism raises the plate to keep the surface of the stack high enough so the pickup roller can reach it. 1.
The DC controller rotates the cassette-lifter motor to raise the lift plate.
2.
When the paper-stack surface sensor detects the paper surface, the DC controller stops rotating the cassette-lifter motor. If the sensor no longer detects paper, the DC controller begins rotating the motor again.
258 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
If the paper-stack surface sensor does not detect the paper within a specified time after the lifter motor begins rotating, the DC controller notifies the formatter that the lifter motor has failed. Figure 5-81 Cassette lift mechanism
Cassette paper-level and paper-presence detection The height of the paper-lift plate in the cassette indicates the paper level. The paper-level sensor, which is at the end of the lifter motor, monitors the rotations of the motor and calculates the paper level. It reports the paper level to the DC controller in the following increments:
ENWW
●
No paper
●
Less than 10%
●
Between 10% and 20%
●
Between 20% and 40%
●
More than 40%
Theory of operation 259
HP Confidential
The cassette media-presence sensor detects whether paper is in the cassette. Figure 5-82 Paper-level-detection mechanism
Multifeed prevention In each of the cassettes and in the multipurpose tray, a separation roller prevents multiple sheets of paper from entering the paper path. The separation roller is driven by the rotation of the feed roller, but it is
260 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
equipped with a torque limiter that counteracts this rotation when more than one sheet of paper is between the two rollers. Figure 5-83 Multifeed prevention
Multipurpose tray pickup The multipurpose tray paper-presence sensor detects whether paper is in the tray. If no paper is present, the DC controller notifies the formatter. The print operation is not performed until paper is in the tray. The sequence of steps for the multipurpose tray pickup operation as follows:
ENWW
1.
After receiving a print command from the formatter, the DC controller reverses the pickup motor, which causes the multipurpose tray separation roller to rotate.
2.
The DC controller turns on the multipurpose tray pickup solenoid, causing the multipurpose tray pickup roller to rotate.
Theory of operation 261
HP Confidential
3.
The lifting plate rises to meet the rotating pickup roller, and paper is picked from the stack.
4.
The multipurpose tray separation roller isolates a single sheet of paper in case more than one sheet was picked. The single sheet of paper is fed into the product. This mechanism is the same as for the cassette pickup operation.
Figure 5-84 Multipurpose tray pickup mechanism
Multipurpose tray last-paper detection Because the paper path between the multipurpose tray paper-presence sensor and the registration roller is short, the product attempts to form the next image before the DC controller detects that the tray is empty. To prevent the image from being formed on the photosensitive drum and wasting toner, the multipurpose tray last-paper sensor detects the empty tray before the image-formation process begins. As the last sheet of paper is picked up, the multipurpose tray last-paper detection roller rotates. It does not rotate if two or more sheets are in the tray. The multipurpose tray last-paper sensor detects the moving
262 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
roller, and it sends a signal to the DC controller. The DC controller notifies the formatter so it can temporarily disable the image-formation process. Figure 5-85 Multipurpose tray last-paper detection
Paper feed After the pickup operation, the paper is fed through the product and into the fuser.
ENWW
1.
The paper passes through the feed rollers. The registration shutter aligns the paper correctly to prevent skewed printing.
2.
When the vertical synchronous position sensor detects the leading edge of the paper, the registration motor stops, and the paper movement pauses while the image on the ITB is timed to align with the leading edge of the paper.
Theory of operation 263
HP Confidential
3.
While the paper is paused, the media sensor detects the type of paper.
4.
When the timing is correct, the registration motor begins rotating again to feed the paper through the secondary transfer unit and into the fuser.
Figure 5-86 Paper-feed mechanism
Skew-feed prevention The product can straighten the paper without slowing the feed operation.
264 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
1.
As the paper enters the paper path, the leading edge strikes the registration shutter, but the paper does not pass through the shutter, so it is straightened.
2.
The feed rollers keep pushing the paper, creating a force on the leading edge against the registration shutter.
3.
When the force is great enough, the registration shutter opens and the paper passes through.
Figure 5-87 Skew-feed prevention
Paper-type detection The product can detect the type of paper in the paper path, and it adjusts the print mode accordingly. The product uses two types of media sensors:
ENWW
Theory of operation 265
HP Confidential
●
Reflection: Detects the glossiness of the paper
●
Transmission: Detects the thickness of the paper
Figure 5-88 Media sensor unit
●
●
Simplex printing: ◦
The mode specified for the print job is Transparency, but the media sensor detects another type.
◦
The mode specified for the print job is something other than Auto or Transparency, but the media sensor detects a transparency.
Duplex printing: The mode specified for the print job is compatible with duplex printing, but the media sensor detects a transparency.
When the product is turned on or when it comes out of Sleep mode, it tests the media sensor by turning on the LED. If the intensity of the light does not match the specified value, the DC controller determines that the sensor has failed. Feed-speed control The DC controller adjust the feed speed to improve print quality depending on the type of paper used for the print job. The paper is fed at a specific rate depending on the print mode designated by the formatter. Table 5-54 Print mode and corresponding feed speed Print mode
Feed speed
Media sensor detection
Automatic
N/A
N/A
Normal 1
1/1
Yes
Normal 2
1/1
N/A
Heavy media 1
3/4
Yes
Heavy media 2
1/2
Yes
266 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-54 Print mode and corresponding feed speed (continued) Print mode
Feed speed
Media sensor detection
Heavy media 3
1/3
Yes
Light media 1
1/1
N/A
Light media 2
1/1
N/A
Glossy media 1
1/3
Yes
Glossy media 2
1/3
Yes
Glossy media 3
1/3
Yes
Glossy film
1/3
Yes
Envelope 1
1/2
N/A
OHT
1/3
Yes
Label
1/2
N/A
Designated media 1
1/2
N/A
Designated media 2
1/3
N/A
Media width detection The DC controller detects the width and position of paper to prevent an edge overheat of the fuser heater. The DC controller detects the small-size or one-sided paper according to the media-width sensors' combination and notifies the formatter of a misprint when it detects that the paper size is different from the designated size or one-sided. Table 5-55 Media-width combination of the sensors (1 of 2) Media-width sensor 1 (SR37)
Media-width sensor 2 (SR38)
Media-width/location
ON
ON
Larger than B4
OFF
OFF
Narrower than B4
ON
OFF
Narrower than Letter-R and one-sided towards the front side
OFF
ON
Narrower than Letter-R and one-side towards the rear side
Table 5-56 Media-width combination of the sensors (2 of 2) Media-width sensor 3 (SR36)
Media-width/location
ON
Wider than A4
OFF
Narrower than B5
Fusing and delivery unit The fusing and delivery unit fuses the toner onto the paper and delivers the printed page into the output bin. It has the following controls to ensure optimum print quality:
ENWW
Theory of operation 267
HP Confidential
●
Loop control
●
Pressure roller pressurization/depressurization control
A sensor detects when the output bin is full, and the DC controller notifies the formatter. Loop control The loop control maintains even tension on the paper while it is moving through the fuser to prevent printquality defects and paper-handling defects. ●
If the fuser rollers rotate more slowly than the secondary transfer rollers, the paper warp increases and an image defect or paper crease occurs.
●
If the fuser rollers rotate faster than the secondary transfer rollers, the paper warp decreases and the toner image is not transferred to the paper correctly, causing color misregistration.
To prevent these problems, the loop sensor, located between the secondary transfer rollers and the fuser rollers, detects whether the paper is sagging or is too taut. The DC controller adjusts the speed of the fuser motor accordingly. Two loop sensors detect the amount of deflection: ●
Loop sensor 1 Detects the deflection of heavy paper
●
Loop sensor 2
268 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Detects the deflection of normal paper other than heavy paper Figure 5-89 Mechanism of the loop control
Table 5-57 Loop control
ENWW
Loop sensor 1
Loop sensor 2
(SR29)
(SR30)
OFF
OFF
Speed of fuser motor
Figure reference
Speed down
A
Theory of operation 269
HP Confidential Table 5-57 Loop control (continued) Loop sensor 1
Loop sensor 2
(SR29)
(SR30)
ON
OFF
Speed of fuser motor
Figure reference
Heavy paper: Speed up
B
Other than heavy paper: Speed down ON
ON
Speed up
C
Fuser depressurize control To prevent excessive wear on the pressure roller, deformation of the fuser sleeve, and to facilitate jamclearing procedures, the pressure roller is not pressurized except during printing. The DC controller reverses the fuser motor, which rotates the fuser pressure-release cam. The operational sequence of the fuser depressurize control is as following: 1.
Reverses the fuser motor and accordingly the fuser depressurize cam rotates.
2.
As the fuser depressurize cam rotates, the fuser sleeve is pressurized toward or depressurized against the pressure roller.
270 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
The DC controller determines a fuser depressurization mechanism failure and notifies it to the formatter when the fuser home position sensor does not sense the home position within a specified period from when the fuser motor is reversed. Figure 5-90 Mechanism of the fuser depressurize control
The pressure roller is depressurized under the following conditions: ●
When the product is turned off
●
During Power-save mode (Sleep mode, active off or inactive off)
●
When a paper jam is detected
NOTE: The fuser remains pressurized if the power is interrupted by removing the power cord or turning off a surge protector, or if the fuser is removed without turning off the product.
Duplexing unit For supported models, the duplexing unit reverses the paper and feeds it through the paper path to print the second side. It consists of the following components:
ENWW
Theory of operation 271
HP Confidential
●
Duplexing-reverse unit: Installed on top of the product
●
Duplexing-feed unit: Inside the product, along the right side
The duplex flapper solenoid (SL301) controls the position of the duplexing flapper to feed the paper into the duplexing unit. Figure 5-91 Duplexing unit
Table 5-58 Duplexing-unit components Abbreviation
Component name
M301
Duplex re-pickup motor
M302
Duplex switchback motor
M303
Duplex feed motor
FM301
Duplex fan 1
FM302
Duplex fan 2
SL301
Duplex flapper solenoid
SR301
Duplex switch back feed sensor
SR302
Duplex feed sensor
SR304
Duplex re-pickup sensor
272 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
All these components are driven by the duplexing driver, according to signals from the DC controller. If the DC controller cannot communicate with the duplexing driver, it notifies the formatter that the duplexing unit has failed. Duplexing reverse and feed control The duplexing reverse procedure pulls the paper into the duplexing unit after it exits the fuser, and the duplexing feed procedure moves the paper through the duplexer so it can enter the product paper path to print the second side of the page. 1.
After the first side has printed, the duplexing flapper solenoid is opened, which creates a paper path into the duplexing-reverse unit.
2.
After the paper has fully entered the duplexing-reverse unit, the duplexing-reverse motor reverses and directs the paper into the duplexing-feed unit.
3.
The duplexing re-pickup motor and duplexing feed motor move the paper into the duplexing repickup unit.
4.
To align the paper with the toner image on the ITB, the duplexing re-pickup motor stops and the paper pauses until the specified time.
5.
The paper re-enters the paper path, and the second side is printed.
Jam detection The product uses the following sensors and switches to detect the presence of the paper as it moves through the paper path, to check whether the paper is being fed correctly or has jammed, and to report to the DC controller if the paper has jammed:
ENWW
●
Cassette media-feed sensor (SR22)
●
MP tray (Tray 1) media-feed sensor (SR24)
●
TOP sensor (SR2501)
●
Loop sensor 1 (SR29)
●
Loop sensor 2 (SR30)
●
Fuser delivery sensor 1 (SR35)
●
Fuser delivery sensor 2 (SR45)
●
Face-down tray media-full sensor (SR33)
●
Duplex switch back feed sensor (SR301)
●
Duplex feed sensor (SR302)
●
Duplex re-pickup sensor (SR304)
●
Media sensor (MS)
●
Right door open detection switch (SW13)
●
Front door open detection switch (SW14)
Theory of operation 273
HP Confidential
The product determines that a jam has occurred if one of the sensors detects paper at an inappropriate time. The DC controller stops the print operation and notifies the formatter. Figure 5-92 Location of each jam sensor and switch
The product detects the following jams. Table 5-59 Jam detection Jam
Causes and conditions
Pickup stay jam 1
●
From MP tray (Tray 1) The MP tray (Tray 1) media-feed sensor does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a specified period from when it detects the leading edge.
●
From Cassette The cassette media-feed sensor does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a specified period from when it detects the leading edge.
Pickup stay jam 2
The TOP sensor does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a specified period from when it detects the leading edge.
Fuser delivery delay jam 1
The fuser delivery sensor 1 does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the TOP sensor detects the leading edge.
Fuser delivery delay jam 2
The fuser delivery sensor 2 does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the fuser delivery sensor 1 detects the leading edge.
Fuser delivery stay jam
The fuser delivery sensor 1 does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a specified period from when the TOP sensor detects the trailing edge.
274 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-59 Jam detection (continued) Jam
Causes and conditions
Fuser wrapping jam 1
The fuser delivery sensor 1 detects the trailing edge of paper within a specified period from when it detects the leading edge.
Fuser wrapping jam 2
The face-down tray media-full sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the fuser delivery sensor 1 detects the leading edge.
Fuser wrapping jam 3
The fuser delivery sensor 2 detects the trailing edge of paper within a specified period from when the fuser delivery sensor 2 detects the leading edge.
Residual paper jam
Any one of the following sensor detects a paper presence when the product is turned off, when the door is closed or when the product is released from Power-save mode (Sleep mode, active off or inactive off): ●
TOP sensor
●
Loop sensor 1
●
Loop sensor 2
●
Fuser delivery sensor 1
●
Fuser delivery sensor 2
●
Duplex switch back feed sensor
●
Duplex feed sensor
●
Duplex re-pickup sensor
After a jam, some sheets of paper might remain inside the product. If the DC controller detects residual paper after a door is closed or after the product is turned on, the product automatically clears itself of those residual sheets.
Input accessories Overview placeholder
1x500-sheet paper feeder (M855 only) and 3x500-sheet paper feeder The product is configured with either the additional 1x500-sheet input tray (M855 only) or 3x500-sheet input tray depending on which bundle was purchased. ●
The 1x500-sheet input tray (M855 only) has one tray (Tray 3) and a storage compartment.
●
The 3x500-sheet input tray has three trays (Trays 3, 4, and 5).
NOTE: These optional trays are not identical to the main cassette (Tray 2).
ENWW
Theory of operation 275
HP Confidential
Figure 5-93 Paper feeder installation and paper path
These additional trays are each controlled by paper-feeder drivers, which contain a microcomputer. The paper-feeder drivers receive commands from the DC controller. If the DC controller is unable to communicate with a paper-feeder driver, it notifies the formatter that the optional input tray is not connected correctly.
276 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Paper feeder electrical components The following figure shows the signal flow of the paper feeder controller. Figure 5-94 Paper feeder electrical components
Note: 3x500-sheet paper feeder only
ENWW
Theory of operation 277
HP Confidential Table 5-60 Paper feeder electrical components Component type
Abbreviation
Component name
Motor
M111
Cassette 1 lifter motor
M112
Cassette 1 pickup motor
M121
Cassette 2 lifter motor (3x500-sheet paper feeder only)
M122
Cassette 2 pickup motor (3x500-sheet paper feeder only)
M131
Cassette 3 lifter motor (3x500-sheet paper feeder only)
M132
Cassette 3 pickup motor (3x500-sheet paper feeder only)
SL111
Cassette 1 pickup solenoid
SL121
Cassette 2 pickup solenoid (3x500-sheet paper feeder only)
SL131
Cassette 3 pickup solenoid (3x500-sheet paper feeder only)
SW111
Cassette 1 media trailing edge switch
SW112
Cassette 1 media-width switch
SW113
Right door open detection switch (3x500-sheet paper feeder only)
SW121
Cassette 2 media trailing edge switch (3x500-sheet paper feeder only)
SW122
Cassette 2 media-width switch (3x500-sheet paper feeder only)
SW131
Cassette 3 media trailing edge switch (3x500-sheet paper feeder only)
SW132
Cassette 3 media-width switch (3x500-sheet paper feeder only)
Solenoid
Switch
278 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-60 Paper feeder electrical components (continued)
ENWW
Component type
Abbreviation
Component name
Photointerrupter
SR111
Cassette 1 media-level sensor
SR112
Cassette 1 media-feed sensor
SR113
Cassette 1 media-presence sensor
SR114
Cassette 1 media-surface sensor
SR121
Cassette 2 media-level sensor (3x500-sheet paper feeder only)
SR122
Cassette 2 media-feed sensor (3x500-sheet paper feeder only)
SR123
Cassette 2 media-presence sensor (3x500-sheet paper feeder only)
SR124
Cassette 2 media-surface sensor (3x500-sheet paper feeder only)
SR131
Cassette 3 media-level sensor (3x500-sheet paper feeder only)
SR132
Cassette 3 media-feed sensor (3x500-sheet paper feeder only)
SR133
Cassette 3 media-presence sensor (3x500-sheet paper feeder only)
SR134
Cassette 3 media-surface sensor (3x500-sheet paper feeder only)
Theory of operation 279
HP Confidential
Paper feeder pickup-and-feed operation The pickup and feed operation is the same for each of the trays. Figure 5-95 Paper-feeder pickup and feed operation
The methods for all the following operations are the same as for the main cassette (Tray 2):
280 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
●
Paper-size detection and cassette-presence detection
●
Lift operation
●
Paper-level and paper-presence detection
●
Multiple feed prevention
●
Jam detection
Paper feeder jam detection The paper feeder uses the following sensors and switch to detect the presence of the paper and to check whether the paper is being fed correctly or has jammed:
ENWW
●
Cassette 1 media-feed sensor (SR112)
●
Cassette 2 media-feed sensor (SR122)
Theory of operation 281
HP Confidential
●
Cassette 3 media-feed sensor (SR132)
●
Right door open detection switch (SW113)
Figure 5-96 Paper feeder sensor and switch location
Table 5-61 Paper feeder jam detection Jams
Applied
No pick jam 1
Yes
No pick jam 3 (newly added jam detection)
Yes
No pick jam 4 (newly added jam detection)
Yes
282 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-61 Paper feeder jam detection (continued) Jams
Applied
Residual paper jam
Yes
Right door open jam
Yes
Jam
Causes and conditions
No pick jam 3
●
From cassette 2: The cassette 1 media-feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the cassette 2 media-feed sensor detects the leading edge.
●
From cassette 3: The cassette 1 media-feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the cassette 3 media-feed sensor detects the leading edge.
No pick jam 4
The MP tray (Tray 1) media-feed sensor in the product does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the cassette 1 media-feed sensor detects the leading edge.
3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) feeder The 3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) feeder is optionally installed at the bottom of the product. The 3,500-sheet paper feeder picks up one sheet of paper and feeds it to the product. The HCI controller controls the operational sequence of the paper feeder. The HCI also detects the presence of a cassette by monitoring the switches. The HCI controller notifies the formatter through the DC controller when it determines a cassette is not installed.
ENWW
Theory of operation 283
HP Confidential
The following figure shows the installation and the paper path. Figure 5-97 HCI installation and paper path
3x500-sheet paper-feeder cassette media-size detection and cassette-presence detection The paper deck detects the size of the paper loaded in the paper deck cassette by monitoring the paper deck cassette-media-end switch and the paper deck cassette-media-width switch. It also detects the presence of a cassette by monitoring the switches. The paper deck controller notifies the formatter through the DC controller when it determines a cassette is absent. Table 5-62 3x500-sheet paper-feeder cassette media-size detection and cassette-presence detection Paper size
Executive
284 Chapter 5 Support
3x500-sheet paper deck
3x500-sheet paper deck
Cassette media width switch
Cassette media end switch
Top switch
Center switch
Bottom switch
Top switch
Center switch
Bottom switch
Off
On
On
On
On
On
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-62 3x500-sheet paper-feeder cassette media-size detection and cassette-presence detection (continued) Letter
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
A5
On
On
Off
On
On
On
B5
Off
On
Off
On
On
On
Ledger
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
On
Legal
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
B4
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
On
A3
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
A4-R
NOTE: The product cannot detect the paper size of A4-R and Letter-R. If A4-R or Letter-R sized paper is loaded to the cassette, A5 size is reported by the formatter.
Letter-R Universal
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
Cassette absent
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
HCI electrical components The following figure shows the signal flow of the HCI controller. Figure 5-98 HCI electrical components
Table 5-63 HCI electrical components Component type
Abbreviation
Component name
Motor
M3301
Right cassette pickup motor
M3302
Right cassette lifter motor
M3303
Left cassette lifter motor
M3304
Left cassette pickup motor
SL3301
Right cassette pickup solenoid
SL3302
Left cassette pickup solenoid
Solenoid
ENWW
Theory of operation 285
HP Confidential Table 5-63 HCI electrical components (continued) Component type
Abbreviation
Component name
Switch
SW3301
Right door open detection switch
SW3302
Right cassette open detection switch
SW3303
Left cassette open detection switch
PS3101
Right cassette lift-up media-surface sensor
PS3102
Right cassette pickup coordinate media-surface sensor
PS3103
Right cassette media-presence sensor
PS3201
Left cassette lift-up media-surface sensor
PS3202
Left cassette pickup coordinate media-surface sensor
PS3203
Left cassette media-presence sensor
PS3301
Media-feed sensor
PS3302
Right cassette media-feed sensor
PS3303
Right cassette media-size sensor
PS3304
Left cassette media-size sensor
PS3305
Left cassette media-feed sensor
PS3306
Side paper guide open detection sensor
PS3308
Right cassette media-level sensor
PS3309
Left cassette media-level sensor
Photointerrupter
HCI motor control The 3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) has four motors for the paper-feed and cassette lift-up. Table 5-64 HCI electrical components Component name
Components driven
M3301
Right cassette pickup motor
Pickup roller, separation roller and feed roller for right cassette
M3302
Right cassette lifter motor
Lifter for right cassette
M3303
Left cassette lifter motor
Lifter for left cassette
M3304
Left cassette pickup motor
Pickup roller, separation roller and feed roller for left cassette
HCI motor failure detection The HCI controller determines the following motor failures. Table 5-65 HCI motor failures Failure detective function
Applied
Right cassette pickup motor failure detection
N/A
286 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-65 HCI motor failures (continued) Failure detective function
Applied
Right cassette lifter motor failure detection
Yes
Left cassette lifter motor failure detection
Yes
Left cassette pickup motor failure detection
N/A
A jam is notified when the cassette pickup motors are failed. HCI pickup-and-feed operation The 3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) feeder picks up one sheet of paper in the paper feeder cassette and feeds it to the product. HCI electrical components The 3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) feeder has two cassettes and each of them operates in the same manner. Figure 5-99 HCI electrical components
Table 5-66 HCI electrical components
ENWW
Abbreviation
Component name
Signal
M3301
Right cassette pickup motor
HCI RIGHT CASSETTE PICKUP MOTOR CONTROL signal
M3302
Right cassette lifter motor
HCI RIGHT CASSETTE LIFTER MOTOR CONTROL signal
M3303
Left cassette lifter motor
HCI LEFT CASSETTE LIFTER MOTOR CONTROL signal
Theory of operation 287
HP Confidential Table 5-66 HCI electrical components (continued) Abbreviation
Component name
Signal
M3304
Left cassette pickup motor
HCI LEFT CASSETTE PICKUP MOTOR CONTROL signal
SL3301
Right cassette pickup solenoid
HCI RIGHT CASSETTE PICKUP SOLENOID signal
SL3302
Left cassette pickup solenoid
HCI LEFT CASSETTE PICKUP SOLENOID signal
CL3301
Right cassette pickup clutch
HCI RIGHT CASSETTE PICKUP CLUTCH signal
CL3302
Left cassette pickup clutch
HCI LEFT CASSETTE PICKUP CLUTCH signal
SW3301
Right door open detection switch
HCI RIGHT DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal
SW3302
Right cassette open detection switch
HCI RIGHT CASSETTE OPEN DETECTION signal
SW3303
Left cassette open detection switch
HCI LEFT CASSETTE OPEN DETECTION signal
PS3101
Right cassette lift-up media-surface sensor
HCI RIGHT CASSETTE MEDIA STACK SURFACE 2 signal
PS3102
Right cassette pickup coordinate media-surface sensor
HCI RIGHT CASSETTE MEDIA STACK SURFACE 1 signal
PS3103
Right cassette media-presence sensor
HCI RIGHT CASSETTE MEDIA OUT signal
PS3201
Left cassette lift-up media-surface sensor
HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA STACK SURFACE 2 signal
PS3202
Left cassette pickup coordinate media-surface sensor
HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA STACK SURFACE 1 signal
PS3203
Left cassette media-presence sensor
HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA OUT signal
PS3301
Media-feed sensor
HCI MEDIA FEED signal
PS3302
Right cassette media-feed sensor
HCI RIGHT CASSETTE MEDIA FEED signal
PS3303
Right cassette media-size sensor
HCI RIGHT CASSETTE MEDIA SIZE signal
PS3304
Left cassette media-size sensor
HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA SIZE signal
PS3305
Left cassette media-feed sensor
HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA FEED signal
PS3306
Side feed guide open detection sensor
HCI LONG EDGE FEED GUIDE OPEN DETECTION signal
PS3308
Right cassette media-level sensor
HCI RIGHT CASSETTE MEDIA LEVEL signal
PS3309
Left cassette media-level sensor
HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA LEVEL signal
HCI lift-up operation The HCI lifts up the tray to keep the surface of the paper at the pickup position whenever any of the following occur:
288 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
●
The product is turned on.
●
The cassette is installed.
●
The paper stack surface lowers as a result of the pickup operation.
Figure 5-100 HCI lift-up operation mechanism
The figure above illustrates the mechanism for the left cassette, but each HCI cassette has the same mechanism. The operational sequence of the lift-up is as follows: 1.
The HCI cassette lifter motor rotates the pulley to reel the wire. The tray moves up.
2.
The HCI cassette lifter motor stops when the HCI cassette media stack surface sensor detects the paper surface.
3.
The HCI cassette lifter motor rotates again when the HCI cassette media stack surface sensor detects that the stack surface lowers during a print operation.
The HCI controller determines an HCI cassette lifter motor failure and notifies the formatter through the DC controller when the HCI cassette media stack surface 2 sensor does not detect the paper surface within a specified period from when the HCI cassette lifter motor starts rotating. HCI cassette media-size detection and cassette-presence detection The HCI controller detects whether the paper loaded in the cassette is A4-R or Letter-R size by monitoring the cassette media-size sensors and notifies the formatter through the DC controller. The HCI controller also detects the presence of the cassette by monitoring the cassette open detection switches and notifies the formatter through the DC controller. These detections are not executed during Sleep mode. HCI jam detection The 3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) feeder uses the following sensors to detect the presence of the paper and to check whether the paper is being fed correctly or has jammed:
ENWW
Theory of operation 289
HP Confidential
●
Media-feed sensor (PS3301)
●
Right cassette media-feed sensor (PS3302)
●
Left cassette media-feed sensor (PS3305)
Figure 5-101 HCI jam sensor location
Jam
Causes and conditions
HCI no pick jam 1
●
From right cassette The right cassette media-feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the right cassette pickup solenoid is turned on.
●
From left cassette The left cassette media-feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the left cassette pickup solenoid is turned on.
HCI no pick jam 3
●
From right cassette The media-feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the right cassette media-feed sensor detects the leading edge.
●
From left cassette The media-feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the left cassette media-feed sensor detects the leading edge.
HCI no pick jam 4
The MP tray (Tray 1) media-feed sensor in the product does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the media-feed sensor detects the leading edge.
HCI Residual paper jam
Any one of the following sensor detects a paper presence when the product is turned off, when the door is closed or when the product is released from Power-save mode (Sleep mode, active off or inactive off):
HCI right door open jam
290 Chapter 5 Support
●
Media-feed sensor
●
Right cassette media-feed sensor
●
Left cassette media-feed sensor
The right door open is detected during a paper feed operation.
ENWW
HP Confidential
Intermediate paper transportation unit The intermediate paper transportation unit (IPTU) is optionally installed on the face-down delivery part of the product. The IPTU feeds the printed paper to the output accessory. The IPTU driver controls the operational sequence of the IPTU. Figure 5-102 IPTU installation and paper path
IPTU electrical components The following figure shows the signal flow of the IPTU driver. Figure 5-103 IPTU driver signal flow
ENWW
Theory of operation 291
HP Confidential Table 5-67 IPTU electrical components Component type
Abbreviation
Component name
Motor
M201
Feed motor 2
M202
Feed motor 1
Fan
FM201
Feed area fan
Photointerrupter
SR201
Feed sensor 3
SR202
Feed sensor 2
SR203
Feed sensor 1
SR204
SR204
IPTU motor control The intermediate paper transportation unit has two motors for the paper-feed. Table 5-68 IPTU motor specifications Component name
Component driven
M201
Feed motor 2
Feed roller
M202
Feed motor 1
Feed roller
Feed operation The paper is delivered to the finishing accessory through the IPTU. Figure 5-104 Motors and sensors of the IPTU
Component name
Signal
Driver
IPTU feed motor 2 M201
IPTU feed motor 2 control signal
IPTU driver
IPTU feed motor 1 M202
IPTU feed motor 1 control signal
IPTU driver
IPTU media feed sensor 3 SR201
IPTU media feed 3 signal
IPTU driver
IPTU media feed sensor 2 SR202
IPTU media feed 2 signal
IPTU driver
IPTU media feed sensor 1 SR203
IPTU media feed 1 signal
IPTU driver
IPTU door open detection sensor SR204
IPTU door open detection signal
IPTU driver
292 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
IPTU sequence 1.
The paper is fed into the IPTU after fusing.
2.
The DC controller sends a drive command to the IPTU driver after the fusing delivery media feed sensor detects the leading edge of paper.
3.
When it receives a command, the IPTU driver drives the IPTU feed motors to rotate the PD media feed rollers.
4.
The IPTU feed rollers feed the paper to the accessory.
IPTU motor failure detection The IPTU driver does not detect the motor failures. A jam is notified when the feed motors are failed. IPTU fan control The intermediate paper transportation unit has one fan for preventing the temperature from rising in the intermediate paper transportation unit. Table 5-69 IPTU fan specifications Component name
Cooling area
Type
Speed
FM201
Inside of the intermediate paper transportation unit
Intake
Full
Feed area fan
IPTU fan failure detection The IPTU driver determines the following fan failure. Table 5-70 IPTU fan failure Failure detective function
Applied
Feed area fan failure detection
Yes
The DC controller determines a fan failure and notifies the formatter when the feed area fan locks for a specified period from when it starts up. IPTU jam detection The intermediate paper transportation unit uses the following sensors to detect the presence of the paper and to check whether the paper is being fed correctly or has jammed:
ENWW
●
Feed sensor 1 (SR203)
●
Feed sensor 2 (SR202)
Theory of operation 293
HP Confidential
●
Feed sensor 3 (SR201)
●
Door open detection sensor (SR204)
Figure 5-105 IPTU jam detection sensors
The intermediate paper transportation unit detects the following jams. Table 5-71 IPTU jam detection Jam
Applied
Delivery delay jam 1
Yes
Delivery delay jam 2
Yes
Delivery stay jam 1
Yes
Residual paper jam
Yes
Door open jam
Yes
Output accessories Stapler/stacker and stapler/stacker with hole punch The stapler/stacker is optionally installed at side of the product. The stapler/stacker delivers the printed paper directly to the output bin or delivers the set of printed paper after stapling to the output bin. The stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly has the hole punching function in addition to the standard stapler/stacker function. The stacker controller controls the operational sequence of the stapler/stacker. The
294 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
stacker controller and the hole punch controller control the operational sequence of the stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly. Figure 5-106 Stapler/stacker installation and paper path
ENWW
Theory of operation 295
HP Confidential
Figure 5-107 Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly installation and paper path
296 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Stapler/stacker electrical components The following figure shows the signal flow of the stacker controller. Figure 5-108 Stacker controller signal flow
ENWW
Theory of operation 297
HP Confidential Table 5-72 Stapler/stacker electrical components Component type
Abbreviation
Component name
Motor
M41
Staple motor
M61
Hole punch motor (Stapler/stacker with puncher assembly only)
M62
Side registration motor (Stapler/stacker with puncher assembly only)
M63
Hole punch feed motor (Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly only)
M101
Inlet motor
M102
Stack ejection motor
M103
Front alignment plate motor
M104
Rear alignment plate motor
M105
Stapler mobility motor
M106
Swing motor
M107
Output bin 1 shift motor
M108
Output bin 2 shift motor
M109
Trailing edge assist motor
M110
Gear change motor
M113
Saddle inlet motor
SL101
Inlet roller alienation solenoid
SL102
Buffer roller alienation solenoid
SL103
Delivery roller alienation solenoid
SL104
Buffer trailing edge retainer solenoid
CL101
Shutter open-close clutch
CL102
Stack ejection lower roller clutch
MSW61
Top door open detection switch (Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly only)
MSW62
Front door open detection switch (Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly only)
MSW101
Front cover close detection switch
MSW102
Swing guide open detection switch
MSW103
Output bin 1 close detection switch
MSW104
Staple safety switch
Solenoid
Clutch
Switch
298 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-72 Stapler/stacker electrical components (continued) Component type
Abbreviation
Component name
Photointerrupter
PI61
Side registration home position sensor (Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly only)
PI62
Hole punch motor clock sensor (Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly only)
PI63
Hole punch home position sensor (Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly only)
PI101
Top cover open detection sensor
PI102
Front cover open detection sensor
PI103
Inlet sensor
PI104
Paper path sensor
PI105
Swing guide home position sensor
PI106
Front alignment plate home position sensor
PI107
Rear alignment plate home position sensor
PI108
Processing tray media-presence sensor
PI109
Trailing edge assist home position sensor
PI110
Staple shift home position sensor
PI111
Output bin 1 media-presence sensor
PI112
Output bin 2 media-presence sensor
PI113
Shutter home position sensor
PI114
Output bin 1 media-surface sensor
PI115
Output bin 2 media-surface sensor 1
PI116
Stapler alignment interference sensor
PI117
Gear home position sensor
PI120
Output bin 2 media-surface sensor 2 (newly added electrical component)
PI123
Swing height sensor (newly added electrical component)
-
Output bin 1 shift area sensor PCA
-
Output bin 2 shift area sensor PCA
-
LED PCA (Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly only)
-
Photosensor PCA (Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly only)
-
Hole punch chip box full sensor PCA (Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly only)
Sensor PCA
Stapler/stacker motor control The stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly has an additional three motors in the hole puncher assembly.
ENWW
Theory of operation 299
HP Confidential Table 5-73 Stapler/stacker motor control Abbreviation
Component name
Component driven
M61
Hole punch motor
Hole punch assembly
M62
Hole punch feed motor
Hole punch feed roller
M63
Side registration motor
Hole punch slide assembly
Stapler/stacker motor failure detection The stacker controller determines the following motor failures. Table 5-74 Stapler/stacker motor failure detection Failure detective function
Applied
Hole punch motor failure detection
Yes
Hole punch feed motor failure detection
N/A
Side registration motor failure detection
Yes
A jam is sent to the formatter if the hole punch feed motor fails.
300 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Stapler/stacker feed-and-delivery operation The following figure shows the diagrammatic sketch of the electrical components for the feed-and-delivery operation of the stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly. Figure 5-109 Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly feed-and-delivery electrical components
Table 5-75 Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly feed-and-delivery electrical components
ENWW
Abbreviation
Component name
M41
Staple motor
M63
Hole punch feed motor (Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly only)
Theory of operation 301
HP Confidential Table 5-75 Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly feed-and-delivery electrical components (continued) Abbreviation
Component name
M101
Inlet motor
M102
Stack ejection motor
M103
Front alignment plate motor
M104
Rear alignment plate motor
M105
Stapler mobility motor
M107
Output bin 1 shift motor
M108
Output bin 2 shift motor
M109
Trailing edge assist motor
M113
Saddle inlet motor
SL101
Inlet roller alienation solenoid
SL102
Buffer roller alienation solenoid
SL103
Delivery roller alienation solenoid
SL104
Buffer trailing edge retainer solenoid
PI103
Inlet sensor
PI104
Paper path sensor
PI111
Output bin 1 media-presence sensor
PI112
Output bin 2 media-presence sensor
-
LED PCA (Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly only)
-
Photosensor PCA (Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly only)
302 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Stapler/stacker basic operation The stapler/stacker delivers jobs from the product several ways. The modes of delivery include simple stacking, job offset, and stapling. The stacker controller PCA controls all operations involved in these modes, according to the commands from the product. Figure 5-110 Basic operation of the stapler/stacker
NOTE: With job offset, each sheet of a job is shifted to one side in the output bin in order to keep each sheet separate from the others. Stapler/stacker electrical circuitry The stacker controller PCA controls the stacker operation sequence. A 16-bit microprocessor (CPU) is installed on the stacker controller PCA to control the stacker operation sequence and CAN communication with the video controller PCA. The stacker controller PCA drives solenoids, motors, and so forth in response to the commands received from the video controller through the CAN communication line. In addition, the stacker controller PCA reports information about various sensors and switches to the video controller through the CAN communication line. Major functions of the IC chips installed on the stacker controller PCA are as follows:
ENWW
●
IC13 (CPU): Controls the operation sequence
●
IC10 (EEP-ROM): Backs up adjustment values
●
IC6 (Communication IC): Communicates with the host machine
Theory of operation 303
HP Confidential
●
IC8 (Regulator IC): Generates 5 Yes
●
IC14 (Regulator IC): Generates 3.3 Yes
Figure 5-111 Electrical circuitry of the stapler/stacker
Stapler/stacker feed drive system Based on commands from the product, the stapler/stacker delivers jobs to the output bins in the appropriate mode: simple stacking, job offset, and stapling. Figure 5-112 Electrical circuitry of the stapler/stacker
304 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Figure 5-113 Output bins of the stapler/stacker
Paper delivery path (stapler/stacker and booklet maker) There are two paper paths to output bin 1 and output bin 2 depending on the ejection process.
ENWW
Theory of operation 305
HP Confidential
All sheets are ejected through the following path when the accessory is set to non-sort. Figure 5-114 Paper path when set to non-sort
When the product sorts paper size other than A4, B5, or LTR or when set to staple and sort, copies are delivered to the processing output bin for aligning and stapling and then ejected using the stack trailing-edge assist.
306 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Figure 5-115 Paper path for sizes other than A4, B5, or LTR
With A4, B5, or LTR paper sizes, two sheets of paper feed into the buffer (two or three sheets if 2-point stapling). The sheets are then aligned and stapled in the processing output bin and ejected. While stapling or offset is performed, copies are simultaneously ejected, delivered to the buffer, and stacked in the processing output bin. Copies are received continuously from the product. The stack delivered from the buffer is ejected to the processing output bin, and the stack processed in the processing output bin is ejected to the output bin. Simultaneous stack ejection is described below for two A4 copies between stacks when the equipment is set to sort.
ENWW
Theory of operation 307
HP Confidential
1.
When the first paper reaches the switchback point, it is sent to the buffer unit, and the buffer guide holds the trailing edge of the paper. Figure 5-116 Paper path (1 of 5)
2.
When the first sheet arrives at the buffer, the second sheet is sent from the product. Figure 5-117 Paper path (2 of 5)
3.
The first delivery roller descends and works with the stack-delivery roller to deliver the first and second sheet to the processing output bin. At the same time, the return roller and stack trailing-edge assist send the stack in the processing output bin to the output bin. Figure 5-118 Paper path (3 of 5)
308 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
4.
When the stack in the processing output bin is sent to the delivery output bin and the trailing edge of the first and second paper exits the first delivery roller, the stack-delivery roller and return roller deliver the first and second sheet to the processing output bin. Figure 5-119 Paper path (4 of 5)
5.
The first and second paper delivered to the processing output bin are aligned and then delivered to the output bin. Figure 5-120 Paper path (5 of 5)
Stack operation Output bin operation This accessory has an upper output bin (output-bin 1) and a lower output bin (output-bin 2).
ENWW
●
The output-bin-1-shift motor (M37) and output-bin-2-shift motor (M38) move output-bin 1 and outputbin 2 up and down independently.
●
The output-bin-1 paper sensor (PI42) and output-bin-2 paper sensor (PI43) detect paper stacked on the output bin.
●
The output-bin-1 paper-surface sensor (PI41) and output-bin-2 paper-surface sensor (PI48) detect the home positions of output-bin 1 and output-bin 2.
●
The home position is the top surface of the paper when paper is stacked on the output bin, or the position where the edge of the output bin is detected when no paper is stacked.
●
When the power is turned on, the stacker controller PCA drives the output-bin-1-shift motor (M37) and output-bin-2-shift motor (M38) to return the output bin to home position. If already at home position,
Theory of operation 309
HP Confidential
the output bin is moved from the home position and then returned. If both output bins are at home position, this is performed for output-bin 1 and then for output-bin 2. ●
If the product specifies output-bin 2, the stacker controller PCA shifts the output bin so that output-bin 2 is at the delivery port. When paper is stacked on the output bin, a prescribed number of pulses drive the output-bin-1-shift motor (M37) or output-bin-2-shift motor (M38) to lower the output bin. Then the output bin returns to home position to prepare for the next stack.
●
The upper and lower limits of the output bin are detected by three area sensors (PS981, PS982, and PS983) on the output-bin-1- and output-bin-2-shift area sensor PCA.
●
The stacker controller PCA stops driving the output-bin-1-shift motor (M37) and output-bin-2-shift motor (M38) when it detects the upper or lower limit of the output bin. Also, the on/off combinations of the area sensors (PS981, PS982, PS983) are used to detect over-stacking according to the stack height for large-size and mixed stacking.
●
The stacker controller PCA stops supplying +24 Yes to the output-bin-1-shift motor (M37) and stops the stacker operation when the output-bin-1 switch (MS33) turns on.
Figure 5-121 Items detected by the area sensors (PS981, PS982, PS983)
NOTE: PI42 is located on output-bin 1. NOTE: PI43 is located on output-bin 2.
310 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Figure 5-122 Output-bin components
The output bin capacity is changed. Accordingly the ON/OFF combinations of the area sensors (PS981, PS982 and PS983) to determine an over-stacking are changed as following: Table 5-76 Stapler/stacker output bin 1shift area sensor PCA Detection item
Output bin 1shift area sensor PCA Area sensor 1
Area sensor 2
Area sensor 3
(PS983)
(PS982)
(PS981)
Output bin 1 upper limit
ON
OFF
OFF
Stack count 650 sheets exceeded
ON
ON
ON
Stack count 1,300 sheets exceeded
ON
ON
ON
Output bin 1 lower limit
ON
ON
OFF
Table 5-77 Stapler/stacker output bin 2shift area sensor PCA Detection item
ENWW
Output bin 2shift area sensor PCA Area sensor 1
Area sensor 2
Area sensor 3
(PS983)
(PS982)
(PS981)
Output bin 2 upper limit
ON
OFF
ON
Stack count 650 sheets exceeded
ON
ON
ON
Stack count 1,300 sheets exceeded
OFF
ON
ON
Stack count 1,700 sheets exceeded
OFF
OFF
ON
Output bin 2 lower limit
OFF
ON
OFF
Theory of operation 311
HP Confidential
Process output bin paper-stacking operation When the trailing edge of the paper exits the first delivery roller, the sheet is delivered to the processing output bin by the stack-delivery roller and return roller and then pushed against the processing output-bin stopper. Figure 5-123 Process output bin
Shutter operation To prevent the delivery section from catching stacked paper in output-bin 1 when it passes, a shutter is provided at the delivery section. The shutter closes when output-bin 1 passes, even when no paper is stacked. When the shutter clutch (CL31) and stack-ejection lower-roller clutch (CL32) are on, the shutter moves up (closes) when the stack-ejection motor (M32) turns forward and moves down (open, delivery enabled), which occurs when the motor turns backward. The shutter home-position sensor (PI45) detects the opening and closing of the shutter. Figure 5-124 Shutter location
312 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Stack delivery operation The stack is ejected each time 2-4 large sheets or 2-6 small sheets are offset on the processing output bin. The swing motor turns and the swing guide descends causing the upper and lower stack-delivery rollers to hold the stack. The stack-delivery motor turns the stack-delivery roller and return roller. At the same time, the stack trailing-edge assist motor starts the stack trailing-edge assist guide, and the stack held by the stack-delivery rollers is moved forward. When the stack trailing-edge assist motor reverses, the stack trailing-edge assist guide returns to home position. The stack-delivery motor then ejects the stack with the upper and lower stack-delivery rollers. Figure 5-125 Stack delivery
Stapler/stacker offset operation Each sheet is pulled forward or backward using the front-aligning plate and the rear-aligning plate. The offset operation is performed each time a sheet is pulled onto the processing output bin. Figure 5-126 Job offset operation (1 of 2)
ENWW
Theory of operation 313
HP Confidential
Figure 5-127 Job offset operation (2 of 2)
Stack trailing-edge assist operation To improve stacking performance when ejecting jobs delivered to the processing output bin, a stack trailingedge assist guide supports the back of the stack during stack ejection. Figure 5-128 Stack trailing-edge assist operation
Intermediate-process output-bin assembly Stack job offset The job-offset operation offsets the paper stack to the front or rear when ejecting to sort the paper stack. The forward/backward movement of the sheet delivered to the processing output bin is controlled by the front-aligning plate and rear-aligning plate. The aligned copies are stapled or ejected according to the signal from the product. When the power is turned on, the stacker controller PCA drives the aligning-plate front
314 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
motor (M33) and aligning-plate rear motor (M34) to return the two aligning plates to home position. The name and function of motors and sensors used by the stack job-offset function are shown below. Figure 5-129 Motors and sensors for stack job offset
Figure 5-130 Stack job offset example
Table 5-78 Motors for the stack job offset Motor
Function
Front-aligning-plate motor (M33)
Aligns paper in the processing output bin to the front
Rear-aligning-plate motor (M34)
Aligns paper in the processing output bin to the rear
Swing motor (M36)
Moves the swing guide up/down
Stack trailing-edge assist motor (M39)
Carry the stack end during stack ejection
Table 5-79 Sensors for the stack job offset
ENWW
Sensor
Function
Swing-guide home-position (HP) sensor (PI35)
Detects the swing guide home position
Front-aligning-plate HP sensor (PI36)
Detects the aligning plate front-home position
Rear-aligning-plate HP sensor (PI37)
Detects the aligning plate rear-home position
Stack trailing-edge assist HP sensor (PI39)
Detects the stack trailing-edge assist home-position
Theory of operation 315
HP Confidential
Stapler/stacker delivery modes The stapler/stacker supports the following delivery modes. Table 5-80 Stapler/stacker delivery modes Feed
Staple
Punch
Offset
Applied
Face-down
N
N/A
N
Yes
Face-down
N
N/A
Y
Yes
Face-down
Y
N/A
N
Yes
Face-down
Y
N/A
Y
N/A
Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly delivery modes The stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly supports the following delivery modes. Table 5-81 Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly delivery modes Feed
Staple
Punch
Offset
Applied
Face-down
N
N
N
Yes
Face-down
N
N
Y
Yes
Face-down
Y
N
N
Yes
Face-down
Y
N
Y
N/A
Face-down
N
Y
N
Yes
Face-down
N
Y
Y
Yes
Face-down
Y
Y
N
Yes
Face-down
Y
Y
Y
N/A
Staple operation The stapling operation staples the prescribed number of copies with the stapler unit. The staple position depends on the staple mode and paper size. The stapler-shift home-position sensor (PI40) detects whether the stapler unit is at the home position. The stapler unit is equipped with a stapler-alignment interference sensor (PI46). The staple motor (M41) operation is prohibited when the stapler-alignment interference sensor (PI46) is on. This prevents stapling at the stopper and damaging the stopper when the stapler-shift motor (M35) is incorrectly adjusted.
316 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
When the power is turned on, the stacker controller PCA drives the stapler-shift motor (M35) to return the stapler unit to home position. If the stapler unit is already at home position, it waits in that state. Figure 5-131 Stapler unit
Figure 5-132 Staple location
Table 5-82 Sensors used in stapling
ENWW
Sensor
Symbol
Connector
Function
Stapler-shift homeposition sensor
PI40
J721B-6
Detects the home position for the stapler moving back and forth
Stapler-alignment interference sensor
PI46
J717-3
Staple prohibited area detection
Stapler home-position sensor
PI50
J717-5
Detects the home position for the stapling operation
Remarks
In the stapler
Theory of operation 317
HP Confidential Table 5-82 Sensors used in stapling (continued) Sensor
Symbol
Connector
Function
Remarks
Staple edging sensor
PI51
J717-6
Detects the staple top position
In the stapler
Staple sensor
PI52
J717-7
Detects presence or absence of staples in the cartridge
In the stapler
Table 5-83 Motors used in stapling Function
Motor
Symbol
Moves the stapler
Stapler-shift motor
M35
Performs the stapling operation
Staple motor
M41
Remarks
The stacker controller PCA moves the stapler according to the specified stapling position. When the rear of the first sheet passes the first delivery roller, the stacker controller PCA stops the stack-delivery motor (M32) and then rotates it in reverse. The stack-delivery motor rotates the stack-delivery roller and return roller and delivers the paper to the processing output bin. The paper in the processing output bin is detected by the processing-output-bin paper sensor (PI38). When the paper is delivered to the processing output bin, the swing motor (M36) starts and raises the swing guide. When the swing-guide home-position sensor (PI35) detects the rising of the swing guide, the swing-guide motor stops and holds the swing guide at the raised position. After the processing-output-bin paper sensor detects the paper, the aligning motor (M33/M34) starts and aligns the paper. Figure 5-133 Paper path for stapling
318 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Figure 5-134 Rollers and sensors for stapling
The stacker controller PCA starts the swing motor (M36) and lowers the swing guide when the rear of the second paper passes the first delivery roller. The stack-delivery motor is reversed. The stack-delivery motor rotates the stack-delivery roller (upper) and return roller and sends the paper to the processing output bin. At this point, the stack-delivery roller (lower) does not rotate because the stack-ejection lower-roller clutch (CL32) is disengaged. The output-bin paper sensor (PI38) detects the processing-output-bin paper sensor (P138). When the paper is delivered to the processing output bin, the swing motor (M36) starts and raises the swing guide. When the swing-guide home-position sensor (PI35) detects the rising of the swing guide, the swing-guide motor stops and holds the swing guide at the raised position. After the processing-output-bin paper sensor detects the paper, the aligning motor (M33/M34) starts and aligns the paper. Figure 5-135 Paper path
When the last sheet is aligned, the stacker controller PCA moves the aligning plate to the alignment position with the aligning motor (M33/M34) (the paper is held by the aligning plate). Then the stacker controller PCA staples at the specified staple position. After stapling, the stacker controller PCA starts the swing motor (M36) and lowers the swing guide. Then the stack is ejected by the stack-delivery roller, return roller, and stack trailing-edge assist guide.
ENWW
Theory of operation 319
HP Confidential
Figure 5-136 Shift process for the staple unit
Staple unit The stapler motor (M41) rotates the cam one turn for stapling. The stapler home-position sensor (PI50) detects the home position of the cam. The macro computer (IC13) on the stacker controller PCA controls the forward and reverse rotation of the staple motor. When the stapler home-position sensor is off, the stacker controller PCA rotates the stapler motor in the forward direction until the sensor turns on, allowing the staple cam to return to the original position. The staple sensor (PI52) is used to detect the presence or absence of a staple cartridge in the machine and the presence or absence of staples in the cartridge. The staple edging sensor (PI51) determines whether staples are pushed up to the top of the staple cartridge. For safety, the stacker controller circuit does not drive the staple motor (M41) unless the staple safety switch (MS34) is on. Figure 5-137 Stapling operation (1 of 2)
320 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Figure 5-138 Stapling operation (2 of 2)
Shift the staple unit The stapler-shift motor (M35) shifts the stapler unit. The stapler-shift home-position sensor (PI40) detects the home position. When there is a staple command from the product, the stapler shifts to the staple ready
ENWW
Theory of operation 321
HP Confidential
position, which depends on the stapling position and paper size. The stapler unit waits at the following points when staple mode is selected: Figure 5-139 Front 1-point stapling
Figure 5-140 Rear 1-point stapling
322 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Figure 5-141 2-point stapling
Hole puncher assembly The stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly has either one of the 2-hole/3-hole puncher assembly or 2hole/4-hole puncher assembly so that it operates two types of hole punching functions.
ENWW
Theory of operation 323
HP Confidential
The puncher assembly has following two functions: ●
Side registration operation
●
Hole punching operation (2-hole/3-hole or 2-hole/4-hole)
Figure 5-142 Hole puncher assembly
Side registration operation The side registration operation detects the trailing edge of paper by the side registration sensor and trailing edge sensor, and moves the hole punch slide assembly to the proper punching position according to the paper size.
324 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
The side registration sensor and the trailing edge sensor consist of 5 sets of sensors on the paper path of the hole puncher assembly inlet. The photo sensors are located upper side and the LEDs are located lower side so that the paper passes through between them. Operational sequence of the side registration operation is as follows:
ENWW
1.
When the trailing edge sensor detects the leading edge of paper, the hole punch controller drives the side registration motor so that the hole punch slide assembly moves toward front side of the stapler/ stacker from its home position.
2.
The side registration sensor detects the side edge of paper according to the MEDIA SIZE signal sent from the product.
3.
The hole punch controller drives the side registration motor so that the hole punch slide assembly moves further toward front side of the stapler/stacker to its specified position.
4.
When the trailing edge sensor detects the trailing edge of paper, the hole punch controller stops the hole punch feed motor accordingly the paper stops.
Theory of operation 325
HP Confidential
5.
The punch controller drives the punch motor to punch holes in the paper.
6.
When the hole punching operation is completed, the hole punch controller drives the hole punch feed motor and reverses the side registration motor so that the hole punch slide assembly moves back to its home position.
If the following paper requires the punching operation, the hole punch slide assembly moves back to its home position every paper and step 1) to 6) are repeated. Hole punching operation (2-hole/3-hole puncher assembly) The 2-hole/3-hole puncher assembly punches 2 holes or 3 holes in the trailing edge of paper. Five offcentering cams are on the hole punch shaft; two off-centering cams with punch for 2-hole punching and three off-centering cams with punch for 3-hole punching. The sensor flag is also on the hole punch shaft, and the hole punch home position sensor detects the home position of hole punch shaft. The hole punch home position for 3-hole punching is shifted 180 degrees from the hole punch home position for 2-hole punching. When the hole punch shaft is at home position, the hole punch home position sensor is turned on. The hole punch motor clock sensor counts the clock pulse of hole punch motor by the encoder on the shaft so that the hole punch controller stops the hole hole punch motor at its home position. Accordingly the hole hole punch shaft stops at either home position for 2-hole punching or 3-hole punching. A hole punching is operated by turning the hole punch shaft for 180 degrees from its home position. The hole punch chips are collected into the hole punch chip box. The hole punch chip box full sensor detects if the box is filled with punch chips. Operational sequence of the hole punching operation for 2-hole punching in 2 sheets of paper is as follows: 1.
The hole punch controller drives the hole punch motor to rotate the hole punch shaft for 180 degrees clockwise.
326 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
2.
The hole punch home position sensor turns on and the hole punching operation in the first sheet is completed.
3.
The hole punch controller drives the hole punch motor to rotate the hole punch shaft for 180 degrees counter clockwise.
4.
The hole punch home position sensor turns on and the hole punching operation in the second sheet is completed.
When operating 3-hole punching in 2 sheets of paper, the hole punch shaft for 3-hole punching is rotated for 180 degrees counter clockwise from its home position and then for 180 degrees clockwise. Hole punching operation (2-hole/4-hole hole puncher assembly) The 2-hole/4-hole puncher assembly punches 2 holes or 4 holes in the trailing edge of paper. Four offcentering cams are on the punch shaft; two off-centering cams with punch for 2-hole punching and two offcentering cams with punch for outside 4-hole punching. The sensor flag is also on the hole punch shaft, and the hole punch home position sensor detects the home position of the hole punch shaft. When the hole punch
ENWW
Theory of operation 327
HP Confidential
shaft is at home position, the hole punch home position sensor is turned on. The hole punch motor clock sensor counts the clock pulse of hole punch motor by the encoder on the shaft so that the hole punch controller stops the punch motor at its home position. Accordingly the hole punch shaft stops at either home position for 2-hole punching or 4-hole punching. A punching of 2-hole is operated by turning the hole punch shaft for 180 degrees from its home position. A punching of 4-hole is operated by turning the hole punch shaft for 360 degrees from its home position first to punch inside 2 holes and then outside 2 holes. The hole punch chips are collected into the punch chip box. The punch chip box full sensor detects if the box is filled with hole punch chips. Operational sequence of the hole punching operation for 4-hole punching in a sheet of paper is as follows: 1.
The hole punch controller drives the hole punch motor to rotate the hole punch shaft for 90 degrees clockwise.
2.
Inside 2 holes' punching is operated.
3.
The hole punch controller drives the hole punch motor to rotate the hole punch shaft for 180 degrees clockwise.
4.
The hole punch home position sensor turns on and inside 2 holes' punching operation is completed.
5.
The hole punch controller drives the hole punch motor to rotate the punch shaft for 270 degrees clockwise.
6.
Outside 2 holes' punching is operated.
328 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
7.
The hole punch controller drives the punch motor to rotate the hole punch shaft for 360 degrees clockwise.
8.
The hole punch home position sensor turns on and outside 2 holes' punching operation is completed.
Figure 5-143 Operation of 4-hole punching
Stapler/stacker additional functions The stapler/stacker has the following additional pickup, feed and delivery functions. Table 5-84 Stapler/stacker additional pickup, feed and delivery functions
ENWW
Function
Applied
Swing height detection control
Yes
Registration shutter skew correction function (Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly only)
Yes
Theory of operation 329
HP Confidential Table 5-84 Stapler/stacker additional pickup, feed and delivery functions (continued) Function
Applied
Side registration detection (Stapler/stacker with puncher assembly only)
Yes
Hole punch operation with unshared hole punch (2-hole/3-hole) function (Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly only)
Yes
Hoel punch operation with shared hole punch (2-hole/4-hole) function (Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly only)
Yes
Hole punch home position detection (Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly only)
Yes
Hole punch chip box full detection (Stapler/stacker with hole puncher assembly only)
Yes
Stapler/stacker jam detection The following sensors detect paper and determine whether paper is delivered properly. ●
Stacking paper-path-entry sensor (PI33)
●
Stacking paper-path-delivery sensor (PI34)
A jam is identified by checking whether paper is present at each sensor at the timing programmed in the memory of the microcomputer (CPU) on the stacker controller PCA. When the CPU identifies a jam, it suspends the stacker's delivery operation and informs the product of the jam. When all doors are closed after the paper jam is removed, the stacker use the two sensors (stacking paper-path-entry sensor and stacking
330 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
paper-path-delivery sensor) to check for further jams. If the sensors detect paper, the stacker determines that the paper jam has not been removed and sends another jam removal signal to the product. Figure 5-144 Jam detection sensors
Hole puncher assembly jam detection The hole puncher assembly uses the following sensors to detect the presence of the paper and to check whether the paper is being fed correctly or has jammed:
ENWW
Theory of operation 331
HP Confidential
●
Hole punch home position sensor (PI63)
●
Hole punch motor clock sensor (PI62)
●
Trailing edge detection sensor (LED5, PTR5)
Figure 5-145 Hole puncher assembly sensor location
The stapler/stacker detects the following additional jams. Table 5-85 Stapler/stacker jam detection Function
Applied
Hole punch path delay jam
Yes
Hole punch path stay jam
Yes
Hole punching jam
Yes
Residual paper jam (puncher assembly)
Yes
Stapler/stacker assembly jam detection The stapler/stacker assembly uses the following sensors to detect the presence of the paper and to check whether the paper is being fed correctly or has jammed:
332 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
●
Inlet sensor (PI103)
●
Trailing edge detection sensor (LED5, PTR5, hole puncher assembly)
Figure 5-146 Stapler/stacker jam sensor location
Stapler/stacker assembly inlet delay jam
ENWW
Jam
Causes and conditions
When hole punching is not operating
The inlet sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the stacker controller receives the DELIVERY signal from the product.
When hole punching is operating
The inlet sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period of time from when the trailing edge detection sensor detects the leading edge.
Theory of operation 333
HP Confidential
Booklet maker and booklet maker with hole punch The booklet maker is optionally installed at side of the product. The booklet maker delivers the printed paper directly to the output bin, delivers the set of printed paper after stapling to the output bin or delivers the printed paper after saddle-stitching and double-folding to the saddle output bin. The booklet maker with hole puncher assembly has the hole punching function in addition to the standard staple stacker function. NOTE: The saddle function (saddle-stitching or saddle output bin delivery) is not applied to the hole punched paper. The stacker controller and the saddle stitcher controller control the operational sequence of the booklet maker. The stacker controller, saddle stitcher controller and hole punch controller control the operational sequence of the booklet maker with hole puncher assembly. Figure 5-147 Booklet maker installation and paper path
334 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Figure 5-148 Booklet maker with hole puncher assembly installation and paper path
Booklet maker power supply The stacker unit and booklet maker unit use both 5 Vdc and 24 Vdc power. Stacker unit power supply route When power is turned on, 5 Vdc and 24 Vdc are supplied from the product to the stacker controller PCA. The 24 Vdc power drives the motor, solenoid, and so on. The 5 Vdc power drives sensors, IC chips on the stacker controller PCA, and so on. Both 5 Vdc and 24 Vdc are also supplied from the stacker controller PCA to the
ENWW
Theory of operation 335
HP Confidential
saddle-stitcher controller PCA. The 24 Vdc power for the motor drive is shut down when the front door switch (MS31) is open. A block diagram of the power supply is shown as follows. Figure 5-149 Power-supply route for the stacker unit
Stacker unit protective function The 24 Vdc has a fuse or motor driver with over-current protection. Booklet maker unit power-supply route When the power to the product is turned on and the door is closed, 24 Vdc and 5 Vdc are supplied from the stacker-controller PCA as saddle stitcher power. The 24 Yes power supply to solenoids is supplied from the stacker controller PCA without passing through protection mechanisms such as microswitches. The 5 Vdc power drives sensors, IC chips on the stacker controller PCA, and so on. The 24 Yes power supply to motors is not supplied if either of the door switches of the booklet maker unit is open. Figure 5-150 Power supply route for the booklet maker unit
336 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Booklet maker unit protective function The 24 Vdc power supply for motors and solenoids comes with a circuit breaker (CB1). The 24 Yes power supply for the guide motor (M3), alignment motor (M5), and the paper-positioning plate motor (M4) comes with a fuse designed to blow when there is too much current. Booklet maker electrical components The following figure contains the staple stacker section for the electrical components for both the staple stacker assembly and hole puncher assembly. Figure 5-151 Booklet maker signal flow of the stacker, hoel punch, and saddle stitcher controllers
ENWW
Theory of operation 337
HP Confidential Table 5-86 Saddle sticher electrical components Component type
Abbreviation
Component name
Motor
M1
Feed motor
M2
Paper folding motor
M3
Guide motor
M4
Paper positioning plate motor
M5
Alignment motor
M6
Stitch motor (rear)
M7
Stitch motor (front)
M8
Paper pushing plate motor
SL1
Flapper solenoid 1
SL2
Flapper solenoid 2
SL4
Feed plate alienation solenoid
SL5
Saddle inlet solenoid
MSW3
Delivery door open detection switch
SW4
Stapler presence switch (rear)
SW5
Stitch home position switch (rear)
SW6
Stapler presence switch (front)
SW7
Stitch home position switch (front)
Solenoid
Switch
338 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-86 Saddle sticher electrical components (continued) Component type
Abbreviation
Component name
Photointerrupter
PI1
Paper pushing plate motor clock sensor
PI3
Delivery cover open detection sensor
PI4
Paper folding motor clock sensor
PI5
Alignment plate home position sensor
PI6
Saddle output bin media-presence sensor
PI7
Paper positioning plate home position sensor
PI8
Paper positioning plate media-presence sensor
PI9
Inlet cover open detection sensor
PI11
Delivery sensor
PI12
Crescent roller phase sensor
PI13
Guide home position sensor
PI14
Paper pushing plate home position sensor
PI15
Paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor
PI16
Stitcher assembly storage sensor
PI17
Paper path feed sensor
PI18
Feed sensor 1
PI19
Feed sensor 2
PI20
Feed sensor 3
PI21
Paper folding home position sensor
PI22
Saddle inlet sensor
Booklet maker motor control The booklet maker with puncher assembly has additional three motors in the puncher assembly. Table 5-87 Booklet maker motor specifications Component name
Components driven
M61
Hole punch motor
Hoel punch assembly
M62
Hole punch feed motor
Hole punch feed roller
M63
Side registration motor
Hole punch slide assembly
Booklet maker motor failure detection The stacker controller determines the following motor failures.
ENWW
Theory of operation 339
HP Confidential Table 5-88 Booklet maker motor failures Failure detective function
Applied
Hole punch motor failure detection
Yes
Hole punch feed motor failure detection
N/A
Side registration motor failure detection
Yes
Booklet maker feed-and-delivery operation Basic operation Stacker unit basic operation The stacker unit processes jobs from the product in several ways. These include simple stacking, job offset, and stapling. The stacker controller PCA controls all operations involved in these modes, according to the commands from the product. Jobs from the product can also be routed for booklet making. Figure 5-152 Stacker unit basics
Stacker unit electrical security A 16-bit microprocessor (CPU) is installed on the stacker controller PCA to control the stacker operation sequence and CAN communication with the video controller PCA. The stacker controller PCA drives solenoids, motors, and so forth in response to the commands received from the video controller through the CAN communication line. In addition, the stacker controller PCA reports information about various sensors and switches to the video controller through the CAN communication line. Major functions of the IC chips installed on the stacker controller PCA are as follows: ●
IC13 (CPU): Controls the operation sequence
●
IC10 (EEP-ROM): Backs up adjustment values
●
IC6 (Communication IC): Communicates with the host machine
340 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
●
IC12 (communication IC): Communicates with the saddle stitcher unit
●
IC8 (Regulator IC): Generates 5 Yes
●
IC14 (Regulator IC) : Generates 3.3 Yes
Figure 5-153 Electrical circuitry of the stacker unit
ENWW
Theory of operation 341
HP Confidential
Booklet maker unit basic operation The booklet maker unit staples and folds (in half) stacks of paper delivered from the stacker unit. The product sends commands via the stacker to the saddle stitcher controller PCA, which controls these operations. Figure 5-154 Booklet maker unit basics
Booklet maker unit electrical circuitry The saddle-stitcher controller PCA has a microprocessor that controls the sequence of operations and that handles serial communications with the stacker controller PCA. This includes driving solenoids and motors in response to the commands from the stacker controller PCA. The saddle-stitcher controller PCA is also used to communicate the state of various sensors and switches to the stacker controller PCA in serial. The functions of the major ICs mounted on the saddle stitcher controller PCA are as follows: ●
IC7 (CPU): Controls the sequence of operations. Contains the sequence program
●
IC8 (communications IC): Communicates with the finisher unit
342 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
●
IC512 (regulator IC): Generates 5 Yes
●
IC10 (regulator IC): Communicates with the product
Figure 5-155 Electrical circuitry for the booklet maker unit
Feed drive system The stacker unit stacks paper delivered from the product, offsets stack jobs, or staples and delivers paper to the outputs according to commands from the product. The booklet maker unit carries, aligns, and stitches paper delivered from the product, and then feeds the resulting stack. After these operations, the booklet maker unit folds the stacks of paper and delivers them to the booklet-maker-unit output bin. The delivery methods are shown in the following figure. Figure 5-156 Feed drive for the stacker unit
ENWW
Theory of operation 343
HP Confidential
Figure 5-157 Feed drive for the booklet maker unit
Construction of the stacker-unit control system The paper sent from the product is delivered to the output bin or the processing tray according to the type. Job offset or stapling is performed on paper delivered to the output bin, according to the instructions from the product. When paper ejects from the processing tray, a stack trailing-edge assist guide is used in addition to the stack-ejection roller to eject the stack. The inlet motor (M31), stack-ejection motor (M32), and stack trailing-edge assist motor (M39) are step motors. The microcomputer (CPU) in the stacker controller PCA rotates these motors forward or backward. The following two sensors in the paper delivery path detect the arrival or passing of papers: ●
Stacking paper-path-entry sensor (PI33)
●
Stacking paper-path-delivery sensor (PI34)
Each output bin also has sensors to detect the presence of a paper on the bin: ●
First output-bin paper sensor (PI42)
●
Second output-bin paper sensor (PI43)
If the sheet does not reach or pass each sensor within the prescribed time, the stacker controller PCA determines that the jam has occurred and stops the operation. It then notifies the product that a jam has occurred. After the jam is cleared and the doors are closed, the stacker unit checks whether the sheet is detected by the stacking paper path entry sensor or stacking paper path delivery sensor. If the sensors
344 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
detect a sheet of paper, the stacker unit determines that the jam is not cleared and re-sends the jam processing signal to the product. Figure 5-158 Components of the stacker unit control system (1 of 2)
ENWW
Theory of operation 345
HP Confidential
Figure 5-159 Components of the stacker unit control system (2 of 2)
Paper-delivery path for the stacker unit Construction of the booklet-maker-unit control system ●
The paper-output mechanism keeps paper from the stacker unit in place for stapling and folding.
●
The No. 1 flapper and the No. 2 flapper of the paper inlet configure the paper path to fit the paper size.
●
The paper-positioning plate is kept at a predetermined location to fit the paper size.
●
The paper-positioning-plate motor (M4) drives the paper-positioning plate, and the position of the plate is identified by the number of motor pulses coming from the paper-positioning-plate homeposition sensor (PI7).
●
The feed rollers and the crescent roller handle paper moved by the inlet roller and held in a predetermined position.
●
The feed plate moves paper by coming into contact with or moving away from paper as needed.
●
The alignment plates order the stack when paper is output. The alignment motor (M5) drives the alignment plates. The position of the alignment motor (M5) is identified by the number of motor pulses sent from the alignment-plate home-position sensor (PI5).
346 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
●
The guide plate covers the folding rollers to prevent interference between paper and the paperfolding rollers when paper is output. The guide plate moves down before paper is folded to expose the paperfolding rollers.
●
The inlet has three paper sensors (PI18, PI19, PI20) that are each suited to specific paper sizes.
●
The paper-positioning plate has a paper-positioning-plate paper sensor (PI8).
Figure 5-160 Components of the booklet-maker-unit control system
ENWW
Theory of operation 347
HP Confidential
Figure 5-161 Components of the booklet-maker control system
348 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Booklet maker paper delivery path The saddle-stitcher flapper routes paper from the product to the booklet maker unit. The booklet maker unit staples, folds and then delivers the paper to the booklet-maker-unit output bin. Figure 5-162 Booklet-maker-unit paper path
Booklet maker basic operation
ENWW
●
When receiving paper from the stacker unit, the booklet maker unit outputs paper in a vertical orientation to a vertical path.
●
Two paper-deflecting plates configure the path.
Theory of operation 349
HP Confidential
●
The paper-positioning plate sets the position of the paper so that the center of the stack matches the stapling/folding position.
●
Subsequent paper is output closer to the delivery slot. The volume of paper that can be output is as follows: 15 sheets (maximum of 14 sheets of 80 g/m2 + 1 sheet of 250 g/m2).
Figure 5-163 Paper delivery for booklet maker
The alignment plates put paper in order when it is output to the vertical-path assembly. Mounted at the edge of the-vertical path assembly, alignment plates also prepare the stack for delivery after stapling. Figure 5-164 Alignment plates
When all paper has been output, the two stitchers staple the stack. The stitchers face the center of a stack and alternate to prevent the paper from wrinkling and to limit the load on the power supply. If only one sheet arrives, stitching does not take place and the next operation (stack feeding) occurs.
350 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Figure 5-165 Stitching the stack
The booklet maker unit folds the stitched stack, and then feeds it to where the stapling position matches the height of the paper-pushing plate and the paper-folding roller nip. The paper-positioning plate moves the stack forward and the guide plate descends so that the paper-folding rollers directly face the stack.
ENWW
Theory of operation 351
HP Confidential
Figure 5-166 Position the stack
The paper-pushing plate moves the stack to the paper-folding rollers that hold the stack at its center and fold it. The paper-folding rollers and delivery roller then output the stack to the output bin.
352 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Figure 5-167 Fold and deliver the stack
Booklet maker control of the inlet flappers The two flappers mounted at the paper inlet configure the feed path according to paper size. The flappers detect the trailing edge of the paper and prevent the trailing paper from butting against the top of the existing stack. The following table shows the relationship between sensors and paper sizes. Table 5-89 Sensors and paper sizes Sensor
A3/279 mm x 432 mm (11 x 17)
B4/LGL
A4R/LTRR
No.1 paper sensor (PI18)
Used
Used
Used
No.2 paper sensor (PI19)
Not used
Used
Used
No.3 paper sensor (PI20)
Not used
Not used
Used
Each flapper is driven by its own solenoid. The following table shows the relationship between solenoids and paper sizes.
ENWW
Theory of operation 353
HP Confidential Table 5-90 Solenoids and paper sizes Sensor
A3/279 mm x 432 mm (11 x 17)
B4/LGL
A4R/LTRR
No.1 paper-deflecting solenoid (SL1)
off
on
on
No.2 paper-deflecting solenoid (SL2)
off
off
on
Figure 5-168 A3/279 mm x 432 mm (11 x 17) paper path (3 sheets)
354 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Figure 5-169 B4/LGL paper path (3 sheets)
ENWW
Theory of operation 355
HP Confidential
Figure 5-170 A4R/LTRR Paper Path (3 sheets)
Booklet maker control of paper movement ●
When the leading edge of the paper has passed the inlet flapper, the intermediate-feed roller and the crescent roller start to move the paper forward.
●
When the leading edge of the paper reaches the intermediate-feed roller, the feed-plate-contact solenoid (SL4) causes the roller to contact the path bed and move the paper forward. When the leading edge of the paper reaches the paper-positioning plate, contact is broken.
●
When the leading edge of the first sheet reaches the paper-positioning plate, the paper-positioningplate paper sensor (PI8) turns on. Subsequent sheets will not be checked because the first sheet will still be over the sensor.
356 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
●
The crescent roller rotates while sheets are output, butting the leading edge of each sheet against the paper-positioning plate and keeping the leading edge of the stack in order.
●
The alignment motor (M5) drives the alignment plates for each sheet to keep both the left and right edges of the sheet in order.
1.
The solenoid turns on while paper is being moved so that the feed plate comes into contact. Figure 5-171 Paper movement (1 of 3)
2.
The solenoid turns off when the paper touches the paper-positioning plate. The feed motor continues to rotate. Figure 5-172 Paper movement (2 of 3)
3.
The solenoid turns on when the next sheet arrives, and the feed plate comes into contact. Figure 5-173 Paper movement (3 of 3)
ENWW
Theory of operation 357
HP Confidential
Booklet maker alignment of paper The alignment motor (M5) drives the alignment plates each time paper is output, putting both left and right edges of the sheet in order. The alignment-plate motor is a four-phase stepping motor. The position of the alignment plate is identified by the number of motor pulses from the alignment-plate home-position sensor (PI5). The following briefly describes how the saddle-stitching mechanism operates on two sheets. 1.
When the first sheet is output, the alignment plates touch the left and right edges of the stack (first alignment). The alignment plates leave the home position in advance and wait at points 10 mm from the edges of the stack. Figure 5-174 Paper alignment (1 of 8)
2.
The alignment plates move away from the stack and then return (Second alignment). Figure 5-175 Paper alignment (2 of 8)
3.
The alignment plates move 10 mm from the edge of the stack. Figure 5-176 Paper alignment (3 of 8)
4.
When the stack arrives, steps 1 through 3 repeat.
358 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
5.
The alignment plates return to the stack and stitching takes place. Figure 5-177 Paper alignment (4 of 8)
6.
The alignment plates move 10 mm from the edges of the stack and folding and delivery takes place. Figure 5-178 Paper alignment (5 of 8)
ENWW
Theory of operation 359
HP Confidential
7.
When the first sheet of the following stack reaches the No. 1 paper sensor, the guide moves to 10 mm from the edge of the stack for the next alignment. Figure 5-179 Paper alignment (6 of 8)
Figure 5-180 Paper alignment (7 of 8)
Figure 5-181 Paper alignment (8 of 8)
Booklet maker control the phase of the crescent roller During alignment, the crescent roller can create friction against the roller causing the stack to move incorrectly. To prevent this problem, the crescent-roller phase sensor (PI12) identifies the phase of the crescent roller to determine the timing of alignment. The flag for the crescent-roller phase sensor is
360 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
mounted to the crescent-roller shaft. The roller shaft rotates, turning the sensor on and off. Operation of the alignment plates corresponds with the change in the state of the sensor. Figure 5-182 Crescent-roller process (1 of 4)
Figure 5-183 Crescent-roller process (2 of 4)
ENWW
Theory of operation 361
HP Confidential
Figure 5-184 Crescent-roller process (3 of 4)
Figure 5-185 Crescent-roller process (4 of 4)
Booklet maker folding The paper-folding mechanism includes a guide plate, paper-folding rollers, paper-pushing plate, and paperpositioning plate. The guide plate covers the folding rollers to prevent sheets from contacting the folding rollers during output. Before folding, the guide plate descends, allowing the folding rollers to operate. The following tables show the names and the functions of the motors and sensors used by the paper folding mechanism. Motor
Function
Paper-folding motor (M2)
Drives the folding roller
Paper-pushing-plate motor (M8)
Drives the paper-pushing plate
Sensor
Function
Paper-pushing-plate-motor clock sensor (PI1)
Detects the paper-pushing-plate-motor clock
Paper-folding-motor clock sensor (PI4)
Detects the paper-folding-motor clock
Output-bin paper sensor (PI6)
Detects the presence/absence of a stack of sheets in the saddle output bin
Delivery sensor (PI11)
Detects the paper delivery
Paper-pushing-plate home-position sensor (PI14)
Detects the paper pushing plate leading edge position
Vertical-path paper sensor (PI17)
Detects the presence/absence of paper after removal of a jam
Paper-folding home-position sensor (PI21)
Detects the paper-folding home position
362 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Booklet maker fold the stack The paper-pushing plate pushes the center of the stack to the roller-contact section and waits at the leadingedge position until the stack is taken by the paper-folding roller. When the paper-folding roller has gripped the stack, the paper-pushing-plate motor rotates, returning the paper-pushing plate to its home position. The paper-folding roller draws the stack until the delivery roller moves it to the output bin. The thickness of the paper-folding rollers is reduced at the upper half of the periphery but maintained in the center area and at the lower half of the periphery. At the lower half of the periphery where the thickness is not reduced, the paper-folding roller (upper) and the paper-folding roller (lower) contact each other tightly, and paper starts to be folded at this position. The upper and lower rollers feed paper while folding it and stop at the folding position. At the upper half of the periphery where the thickness is reduced, the upper and lower paperfolding rollers do not contact each other except at the center, so they only feed the paper to prevent paper from being wrinkled. The paper-folding start and stop positions are controlled by the number of motor pulses delivered from the paper-folding home-position sensor (P121). Figure 5-186 Folding position (1 of 5)
Figure 5-187 Folding process (2 of 5)
ENWW
Theory of operation 363
HP Confidential
Figure 5-188 Folding start position (3 of 5)
Figure 5-189 Folding start position (4 of 5)
Figure 5-190 Folding stop position (5 of 5)
364 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Booklet maker double folding a stack A stack of 10 or more A4R or LTRR sheets is folded twice. 1.
The paper-pushing plate pushes the stack to the paper-folding rollers. Figure 5-191 Double-folding process (1 of 5)
2.
The paper-folding rollers grip the stack. Figure 5-192 Double-folding process (2 of 5)
3.
The paper-folding rollers rotate in reverse, pushing the stack backward 20 mm (reverse feeding). Figure 5-193 Double-folding process (3 of 5)
ENWW
Theory of operation 365
HP Confidential
4.
The paper-folding rollers rotate forward to push the stack forward. The paper-pushing plate returns to its home position. Figure 5-194 Double-folding process (4 of 5)
Figure 5-195 Double-folding process (5 of 5)
Booklet maker intermediate-process-tray assembly Stack job offset The job-offset operation offsets the paper stack to the front or rear when ejecting to sort the paper stack. The forward/backward movement of the sheet delivered to the processing output bin is controlled by the front-aligning plate and rear-aligning plate. The aligned copies are stapled or ejected according to the signal from the product. When the power is turned on, the stacker controller PCA drives the aligning-plate front
366 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
motor (M33) and aligning-plate rear motor (M34) to return the two aligning plates to home position. The name and function of motors and sensors used by the stack job-offset function are shown below. Figure 5-196 Motors and sensors for stack job offset
Figure 5-197 Stack job offset example
Table 5-91 Motors for the stack job offset Motor
Function
Front-aligning-plate motor (M33)
Aligns paper in the processing output bin to the front
Rear-aligning-plate motor (M34)
Aligns paper in the processing output bin to the rear
Swing motor (M36)
Moves the swing guide up/down
Stack trailing-edge assist motor (M39)
Carry the stack end during stack ejection
Table 5-92 Sensors for the stack job offset
ENWW
Sensor
Function
Swing-guide home-position (HP) sensor (PI35)
Detects the swing guide home position
Front-aligning-plate HP sensor (PI36)
Detects the aligning plate front-home position
Rear-aligning-plate HP sensor (PI37)
Detects the aligning plate rear-home position
Stack trailing-edge assist HP sensor (PI39)
Detects the stack trailing-edge assist home-position
Theory of operation 367
HP Confidential
Booklet maker staple operation The stacker unit provides 1-point front stapling, 1-point rear stapling, and 2-point stapling. The booklet stapler provides 2-point center stapling. Figure 5-198 Location of the staplers
Stapler unit ●
The staple motor (M41) rotates the cam one turn for stapling. The macro computer (IC101) on the stacker controller PCA controls the motor.
●
The staple home-position sensor (PI50) detects the home position of the cam. When the staple homeposition sensor is off, the stacker controller PCA rotates the staple motor forward until the sensor turns on, moving the staple cam to its original position.
●
The staple sensor (PI52) detects presence of a staple cartridge and of staples in the cartridge.
●
The staple-edging sensor (PI51) determines whether staples are pushed to the top of the staple cartridge.
●
For safety, the stacker-controller circuit does not drive the staple motor (M41) unless the staple safety switch (MS34) is turned on.
Figure 5-199 Stapling operation (1 of 2)
368 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Figure 5-200 Stapling operation (2 of 2)
Stapling operation The stapling operation staples the prescribed number of copies with the stapler unit. The staple position depends on the staple mode and paper size. The stapler-shift home-position sensor (PI40) detects whether the stapler unit is at the home position. The stapler unit is equipped with a stapler-alignment interference sensor (PI46). The staple motor (M41) operation is prohibited when the stapler-alignment interference sensor (PI46) is on. This prevents stapling at the stopper and damaging the stopper when the stapler-shift motor (M35) is incorrectly adjusted. When the power is turned on, the stacker controller PCA drives the
ENWW
Theory of operation 369
HP Confidential
stapler-shift motor (M35) to return the stapler unit to home position. If the stapler unit is already at home position, it waits in that state. Figure 5-201 Stapler unit
Figure 5-202 Staple location
Table 5-93 Sensors used in stapling Sensor
Symbol
Connector
Function
Stapler-shift homeposition sensor
PI40
J721B-6
Detects the home position for the stapler moving back and forth
Stapler-alignment interference sensor
PI46
J717-3
Staple prohibited area detection
Stapler home-position sensor
PI50
J717-5
Detects the home position for the stapling operation
370 Chapter 5 Support
Remarks
In the stapler
ENWW
HP Confidential Table 5-93 Sensors used in stapling (continued) Sensor
Symbol
Connector
Function
Remarks
Staple edging sensor
PI51
J717-6
Detects the staple top position
In the stapler
Staple sensor
PI52
J717-7
Detects presence or absence of staples in the cartridge
In the stapler
Table 5-94 Motors used in stapling Function
Motor
Symbol
Moves the stapler
Stapler-shift motor
M35
Performs the stapling operation
Staple motor
M41
Remarks
The stacker controller PCA moves the stapler according to the specified stapling position. When the rear of the first sheet passes the first delivery roller, the stacker controller PCA stops the stack-delivery motor (M32) and then rotates it in reverse. The stack-delivery motor rotates the stack-delivery roller and return roller and delivers the paper to the processing output bin. The paper in the processing output bin is detected by the processing-output-bin paper sensor (PI38). When the paper is delivered to the processing output bin, the swing motor (M36) starts and raises the swing guide. When the swing-guide home-position sensor (PI35) detects the rising of the swing guide, the swing-guide motor stops and holds the swing guide at the raised position. After the processing-output-bin paper sensor detects the paper, the aligning motor (M33/M34) starts and aligns the paper. Figure 5-203 Paper path for stapling
ENWW
Theory of operation 371
HP Confidential
Figure 5-204 Rollers and sensors for stapling
The stacker controller PCA starts the swing motor (M36) and lowers the swing guide when the rear of the second paper passes the first delivery roller. The stack-delivery motor is reversed. The stack-delivery motor rotates the stack-delivery roller (upper) and return roller and sends the paper to the processing output bin. At this point, the stack-delivery roller (lower) does not rotate because the stack-ejection lower-roller clutch (CL32) is disengaged. The output-bin paper sensor (PI38) detects the processing-output-bin paper sensor (P138). When the paper is delivered to the processing output bin, the swing motor (M36) starts and raises the swing guide. When the swing-guide home-position sensor (PI35) detects the rising of the swing guide, the swing-guide motor stops and holds the swing guide at the raised position. After the processing-output-bin paper sensor detects the paper, the aligning motor (M33/M34) starts and aligns the paper. Figure 5-205 Paper path
When the last sheet is aligned, the stacker controller PCA moves the aligning plate to the alignment position with the aligning motor (M33/M34) (the paper is held by the aligning plate). Then the stacker controller PCA staples at the specified staple position. After stapling, the stacker controller PCA starts the swing motor (M36) and lowers the swing guide. Then the stack is ejected by the stack-delivery roller, return roller, and stack trailing-edge assist guide.
372 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Figure 5-206 Shift process for the staple unit
Staple unit The stapler motor (M41) rotates the cam one turn for stapling. The stapler home-position sensor (PI50) detects the home position of the cam. The macro computer (IC13) on the stacker controller PCA controls the forward and reverse rotation of the staple motor. When the stapler home-position sensor is off, the stacker controller PCA rotates the stapler motor in the forward direction until the sensor turns on, allowing the staple cam to return to the original position. The staple sensor (PI52) is used to detect the presence or absence of a staple cartridge in the machine and the presence or absence of staples in the cartridge. The staple edging sensor (PI51) determines whether staples are pushed up to the top of the staple cartridge. For safety, the stacker controller circuit does not drive the staple motor (M41) unless the staple safety switch (MS34) is on. Figure 5-207 Stapling operation (1 of 2)
ENWW
Theory of operation 373
HP Confidential
Figure 5-208 Stapling operation (2 of 2)
Stitcher (stapler) unit The stitcher base unit includes two stitchers and stitcher bases. The stitchers are fixed in position and do not slide or swing. Stitching begins when the stitcher motor (M7, M6) drives the rotary cam. The front and rear stitcher units operate with a time delay to prevent wrinkling of paper and to limit the load applied to the power supply. The stitcher home-position sensor (SW7, SW5) monitors the movement of the rotary cam and allows identification of individual stitcher operations. The staple sensor (SW6, SW4) detects the presence or absence of staples inside the staple cartridge. The alignment plates keep both edges of the stack in place while stitching takes place. Figure 5-209 Stitcher unit
374 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Figure 5-210 Sequence of stitching
Figure 5-211 Rotation of the cam
Booklet maker stack operation Output bin operation This accessory has an upper output bin (output-bin 1) and a lower output bin (output-bin 2).
ENWW
●
The output-bin-1-shift motor (M37) and output-bin-2-shift motor (M38) move output-bin 1 and outputbin 2 up and down independently.
●
The output-bin-1 paper sensor (PI42) and output-bin-2 paper sensor (PI43) detect paper stacked on the output bin.
●
The output-bin-1 paper-surface sensor (PI41) and output-bin-2 paper-surface sensor (PI48) detect the home positions of output-bin 1 and output-bin 2.
●
The home position is the top surface of the paper when paper is stacked on the output bin, or the position where the edge of the output bin is detected when no paper is stacked.
●
When the power is turned on, the stacker controller PCA drives the output-bin-1-shift motor (M37) and output-bin-2-shift motor (M38) to return the output bin to home position. If already at home position, the output bin is moved from the home position and then returned. If both output bins are at home position, this is performed for output-bin 1 and then for output-bin 2.
●
If the product specifies output-bin 2, the stacker controller PCA shifts the output bin so that output-bin 2 is at the delivery port. When paper is stacked on the output bin, a prescribed number of pulses drive the output-bin-1-shift motor (M37) or output-bin-2-shift motor (M38) to lower the output bin. Then the output bin returns to home position to prepare for the next stack.
●
The upper and lower limits of the output bin are detected by three area sensors (PS981, PS982, and PS983) on the output-bin-1- and output-bin-2-shift area sensor PCA. Theory of operation 375
HP Confidential
●
The stacker controller PCA stops driving the output-bin-1-shift motor (M37) and output-bin-2-shift motor (M38) when it detects the upper or lower limit of the output bin. Also, the on/off combinations of the area sensors (PS981, PS982, PS983) are used to detect over-stacking according to the stack height for large-size and mixed stacking.
●
The stacker controller PCA stops supplying +24 Yes to the output-bin-1-shift motor (M37) and stops the stacker operation when the output-bin-1 switch (MS33) turns on.
Figure 5-212 Items detected by the area sensors (PS981, PS982, PS983)
NOTE: PI42 is located on output-bin 1. NOTE: PI43 is located on output-bin 2.
376 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Figure 5-213 Output-bin components
The output bin capacity is changed. Accordingly the ON/OFF combinations of the area sensors (PS981, PS982 and PS983) to determine an over-stacking are changed as following: Table 5-95 Stapler/stacker output bin 1shift area sensor PCA Detection item
Output bin 1shift area sensor PCA Area sensor 1
Area sensor 2
Area sensor 3
(PS983)
(PS982)
(PS981)
Output bin 1 upper limit
ON
OFF
OFF
Stack count 650 sheets exceeded
ON
ON
ON
Stack count 1,300 sheets exceeded
ON
ON
ON
Output bin 1 lower limit
ON
ON
OFF
Table 5-96 Stapler/stacker output bin 2shift area sensor PCA Detection item
ENWW
Output bin 2shift area sensor PCA Area sensor 1
Area sensor 2
Area sensor 3
(PS983)
(PS982)
(PS981)
Output bin 2 upper limit
ON
OFF
ON
Stack count 650 sheets exceeded
ON
ON
ON
Stack count 1,300 sheets exceeded
OFF
ON
ON
Stack count 1,700 sheets exceeded
OFF
OFF
ON
Output bin 2 lower limit
OFF
ON
OFF
Theory of operation 377
HP Confidential
Shutter operation To prevent the delivery section from catching stacked paper in output-bin 1 when it passes, a shutter is provided at the delivery section. The shutter closes when output-bin 1 passes, even when no paper is stacked. When the shutter clutch (CL31) and stack-ejection lower-roller clutch (CL32) are on, the shutter moves up (closes) when the stack-ejection motor (M32) turns forward and moves down (open, delivery enabled), which occurs when the motor turns backward. The shutter home-position sensor (PI45) detects the opening and closing of the shutter. Figure 5-214 Shutter location
378 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Booklet maker paper-delivery path The saddle-stitcher flapper routes paper from the product to the booklet maker unit. The booklet maker unit staples, folds and then delivers the paper to the booklet-maker-unit output bin. Figure 5-215 Booklet-maker-unit paper path
Booklet maker delivery modes Table 5-97 Booklet maker delivery modes
ENWW
Feed
Staple/Saddle
Punch
Offset
Applied
Face-down
N
N/A
N
Yes
Face-down
N
N/A
Y
Yes
Face-down
Staple
N/A
N
Yes
Face-down
Staple
N/A
Y
N/A
Face-down
Saddle
N/A
N
Yes
Theory of operation 379
HP Confidential
Booklet maker with hole puncher assembly delivery modes Table 5-98 Booklet maker with hole puncher assembly delivery modes Feed
Staple/Saddle
Punch
Offset
Applied
Face-down
N
N
N
Yes
Face-down
N
N
Y
Yes
Face-down
Staple
N
N
Yes
Face-down
Staple
N
Y
N/A
Face-down
Staple
Y
N
Yes
Face-down
Staple
Y
Y
N/A
Face-down
Saddle
N
N
Yes
Face-down
Saddle
Y
N
N/A
Booklet maker jam detection The saddle stitcher unit identifies any of the following conditions as a jam, and sends the jam signal to the product. When all doors are closed after the jam is removed, the saddle stitcher unit checks whether the vertical-path paper sensor (PI17) has detected the presence of paper. If the sensor has detected paper, the unit identifies the condition as being a faulty jam removal and sends the jam signal to the product once again. Figure 5-216 Booklet maker jams
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting overview Use the procedures in this section to diagnose problems with the finishing accessories. During the test, the finishing accessory is isolated and does not communicate with the product engine. Since there is no communication between the output accessory and the product engine the tests are not available on the product control panel. This series of tests is performed by manually setting specific dual380 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
inline-package switch (DIPSW or DIP switch) settings on a contoller printed circuit assembly (PCA) and then pressing a switch to initiate the test. Three PCAs are used for the tests, depending on the accessory being tested: ●
Main controller PCA: on all output accessories, this PCA controls most primary operations, including stapling and stacking.
●
Saddle controller PCA: on the Booklet maker, this PCA controls specific booklet-maker operations.
●
Punch controller PCA: On the Stapler/stacker with hole punch accessory only, this PCA controls the hole-punch operations.
IMPORTANT: The power must be off before changing any DIPSW settings for the first time. The power does not have to be turned off again before changing the DIPSW settings to perform other tests—as long as the subsequent tests are performed using the same DIPSW. However, if subsequent tests involve setting a different DIPSW on a different PCA other than the one used to perform the first test, you must turn the product power off before changing the DIPSW settings. The following example shows the sequence for testing the Pre-alignment plate motor, Post-alignment plate motor, and the Punch motor. The Pre-alignment plate motor is controlled by the Main controller, and the Punch motor is controlled by the Punch controller. To test both components: 1.
Turn off the product.
2.
Set DPSW4 on the Main controller PCS for the Pre-alignment motor test.
3.
Turn on the product.
4.
Conduct the Pre–alignment motor test.
5.
Set DPSW4 on the Main controller PCS for the Post-alignment motor test.
6.
Conduct the Post-alignment motor test.
7.
Turn off the product.
8.
Reset DIPSW4 on the Main controller.
9.
Set DIPSW on the Punch controller to run the Punch motor test.
10. Turn on the product. 11. Conduct the Punch motor test. 12. Turn off the product. 13. Reset DPSW on the Punch controller. Note that the power was not turned off between the two tests using the Main controller, but that the power was turned off before running a test using the Punch controller. If multiple tests require the use of two or more controllers, the power must be turned off when changing from one controller to another.
ENWW
Theory of operation 381
HP Confidential
Prepare to run a test Prepare to run a test overview Each of the controller PCAs includes a DIP switch that must be configured for each test, and a switch used to start, advance, and stop the test. Each DIP switch has up to eight small switches that can be set to either the on or off position. The controller PCB is marked ON and OFF to show the current switch position. Tables in this course and the product Service Manual use 0 to indicate the OFF position and 1 to indicate to ON position. The following table and the photograph show an 8-switch DIP switch with switches 1 through 4 set to OFF, and switches 5 through 8 set to ON. Use a small screwdriver to change the position of the switches. Table 5-99 DIP switch settings 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Process overview The general procedure for testing an output accessory is: 1.
Turn off the product
2.
Remove all paper from the product.
3.
Verify that all doors and trays are closed.
4.
Access the appropriate PCA.
5.
Configure the appropriate DIP switch for the desired test.
6.
Turn on the product.
7.
Conduct the test.
8.
Conduct another test using the same controller PCA, or turn off the product to run tests using a different controller PCA.
9.
Reset the DIP switch.
10. Resolve the issue, continue with additional testing, or turn on the product to return to normal operation. Access the Main controller PCA (All output accessories) CAUTION: ESD-sensitive component 1.
The following covers must be removed. See the Service module of this course or the product Service Manual for instructions for removing the covers. ●
Bin cable cover
●
Open/closed stepped cover
382 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
2.
●
Upper stepped cover
●
Lower stepped cover
Locate the following controller-PCA switches: ●
SW3
●
DIPSW4
NOTE: All eight of the DIPSW4 switches must be in the OFF position for normal operation of the finishing accessory. Always return the DIPSW4 switches to the factory setting when testing is complete. Access the Punch controller PCA (Stapler/stacker with hole punch) CAUTION: ESD-sensitive component 1.
2.
The following covers must be removed. See the Service module of this course or the product Service Manual for instructions for removing the covers. ●
Bin cable cover
●
Open/closed stepped cover
●
Upper stepped cover
●
Lower stepped cover
●
Rear cover
Locate the following controller-PCA switches and LEDs: ●
SW601
●
SW602
●
LEDs SW602 and SW603
●
DIPSW
NOTE: All four of the DIPSW switches must be in the OFF position for normal operation of the finishing accessory. Always return the DIPSW switches to the factory setting when testing is complete. Access the Saddle controller PCA (Booklet maker) CAUTION: ESD-sensitive component 1.
2.
ENWW
The following covers must be removed. See the Service module of this course or the product Service Manual for instructions for removing the covers. ●
Rear cover
●
Rear cover (BM PCA)
Locate the following controller-PCA switches: ●
SW1
●
DIPSW
Theory of operation 383
HP Confidential
NOTE: All four of the DIPSW switches must be in the OFF position for normal operation of the finishing accessory. Always return the DIPSW switches to the factory setting when testing is complete. Diagnostic test example Click the video below to see the process of running a Staple sub assembly to staple position test on a Stapler/ stacker with hole punch. The test begins with the product power off, and the Main controller PCA accessible. Table 5-100 DIP switch settings 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
To run the Stapler unit to staple position test: 1.
Prepare to run the test as described previously.
2.
Set Main controller PCA DIP switch SW4 as shown above. The switch settings are: ●
Switch 1 ON
●
Switch 2 through Switch 6 OFF
●
Switch 7 and Switch 8 ON
3.
Locate the staple sub assembly.
4.
Turn on the product.
5.
Press and release switch SW3. Each press of the switch will advance the motor through the following modes: ●
First press of SW3: The staple sub assembly moves to the home position—unless it is already in the home position.
●
Second press of SW3: The staple sub assembly moves to the rear position—unless it is already in the rear position.
NOTE: If the staple sub assembly functions correctly, press and release SW3 until the staple sub assembly is in the home position. 6.
Set DIP switch SW4 to a new configuration to conduct a different test, or turn off the power and set all switches to 0 to exit the test mode.
7.
Replace the staple assembly if the test fails.
Stapler/stacker tests Stapler/stack tests overview The tests in this section apply to all of the output accessories. The DIP switch for controlling these tests is located on the Main controller PCA. Click a test name to review the DIP switch settings for that test. For more information and details on performing these tests, refer to the Troubleshooting Manual available in the Course Library.
384 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Pre-alignment plate motor test Table 5-101 DIP switch settings 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Post-alignment plate motor test Table 5-102 DIP switch settings 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Swing guide motor test Table 5-103 DIP switch settings 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
Staple sub assembly to staple position test Table 5-104 DIP switch settings 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
Staple sub assembly motor test Table 5-105 DIP switch settings 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Stacker entrance motor test Table 5-106 DIP switch settings
ENWW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
Theory of operation 385
HP Confidential
Stapled job output motor test Table 5-107 DIP switch settings 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
Trailing edge assist motor test Table 5-108 DIP switch settings 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
Stacker solenoid test Table 5-109 DIP switch settings 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
Stacker clutch test Table 5-110 DIP switch settings 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
Shutter assembly test Table 5-111 DIP switch settings 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
First tray test (Upper stack output bin) test Table 5-112 DIP switch settings 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
386 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Secondary tray (Lower stack output bin) test Table 5-113 DIP switch settings 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Saddle entrance motor or Punch feed roller motor test The name of this motor depends on the type of finishing accessory being tested. The motor is called the punch feed roller motor on the stapler/stacker with hole punch. The motor is called the saddle entrance motor on the booklet maker. Table 5-114 DIP switch settings 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
Returning roller test Table 5-115 DIP switch settings 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
Booklet maker tests Booklet maker tests overview The tests in this section apply only to the Booklet Maker output accessory. The DIP switch for controlling these tests is located on the Saddle controller PCA. The DIPSW has eight switches, but only the first four are used. Click a test name to review the DIP switch settings for that test. For more information and details on performing these tests, refer to the Troubleshooting Manual available in the Course Library. Saddle (booklet) unit solenoid test Table 5-116 DIP switch settings 1
2
3
4
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
0
0
0
1
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
Saddle (booklet) feed motor test Table 5-117 DIP switch settings
ENWW
1
2
3
4
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
0
1
0
0
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
Theory of operation 387
HP Confidential
Paper folding motor test Table 5-118 DIP switch settings 1
2
3
4
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
0
1
0
1
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
Jogger plate motor test Table 5-119 DIP switch settings 1
2
3
4
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
0
1
1
1
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
Saddle (booklet) unit aging test Table 5-120 DIP switch settings 1
2
3
4
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
1
0
0
0
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
Saddle (booklet) alignment plate test Table 5-121 DIP switch settings 1
2
3
4
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
1
0
0
1
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
Paper position plate test Table 5-122 DIP switch settings 1
2
3
4
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
1
0
1
0
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
Guide plate test Table 5-123 DIP switch settings 1
2
3
4
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
1
0
1
1
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
388 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
Hole punch tests Hole punch tests overview The tests in this section apply only to the Stapler/stacker with hole punch output accessory. The DIP switch for controlling these tests is located on the Saddle controller PCA. The DIPSW has four switches. Click a test name to review the DIP switch settings for that test. For more information and details on performing these tests, refer to the Troubleshooting Manual available in the Course Library. Punch aging test Table 5-124 DIP switch settings 1
2
3
4
1
0
0
0
Punch side registration test Table 5-125 DIP switch settings 1
2
3
4
0
1
0
0
Punch motor test Table 5-126 DIP switch settings
ENWW
1
2
3
4
1
1
0
0
Theory of operation 389
HP Confidential
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting overview This section contains troubleshooting procedures that are available to customers along with procedures that are intended for service and support personnel.
Troubleshooting menu Troubleshooting menu overview The product has many built-in diagnostic tests and troubleshooting tools available in the Administration menu. Most of the tests and tools have been available on previous products. The options are: ●
Diagnostic Tests
●
Event Log
●
Paper Path Page
●
Print Quality Pages
●
Review Diagnostic Data
●
Generate Debug Data
To access the tests and tools: 1.
Scroll to and touch the Administration button from the control panel Home screen.
2.
Scroll to and touch the Troubleshooting menu to display the list of troubleshooting tools available.
3.
Touch the button for the desired test or tool. Descriptions for each option follow.
Diagnostic Tests The Diagnostic Tests menu has the following options and tests: ●
Disable Cartridge Check
●
Paper Path Sensors test
●
Paper Path Test
●
Manual Sensor Test
●
Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test
●
Component Test
●
Print/Stop Test
●
Scanner Tests
●
Continuous Scan
390 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
NOTE: The Paper Path Test is the only test that includes the output accessories. All other diagnostics test the sensors and components within the print engine only. Diagnostic tests for the output accessories are performed manually, and are described in the Output accessory diagnostic tests section of this course module. Disable Cartridge Check Use this diagnostic test to print internal pages or send an external job to the product when the toner cartridge is removed or exchanged. Supply errors are ignored while the product is in this mode. When Disable Cartridge Check is selected, the printer will perform tests without checking to see if a print cartridge is installed. The print cartridge can remain in the product or it can be removed from the product. When this option is selected the product will shut down and restart when exiting the Troubleshooting menu. Paper Path Sensors test The Paper Path Sensors test displays a list of the paper path sensors in the print engine, whether the sensor is triggered, and a running count of how many times the sensor is toggled while printing a test page. The test uses the paper path and options selected in the Paper Path Test. Select the desired options in the Paper Path Test, return to the Paper Path Sensors test, and then touch the Start Test button to run the test. Paper Path Test Use the Paper Path Test to specify the paper path or paths and other options to use when printing a test page. The following options are available: ●
●
●
ENWW
Source Tray ◦
All trays
◦
Tray 1
◦
Tray 2
◦
Tray 3 (if installed)
◦
Tray 4 (if installed)
Output Bin ◦
All bins
◦
Top Output Bin
◦
Upper Left Bin
◦
Middle Left Bin (Booklet Maker)
◦
Lower Left Bin (Stapler/Stacker models)
◦
Lower Booklet Bin (Booklet Maker)
Test Duplex Path ◦
Off
◦
On
Troubleshooting 391
HP Confidential
●
Stapling ◦
Top Left
◦
Top Right
◦
Two Top or Left
NOTE: Only available if Upper Left Bin, Lower Left Bin (Stapler/stacker), or Middle Left Bin (Booklet Maker) output bin is selected. ●
Number of Copies ◦
●
1 to 500
Hole Punching (for Stapler/Stack with Hole Punch) ◦
Two
Three or Four (depending on configuration) ●
Fold and Stitch (for Booklet Maker) ◦
Disable Enable
NOTE:
Only available if Lower Booklet Bin (Booklet Maker) output bin is selected.
To conduct a Paper Path Test from the Troubleshooting menu: 1.
Touch the Paper Path Test button.
2.
Select and set the desires options.
3.
Return to the Paper Path Test menu: touch the Back arrow or touch Paper Path Test in the path displayed at the top of the control panel
4.
Touch the Print Test Page, and then touch the Print button.
Manual Sensor Test Use the Manual Sensor Test to verify that sensors and switches are working properly. A list of sensors and switches is displayed, along with indicators that show whether the sensor is triggered, and a counter showing how many time the sensor has been toggled. An illustration showing the location the selected sensor displays on the HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 control panel. To use the Manual Sensor Test: 1.
Touch the Manual Sensor Test button in the Troubleshooting menu. A screen with three columns displays on the control panel. The Sensor column lists the name and number of the sensor or switch. The State column displays a virtual LED indicator. The indicator is illuminated when the sensor or switch is triggered. The Toggled column has a round checkbox indicator and number. The checkbox displays a check mark if the sensor has been triggered. The number indicates how many times the sensor has been toggled.
392 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
An illustration showing the location the selected sensor displays on the HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 control panel. 2.
Manually trigger the sensor. It might be necessary to use a tool or piece of paper to trigger the sensor. Trigger the sensor multiple times in succession to test for intermittent errors. Touch the sensor name on the HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 control panel to view an illustration of the sensor. The State indicator changes, a check mark displays and the numeric value increases by one in the Toggled column if the sensor is triggered.
3.
Continue to troubleshoot if the selected sensor or switch fails. Replace the sensor or switch, if necessary.
NOTE: The Manual Sensor Test tests sensors and switches within the print engine paper path. Use the Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test to test input tray and output bin switches and sensors. Use the Output accessory diagnostic tests to diagnose issues with the output accessories. Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test Use the Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test to test input tray and output bin switches and sensors. To use the Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test: 1.
Touch the Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test button in the Troubleshooting menu. A screen with three columns displays on the control panel. The Sensor column lists the name and number of the sensor or switch. The State column displays a virtual LED indicator. The indicator is illuminated when the sensor or switch is triggered. The Toggled column has a round checkbox indicator and number. The checkbox displays a check mark if the sensor has been triggered. The number indicates how many times the sensor has been toggled. An illustration showing the location the selected sensor displays on the HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 control panel.
2.
Manually trigger the sensor. In most cases simply opening and closing a tray will trigger all of the sensor for that tray. The State indicator changes, a check mark displays and the numeric value increases by one in the Toggled column if the sensor is triggered.
3.
Continue to troubleshoot if the selected sensor or switch fails. Replace the sesnor or switch, if necessary.
Component Test Overview Use the Component Test to verify the operation of the main components of the print engine. The following components can be tested:
ENWW
●
Drum Motor
●
Fuser Motor
●
Tray 1 Feed Motor
●
Tray 2 Pick Motor
Troubleshooting 393
HP Confidential
●
Tray 2 Feed Motor
●
Tray 2 Intermediate Feed Motor
●
Tray 4 and Tray 3 Intermediate Feed Motor
●
Tray 3 Feed Motor
●
Tray 4 Feed Motor
●
Duplex Feed Motor
●
Duplex Refeed Motor
●
Duplex Side Registration Motor
●
Fuser Shutter Motor
●
Tray 1 Pickup Solenoid
●
Tray 1 Feed Clutch
●
Tray 3 Pickup Solenoid
●
Tray 4 Pickup Solenoid
●
Face-up Face-down Solenoid
●
Laser Scanner Motor
Use the Component Test To use the Component Test: 1.
Touch the Component Test button in the Troubleshooting menu. The list of components displays.
2.
Touch the name of the component to be tested, and then touch OK to start the test.
3.
A screen displays indicating that the motor is being rotated or the solenoid is being moved. The test stops after a short period. Touch the Cancel button to stop the test, if desired.
4.
Touch the Cancel button in the Component Test menu to return to the Troubleshooting menu.
The tests can be run continuously, if desired, by following these steps in the Component Test menu: 1.
Touch the Repeat button, and then touch OK.
2.
Select On to run the tests continuously, and then touch OK.
3.
Touch the name of the component to be tested, and then touch OK to start the test.
4.
A screen displays indicating that the motor is being rotated or the solenoid is being moved. The test will run repeatedly or continuously. Touch the Cancel button to stop the test.
Scanner Tests Test the ADF and scanner sensors using Scanner Tests. Similar to other diagnostic tests, Scanner Tests displays the Sensor Name, State, and Toggled columns to verify the operation of the sensors in the ADF and flatbed scanner.
394 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
The following sensors can be tested: ●
ADF Paper Present
●
ADF Y (length) Short
●
ADF Y (length) Long
●
ADF Slider 1
●
ADF Slider 2
●
ADF Slider 3
●
ADF Jam Cover
●
ADF Paper Path Deskew
●
ADF Paper Path Pick Success
●
Paper Path Sensor 1
●
Paper Path Sensor 2
●
Flatbed Y (length) Short
●
Flatbed Y (length) Long
●
Flatbed Cover
To use the Scanner Tests: 1.
Touch the Scanner Tests button in the Troubleshooting menu.
2.
Touch the OK button on the second screen to continue. A screen with three columns displays on the control panel. The Sensor column lists the name and number of the sensor or switch. The State column displays a virtual LED indicator. The indicator is illuminated when the sensor or switch is triggered. The Toggled column has a round checkbox indicator and number. The checkbox displays a check mark if the sensor has been triggered. The number indicates how many times the sensor has been toggled. An illustration showing the location the selected sensor displays on the HP Color LaserJet flow MFP M880 control panel.
3.
Manually trigger the sensor to be tested. The State indicator changes, a check mark displays and the numeric value increases by one in the Toggled column if the sensor is triggered.
4.
Continue to troubleshoot if the selected sensor or switch fails. Replace the sensor or switch, if necessary.
Continuous Scan Continuous Scan tests the operation of the scanner and the ADF. Load paper into the ADF to test ADF functionality or operate the scanner only by running the test without any paper loaded. NOTE: No output is created during the test.
ENWW
Troubleshooting 395
HP Confidential
To run the Continuous Scan test: 1.
Load paper into the ADF input tray to test the ADF, if desired.
2.
Touch the Continuous Scan button in the Troubleshooting menu.
3.
Select 2-sided to test the duplex scanning functionality of the ADF, if desired.
4.
Touch the Start button to start the test. If no paper is loaded in the ADF the scanner will operate continuously until the Stop button is touched. Lift the ADF cover to observe the scanner operating. If paper is loaded in the ADF the test will run until all pages in the ADF are scanned.
5.
Touch OK to stop the test and return to the Diagnostic Tests menu.
Event Log The Event Log in the Troubleshooting menu is available to customers. The log lists up to fifty error and warning events. The Event Log is cleared when a Factory Reset, Partial Clean, or Format Disk is performed. Error events ●
The Event Log displays errors that have occurred on the product, such as 49 errors and paper jams.
●
These types of errors stop the functionality of the product until the issue is resolved.
Warning events ●
The Event Log displays warning occurrences, such as low supplies messages.
●
These warnings do not stop the functionality of the product.
The Event Log can be viewed on the control panel or printed.
Paper Path Page The Paper Path Page is a report that lists the total number of pages printed along with the size and type of paper printed. The number of pages fed from each input tray and number of pages delivered to each output bin is also listed. The report also lists the number of pages scanned using the ADF and flatbed glass. The report is for troubleshooting purposes only. It is not for billing purposes.
Print Quality Pages The Print Quality Pages has the following two options: ●
Print PQ Troubleshooting Pages
●
Fuser Test Page
Select the Print PQ Troubleshooting Pages option to print a test sheet and instructions for performing basic troubleshooting procedures. The instruction sheet also lists the print cartridge or cartridges used and provides a URL for ordering supplies online. It also lists the product support URLs. Select the Fuser Test Page to evaluate fuser-related print-quality issues.
396 Chapter 5 Support
ENWW
HP Confidential
6
ENWW
Service
●
Student performance objectives
●
Required tools
●
Parts removal overview
●
Covers and doors
●
Main assemblies
●
Input accessories
●
Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU)
●
Output accessories
397
HP Confidential
Student performance objectives By the completion of this module, students should be able to: ●
Identify challenges associated with removing and replacing parts (i.e. “Gotchas”).
●
Service the product.
398 Chapter 6 Service
ENWW
HP Confidential
Required tools ●
#2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152-mm (6-in) shaft length NOTE: For the best fit, use a JIS #2 Phillips screwdriver for the stapler/stacker.
●
Small, flat-blade screwdriver
●
Needle-nose pliers
●
ESD strap (if one is available)
●
Penlight CAUTION: Always use a Phillips screwdriver (callout 1). Do not use a Pozidriv screwdriver (callout 2) or any motorized screwdriver. These can damage screws or screw threads.
ENWW
Required tools 399
HP Confidential
Parts removal overview Use the Service Manual and the videos provided to assist in the product teardown. Replace parts in the reverse order of their removal. The Service Manual details the teardown steps to get to a specific component, and provides steps on how to replace the component. The Service Manual also includes directions for difficult or critical replacement procedures. General FFC caution ●
Use caution when handling flat flexible cables (FFC). FFCs can be damaged easily during product service and repair.
●
Be careful when removing FFCs from connectors.
●
Do not unnecessarily bend or pinch FFCs.
●
Verify FFCs are properly seated during reinstallation. Sometimes it is difficult to determine if a FFC is fully seated in a connector.
Before performing service ●
Remove all media from the product.
●
Turn off the power using the power switch.
●
Unplug the power cable and all interface cables.
●
Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap if one is available. If an ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
●
Remove the print cartridge or cartridges.
●
Remove the tray cassette or cassettes.
NOTE: The videos in this section begin with the print cartridges and input trays having already been removed.
400 Chapter 6 Service
ENWW
HP Confidential
Covers and doors ●
Right upper rear cover
●
Hardware integration pocket (HIP) cover (M855)
●
Face-down bin NOTE: When reinstalling the face-down bin, make sure that the tabs on the bin are aligned with the slots in the product. Check to make sure that the cover is installed correctly and that no tabs are visible. NOTE: Incorrect installation may cause paper jams.
●
Left rear cover
●
Right side switchback cover
●
Lower right cover
●
Rear upper rear cover (M880)
●
Right upper rear cover (M880)
●
Upper rear cover (M880)
●
Left upper rear cover and rear upper B cover (M880)
●
Rear upper front cover (M880)
●
Front top cover
●
Rear top cover
●
Left cover
●
Right upper front cover NOTE: Do not remove the USB cable from the cover. Release the cable form the product, and then remove it with the cover.
●
Right upper cover IMPORTANT: Release the control panel cables from the guides as needed to remove the assembly. Make sure that the control-panel cables are correctly routed and are not pinched when the assembly is reinstalled.
●
Right door assembly
●
Left front cover
●
Front door CAUTION: The interlock-switch arm is spring loaded. Firmly grasp the arm when it is removed to prevent it from retracting.
ENWW
●
Rear cover
●
Right rear cover
●
Front inner cover
Covers and doors 401
HP Confidential
Main assemblies ●
Document feeder assembly (M880 only) NOTE: The screw (callout 1) that secures the wire retainer is longer than other screws used in the product. Make sure that you use this screw when the retainer is reinstalled.
●
Scanner control board (SCB) (M880 only)
●
Scanner assembly (M880 only) CAUTION: product.
The scanner assembly is heavy. HP recommends that two people lift the assembly off the
●
Interlock switch assembly
●
Front-door open detection switch Reinstallation tip Take note of how the spring at the right end of the flag shaft is installed. If the spring becomes dislodged while removing the flag, you must correctly reinstall it so that the flag will properly function.
●
Main switch assembly TIP: Its easier to disconnect the connector if the harness is first released from the guide.
●
Secondary transfer assembly TIP: After the assembly is removed later in this procedure, use the clip removed in the step above to secure the bushing to the shaft so that it will not be lost. NOTE: To make reinstalling the assembly easier, insert a screwdriver into the hole on the Tray 1 (MP tray) drive assembly to hold the secondary transfer assembly stopper in place.
●
Multipurpose drive assembly NOTE:
The stopper is spring loaded. Firmly grasp the stopper when it is removed.
TIP: To release the wire tie (callout 2), push in on the tab, and then remove the wire tie from the chassis. ●
Multipurpose tray (Tray 1) guide assembly
●
Tray 2 pickup unit
●
Fuser home position sensor CAUTION: As the assembly is removed, guide the wire harness through the opening in the chassis from the front of the product.
●
Shutter gear holder assembly CAUTION: The assembly is still connected to the product by a wire harness. Do not attempt to completely remove the assembly.
●
Fuser-edge area cooling fan FM10 (front)
●
Fuser-edge area cooling fan FM9
402 Chapter 6 Service
ENWW
HP Confidential
●
Fuser fan FM2
●
Cartridge fan FM3 (yellow and magenta)
●
Cartridge fan FM4 (cyan and black)
●
Laser/scanner fan FM1
●
Delivery fan FM8
●
Cartridge front area cooling fan FM7
●
Memory tag PCA
●
Image-drum motor
●
Fuser power supply
●
Primary transfer-roller disengagement motor
●
Fuser motor
●
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) motor
●
Toner-cartridge feed motor (black)
●
Toner-cartridge feed motor (yellow, magenta, and cyan)
●
Environmental sensor
●
Interconnect PCA (M855 only) NOTE: If the formatter was not removed prior to removing the interconnect PCA, remove it before attempting to reinstall the PCA.
●
Interconnect PCA (M880 only) NOTE: If the formatter was not removed prior to removing the interconnect PCA, remove it before attempting to reinstall the PCA.
●
Formatter case (M855 only)
●
Formatter case (M880 only)
●
High-voltage power supply (HVPS) B CAUTION: Use care when disconnecting the white-plastic connector at the top of the PCA. It can be easily damaged.
●
DC controller PCA
●
Color-plane registration (CPR) sensor assembly Reinstallation tip assembly.
Make sure that the clips are snapped into place when reinstalling the CPR sensor
NOTE: One clip is located toward the front of the product, and the other clip is located toward the back of the product. ●
ENWW
Low-voltage power supply (LVPS)
Main assemblies 403
HP Confidential
●
High-voltage power supply (HVPS) A (first transfer) NOTE: When reinstalling the HVPS A (first transfer), make sure that the contact spring can be seen through the 32 locator windows. If the spring cannot be seen, remove and reinstall the HVPS A (first transfer). No error message is displayed on the control panel if these springs are positioned incorrectly. Poor print quality will be the only indicator.
●
Lifter-drive assembly NOTE: When reinstalling the lifter-drive assembly, make sure that the assembly is unlocked. If the lifter is locked, the lifter will not function properly. If the assembly is in the locked position, use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to press on the spring-loaded metal plate and move it to the unlocked position.
●
Toner-cartridge drive assembly (yellow and magenta)
●
Toner-cartridge drive assembly (cyan and black)
●
Toner-cartridge interface PCA (cyan and black)
●
Toner-cartridge interface PCA (yellow and magenta)
●
Main drive assembly
●
Replace or reinstall the toner-cartridge drive units or the main drive assembly CAUTION: Make sure that the print-cartridge drive assembly is installed correctly. The assembly should be flush against the product (callout 1). Incorrect installation (callout 2) will cause the product to function incorrectly. Replace the toner-cartridge drive assembly or the main drive assembly NOTE: This procedure correctly aligns the gears of the main drive assembly (callout 1) and the tonercartridge drive assembly(ies) (callout 2). Use the four pins (callout 3) supplied with the replacement units to align the gears. 1.
Reinstall the main drive assembly. Push the black locks (callout 1) to the left while rotating the top gears (callout 2) on the main drive assembly until they lock into position. The large holes (callout 3) should point to the right (3 o'clock position).
2.
Insert the long alignment pins (callout 1) through the gears (callout 2) in the main drive assembly.
3.
On the toner-cartridge drive assembly, rotate the top gear (callout 1) clockwise until the arrows align (callout 2). Insert the two short pins (callout 3).
4.
Install the toner-cartridge drive assembly (callout 1) over the long pins in the main drive assembly (callout 2). NOTE: The black main drive assembly gear locks must be unlocked to properly secure the tonercartridge drive assembly.
5.
Check the installation of the toner-cartridge drive assembly. CAUTION: Make sure that the toner-cartridge drive assembly is installed correctly. The assembly should be flush against the chassis (callout 1). Incorrect installation (callout 2) will cause the product to function incorrectly.
6.
Remove the alignment pins (callout 1).
404 Chapter 6 Service
ENWW
HP Confidential
Reinstall the toner-cartridge drive assembly or the main drive assembly This procedure correctly aligns the gears of the main drive assembly and the toner-cartridge drive assembly(ies) without the use of alignment pins. 1.
Reinstall the main drive assembly. Push the black locks (callout 1) to the left while rotating the top gears (callout 2) on the main drive assembly until they lock into position. The large holes (callout 3) should point to the right (3 o'clock position). IMPORTANT: When reinstalling without the alignment pins, it is important to verify that the locks (callout 1) are engaged.
2.
On the toner-cartridge drive assembly, rotate the top gear (callout 1) clockwise until the arrows align (callout 2).
3.
Carefully install the toner-cartridge drive assembly. NOTE:
4.
Be careful not to rotate the gears on the toner-cartridge drive assembly while installing it.
Check the installation of the toner-cartridge drive assembly. CAUTION: Make sure that the toner-cartridge drive assembly is installed correctly. The assembly should be flush against the chassis (callout 1). Incorrect installation (callout 2) will cause the product to function incorrectly.
●
Fuser driver assembly CAUTION: The holder is still attached to the product. Do not attempt to completely remove the holder. Separate it from the product, and move it out of the way. NOTE: When reinstalling the assembly, make sure that the wire harness is routed through the correct opening in the chassis.
●
Scanner cover CAUTION:
●
Be careful. Do not drop any of the screws into the product.
Laser/scanner assembly (yellow and magenta) CAUTION: Use care when replacing the cables for the laser/scanner assemblies. The traces on the cable ends can be damaged when reinserted.
●
Laser/scanner assembly (cyan and black) CAUTION: Use care when replacing the cables for the laser/scanner assemblies. The traces on the cable ends can be damaged when reinserted.
ENWW
●
Duplexing reverse unit
●
Face-down delivery unit (M855 only)
●
Face-down delivery unit (M880 only)
●
Face-down cover
●
Duplex feed assembly
●
Multipurpose tray (Tray 1) pickup assembly
Main assemblies 405
HP Confidential
Input accessories ●
High capacity input (HCI) feeder ◦
HCI right tray
◦
HCI left tray
◦
HCI rear cover
◦
HCI right lower cover
◦
HCI right tray pickup motor
◦
HCI right tray pickup drive
◦
HCI left tray pickup motor
◦
HCI left tray pickup drive
◦
HCI right tray lifter drive assembly
◦
HCI left tray lifter drive assembly
◦
HCI right tray media-level sensor assembly
◦
HCI left tray media-level sensor assembly
◦
HCI right tray automatic close assembly
◦
HCI left tray automatic close assembly
◦
HCI right tray pickup assembly TIP: It might be easier to lift up on the merge assembly flap, and then remove (or replace) the pickup assembly from the right side of the HCI chassis (rather than from inside the tray cavity).
◦
HCI left tray pickup assembly TIP: Support the assembly when removing the screw so that it does not fall.
●
◦
HCI merge assembly
◦
HCI controller PCA
1x500- and 3x500-sheet feeders ◦
1x500 and 3x500 rear cover
◦
1x500 and 3x500 right front cover
◦
1x500 and 3x500 upper front face cover
◦
1x500 and 3x500 upper front cover
◦
1x500 and 3x500 upper front left face cover
◦
1x500 storage box door
◦
1x500 storage box
406 Chapter 6 Service
ENWW
HP Confidential
◦
1x500 and 3x500 right lower cover
◦
1x500 Tray 3 pickup assembly
◦
3x500 Tray 3 pickup assembly
◦
3x500 Tray 4 pickup assembly
◦
3x500 Tray 5 pickup assembly
◦
1x500 Tray 3 automatic close assembly
◦
3x500 Tray 3, Tray 4, and Tray 5 automatic close assemblies NOTE: The 3x500 Tray 3 automatic close assembly is shown here. The procedure is the same for the 3x500 Tray 4 or Tray 5 automatic close assemblies.
●
ENWW
◦
1x500 Tray 3, 3x500 Tray 3, Tray 4, and Tray 5 pickup motors
◦
1x500 and 3x500 controller PCA
Shared input accessory covers and doors ◦
HCI, 1x500, and 3x500 left cover
◦
HCI, 1x500, and 3x500 right door assembly
◦
HCI, 1x500, and 3x500 right rear cover
Input accessories 407
HP Confidential
Intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU) CAUTION: To avoid damaging the intermediate paper transport unit (IPTU), place it on the edge of a work surface as shown below to service it. ●
IPTU rear cover
●
IPTU driver PCA
●
IPTU finisher fixing assembly
●
IPTU fan assembly
●
IPTU side panel assembly
●
IPTU upper and lower guide assemblies
408 Chapter 6 Service
ENWW
HP Confidential
Output accessories CAUTION: Disconnect the output accessory from the product before servicing. ●
Shared output accessory assemblies ◦
Top cover lock assembly
◦
Latch lower covers (front and rear)
◦
Latch assembly
◦
Bin cable guide cover
◦
Open/closed stepped cover assembly
◦
Upper stepped cover assembly
◦
Lower stepped cover assembly
◦
Top door assembly
◦
Front door
◦
Inner upper cover assembly
◦
Clutch assembly (front side)
◦
Sensor switch assembly
◦
Inner lower cover assembly
◦
Front foot cover assembly
◦
Rear cover
◦
Main controller PCA assembly CAUTION: ESD sensitive assembly. CAUTION: When you install the memory device, the notch on the device and the notch on the socket must be aligned. If the memory device is not correctly installed, the device polarity will be reversed which will damage the memory device.
◦
Entrance upper guide assembly
◦
Rear foot cover assembly
◦
Stack wall upper assembly and upper wall guide assembly
◦
Upper crossmember assembly CAUTION: Do not drop any of the parts into the accessory. CAUTION: The black plastic bracket along the front edge of the assembly, and the spring underneath the assembly are not captive. Do not lose these parts when removing or handling the assembly.
◦
ENWW
Paper feed drive assembly
Output accessories 409
HP Confidential
◦
Pressure roller assembly Reinstallation tip When the assembly is reinstalled, first position the rear of the shaft in the hole of the chassis.
◦
Stack upper bin and lower bin assemblies NOTE: The stack upper bin assembly and the stack lower bin assembly look identical, but are different. Do not reverse the locations of the bins when they are reinstalled. The upper bin assembly has two connectors and a ground wire at the end of the cable. The lower bin assembly has only one connector and a ground wire at the end of the cable. Also, the lower bin assembly has a coil around the end of the cable.
◦
Height wall assembly
◦
Paper face sensor assembly CAUTION: Take note of how the spring is installed before removing the assembly. Do not lose the spring when the assembly is removed.
◦
Flag paper sensing sensor assembly CAUTION: Take note of how the spring is installed before removing the assembly. Do not lose the spring when the assembly is removed.
◦
Staple sub assembly TIP: When you reinstall the staple sub assembly, make sure that the rear tabs of the assembly engage the slots in the sheet-metal bracket.
◦
Staple connecting cable assembly Reinstallation tip When the cable is reinstalled, make sure that it is positioned correctly and will not be pulled tight at either end when the staple sub assembly moves along the staple assembly.
◦
Staple assembly TIP: It is easier to release the entire retainer from the sheet-metal stapler assembly tray than trying to release the wire harness from the retainer. TIP: You might have to move the staple assembly up and down, and rotate it right and left, as you slide it out of the accessory to completely remove it.
◦
Paper detect holder assembly
◦
Operation tray assembly Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the stack-delivery roller, pre-install the bearing, washer, and e-ring on the clutch-side of the shaft and then insert that end of the shaft first. NOTE: When removing parts inside the operation tray, be careful not to exert force on the aligning plates (front/rear) or the rear-end stopper plate. Do not damage the mylar sheet when handling the assembly. CAUTION: Push in on the joggers when the assembly is reinstalled to avoid damaging the mylar sheet.
◦
Swing guide assembly
410 Chapter 6 Service
ENWW
HP Confidential
◦
Return roller assembly TIP: Do not damage the mylar sheet during removal or replacement.
◦
Clutch assembly (rear side)
◦
Stack ejection motor assembly CAUTION: The drive belt behind the motor is not captive. Do not lose the belt when the motor is removed.
◦
Press motor assembly
◦
Common driver PCA assembly CAUTION: ESD sensitive assembly.
◦
Interface cable assembly
◦
Saddle motor assembly (SS and BM) CAUTION: The drive belt behind the motor is not captive. Do not lose the belt when the motor is removed.
◦ ●
Paper pass assembly
Booklet maker accessory ◦
Knob
◦
Saddle output bin assembly CAUTION: The saddle output bin is still connected to the output accessory by a wire harness. Do not attempt to completely remove the bin.
◦
Right cover assembly (BM PCA) NOTE:
For booklet maker (BM) models only.
CAUTION: The punch hole assembly is still fastened to the accessory chassis, but you should be able to disengage the support bracket. ◦
Booklet maker controller PCA CAUTION: ESD sensitive assembly.
◦
Inner side plate assembly TIP: Removing these screws loosens the tray under the assembly. When the tray is loose, it can be slightly moved out of the way which makes removing the inner side plate assembly easier. CAUTION: Do not damage the sensor with the end of the shaft when the shaft is rotated out of the chassis.
ENWW
◦
Guide sensor assembly
◦
Guide motor assembly
◦
Saddle feed motor assembly
Output accessories 411
HP Confidential
IMPORTANT: Take note of how the belt is routed over the gears and belt-tension arm before you disengage the belt. CAUTION: Do not damage the wire harnesses when this cable tie is removed. Do not attempt to remove the connector at the motor end of the wire harness. This wire harness is soldered to the motor and cannot be removed. ◦
Folding-motor mount assembly TIP: When the assembly is reinstalled, you might have to disconnect connectors on the controller PCA, or release wire harnesses from other retainers in order to gain enough slack in the wire harnesses to close the retainer latch.
◦
Delivery switch mount assembly TIP: Releasing the wire harnesses from the retainers first, makes it easier to disconnect the connectors.
◦
Saddle stapler assembly
◦
Lower left guide assembly
◦
Saddle delivery inner cover, front assembly
◦
Saddle delivery inner cover, rear assembly
◦
Saddle guide assembly TIP: Slightly move the saddle guide assembly back and forth to make removing the hinge pin retainer easier.
◦
Saddle feed assembly TIP: It might be easier to disconnect the connectors if you first release the wire harnesses from the retainers.
◦
Saddle assembly CAUTION: The spring is not captive. Do not lose the spring when releasing it. Reinstallation tip Do not forget to reinstall this spring when the assembly is reinstalled, or a replacement assembly is installed. CAUTION: The assembly is heavy. IMPORTANT: Do not grasp the assembly along the top edge. Doing so can damage the mylar strip along the edge and cause paper jam problems when the assembly is reinstalled. IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the assembly sheet-metal brackets that contact the accessory chassis are flush against the chassis to prevent paper jam problems after the assembly is reinstalled. Make sure that the drive belts are correctly installed and have not been dislodged when handling the assembly.
◦
Upper delivery guide assembly
412 Chapter 6 Service
ENWW
HP Confidential
◦
Saddle paper delivery assembly
◦
Saddle rear end sensor assembly CAUTION: The assembly is still attached to the chassis by one wire harness. Do not attempt to competely remove the assembly.
●
Booklet maker and stapler/stacker with hole punch accessories ◦
Remove the punch front cover
◦
Punch lower front cover assembly
◦
Punch rear cover assembly
◦
Punch controller PCA assembly CAUTION: ESD sensitive assembly. TIP: Releasing the wire harnesses from the retainers might make it easier to disconnect some of the connectors on the PCA.
◦
Dust collector assembly
◦
Punch inner cover assembly
◦
Punch top cover Reinstallation tip The mounting holes for these two screws are slotted. Use these screws to adjust the position of the cover when it is reinstalled if it strikes the punch assembly or does not align correctly with the accessory covers.
◦
Punch hole assembly NOTE: The punch hole assembly is still fastened to the accessory chassis, but you should be able to disengage the support bracket.
ENWW
Output accessories 413
HP Confidential
414 Chapter 6 Service
ENWW
HP Confidential
7
Library
●
ENWW
Additional resources
415
HP Confidential
Additional resources Clink a link below to view the following resources: HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 User Guide HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M855 Service Manual HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 User Guide HP Color LaserJet Enterprise flow MFP M880 Service manual Output accessory error codes Additional resources PDF - contains links to the product support sites, HP ePrint, print drivers, and other support resources on www.hp.com. Quick Sets Notable - PDF describing the use of Quick Sets TIP: Check the product support Web sites for updated support information. (Product support Web sites are available for released products only.) www.hp.com/support/colorljM855 www.hp.com/support/colorljflowMFPM880
416 Chapter 7 Library
ENWW
